United States      Office of Research and
           Environmental Protection  Development
           Agency         Washington DC 20460
EPA/620/R-00/007
September 2000
xvEPA   I Surface Waters
 iBi
           Field Operations and
           Methods for Measuring the
           Ecological Condition of
           Non-Wadeable Rivers and
           Streams
           Environmental Monitoring and
           Assessment Program

-------

-------
                                        EPA/620/R-00/007
                                         September 2000
     Environmental Monitoring  and
          Assessment Program-
               Surf ace Waters:

   Field Operations and  Methods for
 Measuring the Ecological Condition
of Non-wadeable  Rivers And Streams
                        Edited by


              James M. Lazorchak1, Brian H. Hill1,
        Daniel K. Averill2, David V. Peck3, and Donald J. Klemm1

             1U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                Ecosystems Research Branch
             Ecological Exposure Research Division
             National Exposure Research Laboratory
                  Cincinnati, OH 45268

                2Dynamac International Corp.
                    200 SW 35th St.
                   Corvallis, OR 97333

             3U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                 Regional Ecology Branch
                 Western Ecology Division
     National Health and Environmental Effects Research Laboratory
                   Corvallis, OR 97333     m „
                                     ~ Recycled/Recyclable
                                       Printed with vegetable-based ink on
                                       paper that contains a minimum of
                                       50% post-consumer fiber content
                                       processed chlorine free.

-------
                        Notice
    This research described in this report has been funded wholly or
in part by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. This document
has been prepared at the EPA National Exposure Research Labora-
tory (Ecological Exposure Research Division, Cincinnati, Ohio) and
the National Health and Environmental Effects Research Laboratory
(Western Ecology Division, Corvallis, Oregon), under the following
contracts and cooperative agreements:

   Contract 68-C6-0006 to Dynamac International, Inc.
   Contract 68-W5-0065 to OAO, Inc.
   Cooperative Agreement CR824682 to Oregon State University

    This work is in support of the Environmental Monitoring and As-
sessment Program (EMAP). Mention of trade names or commercial
products does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

    The correct citation for this document is:

    Lazorchak, J.M., Hill, B.H., Averill, O.K., D.V.  Peck, and D.J.
    Klemm  (editors). 2000. Environmental Monitoring and Assess-
    ment Program -Surface Waters: Field Operations and Methods
    for Measuring the Ecological Condition of Non-Wadeable Riv-
    ers and Streams U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cin-
    cinnati OH.

-------
    Section authors are listed below. Complete addresses for authors
are provided in each section.
    Section 1:   J.M. Lazorchak1, A.T. Herlihy2, and O.K. Averill3
    Section 2:   J.M. Lazorchak1, O.K. Averill3, B. H. Hill1, F. H.
                 McCormick1, A.T. Herlihy2, P.A. Monaco3, and M.R.
                 Cappaert4
    Section 3:   A.T. Herlihy2, J.M. Lazorchak1, O.K. Averill3, B. H. Hill1,
                 F. H. McCormick1, D.J. Klemm1, P.A. Monaco3, and
                 M.R. Cappaert4
    Section 4:   A.T. Herlihy2 and J. M. Lazorchak1
    Section 5:   A.T. Herlihy2 and C.W. Hendricks5
    Section 6:   P.R. Kaufmann5
    Section 7:   B.H. Hill1 and A.T. Herlihy2
    Section 8:   B:.H. Hill1 and A.T. Herlihy2
    Section 9:   D.J. Klemm1, J.M. Lazorchak1, and D.V. Peck5
    Section 10: F.H. McCormick1 and R.M. Hughes3
    Section 11: J.M. Lazorchak1, F.H. McCormick1, R.M. Hughes3, and
                 S.A. Peterson5
    Section 12: A.T. Herlihy2
    Section 13: J.M. Lazorchak1 and O.K. Averill3
 'U.S. EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory,.Cincinnati, OH 45268.
 department of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon State University, Corvallis, OR 97333.
 3Dynamac International, Inc., Corvallis, OR 97333.
 4OAO Corp., Corvallis, OR 97333.
 'U.S. EPA, National Health and Environmental Effects Research Laboratory, Corvallis, OR 97333.

-------
                              Abstract

          The methods and instructions for field operations presented in this
      manual for surveys of non-wadeable streams and rivers were developed
      and tested based on 55 sample sites in the Mid-Atlantic region and 53
      sites in an Oregon study during two years of pilot and demonstration
      projects (1997 and 1998). These projects were conducted under the spon-
      sorship of the U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency and its collabora-
      tors through the Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program
      (EMAP). This program focuses on evaluating ecological conditions on
      regional and national scales. This document describes procedures for
      collecting data, samples, and information about biotic assemblages, en-
      vironmental measures, or attributes of indicators of non-wadeable stream
      ecosystem condition. The procedures  presented in this manual were
      developed based on standard or accepted methods, modified as neces-
      sary to adapt them to EMAP sampling requirements. They are intended
      for use in field studies sponsored by EMAP. In addition to methodology,
      additional information on data management, safety and health, and other
      logistical aspects is integrated into the procedures and overall opera-
      tional scenario. Procedures are described for collecting field measure-
      ment data and/or acceptable index samples for several response and
      stressor indicators, including water chemistry, physical habitat, benthic
      macroinvertebrate assemblages, aquatic vertebrate assemblages, fish
      tissue contaminants, periphyton assemblages, and sediment commu-
      nity metabolism. The manual describes field  implementation of these
      methods and the logistical foundation constructed during field projects.
      Flowcharts and other graphic aids provide overall summaries of specific
      field activities required to visit a river site and collect data for these indica-
      tors. Tables give step-by-step protocol instructions. These figures and
      tables can be extracted and bound separately to make a convenient quick
      field reference for field teams. The manual also includes example field
      data forms for recording measurements and observations made in the
      field and sample tracking information. Checklists of all supplies and equip-
      ment needed for each field task are included to help ensure that these
      materials are available when required.
fes


-------
               Table of Contents
Section
Page
Notice	'.	ii
Section Authors	;	iii
Abstract	iv
Table of Contents	v
Figures	ix
Tables..,	-•	xii
Acknowledgments..	xv
Acronyms, Abbreviations, and Measurement Units	xvi

1  Introduction	1-1
  1.1 Overview of EMAP-Surface Waters	1-1
  1.2 Summary of Ecological Indicators	1-2
   1.2.1  Water Chemistry	1-3
   1.2.2 Physical Habitat...	1-3
   1.2.3 Periphyton Assemblage	1-3
   1.2.4 Sediment Community Metabolism	1-4
   1.2.5 Benthic Macro!nvertebrate Assemblage	1-4
   1.2.6 Aquatic Vertebrate Assemblages	1-5
   1.2.7 Fish Tissue Contaminants	1-5
  1.3 Objectives and Scope of the Field Operations and
      Methods Manual	1-6
  1.4 Quality Assurance	1-7
  1.5 Literature Cited	1-7

2  Overview of Field Operations	2-1
  2.1 Daily  Operational Scenario	2-2
  2.2 Guidelines for Recording Data and Information	2-3
  2.3 Safety And Health	2-3
   2.3.1  General Considerations	2-8

-------
     Table of Contents (continued)
Section
Page
   2.3.2  Safety Equipment and Facilities	2-9
   2.3.3  Safety Guidelines for Field Operations	2-10
  2.4 Literature Cited	2-11

3  Base Location Activities	3-1
  3.1  Activities before each River Visit	3-1
   3.1.1  Confirming Site Access	3-1
   3.1.2  Daily Sampling Itinerary	3-2
   3.1.3  Instrument Inspections and Performance Tests	3-3
     3.1.3.1  Global Positioning System Receiver	3-3
     3.1.3.2  Dissolved Oxygen Meter	3-3
     3.1.3.3  Conductivity Meters	3-3
   3.1.4  Preparation of Equipment and Supplies	3-4
  3.2 Activities after each River Visit	3-5
   3.2.1  Equipment Care	3-6
   3.2.2  Sample Tracking, Packing, and Shipment	3-7
  3.3 Equipment and Supplies	3-9
  3.4 Literature Cited	3-13

4  Initial Site Procedures	4-1
  4.1  Site Verification Activities	4-1
   4.1.1  Locating the Index Site	4-1
   4.1.2  Determining the Sampling Status of a Non-
         wadeable Stream or River	4-3
   4.1.3  Sampling During or After Rain Events	4-4
   4.1.4  Site Photographs	4-4
  4.2 Laying Out the Sampling Reach	4-4
  4.3 Equipment and Supplies	4-7

5 Water Chemistry And Microbiology	5-1
  5.1  Microbial Sampling	5-2
  5.2 Sample Collection	5-2
  5.3 Field Measurements	5-3
  5.4 Equipment and Supplies	5-3
  5.5 Literature Cited	5-10

6  Physical Habitat Characterization — Non-wadeable
   Rivers	6-1


-------
     Table of Contents (continued)
Section
Page
  6.1  Components of the Field Habitat Assessment	6-3
  6.2  Habitat Sampling Locations on the Study Reach	6-3
  6.3  Logistics, Work Row, and Defining Sample Locations	6-9
  6.4  Reconnaissance and Reach Marking	6-9
  6.5  Thalweg Profile	6-10
   6.5.1  Thalweg Depth Profile	6-10
   6.5.2  Pole Drag for Snags and Substrate Characteristics... 6-10
   6.5.3  Channel Habitat Classification	6-11
  6.6  Channel Margin ("Littoral") and Riparian Measurements 6-11
   6.6.1  Slope and Bearing	6-13
   6.6.2  Channel Margin Depth and Substrate	6-15
   6.6.3  Large Woody Debris	6-16
   6.6.4  Bank Angle and Channel Cross-Section Morphology 6-18
   6.6.5  Canopy Cover (Densiometer)	6-21
   6.6.6  Riparian Vegetation Structure	6-21
   6.6.7  Fish Cover, Algae, Aquatic Macrophytes	6-23
   6.6.8  Human Influences	6-25
  6.7  Summary Of Workflow	6-26
  6.8  Equipment And Supplies	6-26
  6.9  Literature Cited	6-27

7 Periphyton	7-1
  7.1  Sample Collection	7-1
  7.2  Preparation Of Laboratory Samples	7-2
   7.2.1  ID/Enumeration Sample	7-3
   7.2.2  Chlorophyll Sample	7-3
   7.2.3  Biomass Sample	7-7
   7.2.4  Acid/Alkaline Phosphatase Activity Sample	7-8
  7.3  Equipment and Supplies	7-8
  7.4  Literature Cited	7-10

8  Sediment Community Metabolism	8-1
  8.1  Sample Collection	8-1
  8.2  Determining Sediment Respiration	8-2
  8.3  Equipment and Supplies	8-3

9  Benthic Macroinvertebrates	9-1

-------
     Table of Contents  (continued)

Section                                               Page

   9.1.1   Sample Collection Using Kick Nets	9-3
    9.1.1.1  Selection of Sampling Points	9-3
    9.1.1.2  Sample Collection	9-3
   9.1.2  Sample Processing: Kick Net Samples	9-3
   9.1.3  Description of Drift Nets and Habitat Sampled	.9-3
    9.1.3.1.  Drift Net Sampling Procedures	9-5
    9.1.3.2  Processing and Preservation of Drift Samples	9-7
    9.1.3.3  Maintenance of the Drift Nets	9-7
  9.2  Equipment Checklist	9-7
  9.3  Literature Cited	9-12

10 Aquatic Vertebrates	10-1
   10.1 Sample Collection	10-1
    10.1.1 Electrofishing	10-1
   10.2 Sample Processing	10-5
    10.2.1 Taxonomic Identification and Tally	10-5
    10.2.2 External Examination and Length Measurements ... 10-7
    10.2.3 Preparing Voucher Specimens	10-7
   10.3 Equipment and Supplies	10-12
   10.4 Literature Cited	10-14

11 Fish Tissue Contaminants	11-1
   11.1 Selecting Fish Tissue Specimens	11-2
   11.2 Preparing Composite Samples for Primary and
       Secondary Target Species	11-3
   11.3 Equipment and Supplies	11-5

12 Visual Stream Assessments	12-1
   12.1 Visual Stream Assessment	12-1
   12.2 Equipment and Supplies	12-5

13 Final Site Activities	13-1

Appendix                                             Page

   A   Equipment and Supply Checklists	A-1
   B   Quick Reference Guides	B-1
   C   Species Codes for Aquatic Vertebrates	C-1

-------
                        Figures

Figure                                                  Page

   2-1.  Stream reach characteristics	2-2

   3-1.  Activities conducted at base locations	3-2
   3-2.  Sample container labels	3-6
   3-3.  Tracking form to accompany shipped samples	3-8
   3-4.  Equipment and supply checklist for base location
        activities	,	3-12

   4-1.  Verification Form (page 1)	4-3
   4-2.  Verification Form (page 2)	4-6
   4-3.  Sampling reach features	4-7
   4-4.  Equipment and supplies checklist for initial site
        activities	4-8

   5-1.  Completed sample labels for water chemistry and
        microbiology	5-3
   5-2.  Sample Collection Form (page 2), showing data
        recorded for water chemistry and microbial samples	5-6
   5-3.  Field Measurement Form (page 1), showing data
        recorded for water chemistry	5-8
   5-4.  Checklist of equipment and supplies for water
        chemistry	5-9

   6-1.  River reach sample layout	6-4
   6-2.  Littoral-Riparian Plots for characterizing riparian
        vegetation, human influences, fish cover, littoral
        substrate, and littoral depths	6-6
   6-3.  Thalweg Profile Form	6-7
   6-4.  Channel/Riparian Transect Form - page 1 (front side) .... 6-8

-------
                  Figures  (continued)
    Figure
Page
       6-5.  Channel/Riparian Transect Form -
            page 1 (back side)	6-14
       6-6.  Schematic showing bankfull channel and incision
            for channels	6-22
       6-7.  Schematic of modified convex spherical canopy
            densiometer	6-22
       6-8.  Checklist of equipment and supplies for physical
            habitat	6-28

       7-1.  Index sampling design for periphyton	7-2
       7-2.  Sample Collection Form (pagel) showing data
            recorded for periphyton	7-4
       7-3.  Completed set of periphyton sample labels	7-5
       7-4.  Filtration apparatus for preparing chlorophyll and
            biomass subsamples for periphyton	7-7
       7-5.  Checklist of equipment and supplies for periphyton	7-9

       8-1.  Field Measurement Form (page 1), for sediment
            metabolism samples	8-4
       8-2.  Completed sample labels for sediment metabolism	8-5
       8-3.  Checklist of equipment and supplies for sediment
            metabolism	8-5

       9-1.  Modified kick net	9-1
       9-2.  Completed labels for benthic macroinvertebrate
            samples	9-6
       9-3.  Shallow and deep set drift net assemblies	9-7
       9-4.  Sample Collection Form (page 1), showing
            information for benthic macroinvertebrate samples	9-8
       9-5.  Blank labels for benthic invertebrate samples	9-9
       9-6.  Equipment and supply checklist for benthic
            macroinvertebrates	9-12

       10-1. Vertebrate Collection Form	10-4
       10-2. Fish length measurements	10-6
       10-3. Vertebrate Length Recording Form	10-9
       10-4. Completed voucher sample label and specimen
            bag tag for aquatic vertebrates	10-11
i»ti£^

-------
             Figures  (continued)
Figure
Page
  10-5. Equipment and supplies checklist for aquatic
       vertebrates	10-13

  11-1. Sample Collection Form, showing information
       recorded for fish tissue  samples	11-5
  11-2. Completed sample labels for fish tissue
       contaminants	11-6
  11-3. Equipment and supplies checklist for fish tissue
       contaminants	11-7

  12-1. Assessment Form (page 1)	12-3
  12-2. Assessment Form (page 2)	12-4
  12-3. Checklist of equipment and supplies required for
       visual assessments	12-5

-------
                         Tables
Table
Page
  2-1.  Range of Times for Field Activities	2-3
  2-2a. General Sequence of Activities Conducted on Western
       Non-wadeable Streams	2-4
  2-2b. General Sequence of Activities Conducted on Eastern
       Non-wadeable Streams	2-5
  2-3.  Guidelines for Recording Field Data and Other
       Information	-	2-6
  2-4.  General Health and Safety Considerations	2-9
  2-5.  General Safety Guidelines for Field Operations	2-10

  3-1.  Stock Solutions, Uses, and Instructions for
       Preparation	3-4
  3-2.  Performance Check of Conductivity Meters	3-5
  3-3.  Equipment Care after Each River Visit	3-7
  3-4.  General Guidelines for Packing and Shipping
       Samples	3-10

  4-1.  Site Verification Procedures	4-2
  4-2.  Guidelines to Determine the Influence of Rain
       Events	4-4
  4-3.  Laying out the Sampling Reach	4-5

  5-1.  Sample Collection Procedures for Water Chemistry	5-4
  5-2.  Sample Collection Procedures for Microbiology	5-5
  5-3.  Procedures for Streamside and In Situ Chemistry
       Measurements	5-7

  6.1   Components of River Physical Habitat Protocol	6-5
  6-2.  Thalweg Profile Procedure	6-12

-------
              Tables (continued)
Table
Page
  6-3.   Channel Unit Categories	6-13
  6-4.   Procedure for Obtaining Slope and Bearing Data	6-16
  6-5.   Channel Margin Depth and Substrate Procedure	6-17
  6-6.   Procedure for Tallying Large Woody Debris	6-18
  6-7.   Procedure for Bank Angle and Channel Cross-Section. 6-19
  6-8.   Procedure for Canopy Cover Measurements	6-22
  6-9.   Procedure for Characterizing Riparian Vegetation
       Structure	:	6-24
  6-10. Procedure for Estimating Fish Cover	6-25
  6-11. Procedure for Estimating Human Influence	6-26
  6-12. Summary of Workflow	6-27

  7-1.   Procedure for Collecting Composite Index Samples
       of Periphyton	7-3
  7-2.   Preparation of ID/Enumeration Samples for
       Periphyton	7-5
  7-3.   Procedure for Preparing Chlorophyll Samples for
       Periphyton	7-6
  7-4,   Procedure for Preparing Biomass Samples for
       Periphyton	7-8
  7-5.   Procedure for Preparing Acid/Alkaline Phosphatase
       Activity Samples for Periphyton	7-9

  8-1.   Sediment Collection Procedure	8-2
  8-2.   Procedure to Measure Sediment Respiration	8-2

  9-1.   Collecting Kick Net Samples from  Nonwadeable
       Streams: Riffle/Glide Macrohabitats	9-4
  9-2.   Collecting Kick Net Samples From Nonwadeable
       Streams: Pool Macrohabitats	9-5
  9-3.   Processing Kick Net Samples: Non-wadeable
       Streams	9-6
  9-4.   Collection Procedures for Drift Net Samples:
       Non-wadeable Streams	9-10
  9-5.   Procedures For Processing Drift Net Samples:
       Non-wadeable Streams	9-11

  10-1. Procedure to Collect Aquatic Vertebrates by Raft
       Electrofishing	10-3

-------
             Tables  (continued)
Table
Page
  10-2. Procedure to Identify, Tally, and Examine Aquatic
      Vertebrates	10-6
  10-3. External Anomaly Categories and Codes	10-8
  10-4. Guidelines and Procedures for Preparing Aquatic
      Vertebrate Voucher Specimens	 10-10

  11-1. Procedure to Prepare Fish Tissue Samples	 11-4

  12-1. Procedure for Conducting the  Final Visual
      Assessment of a River	12-2

-------
             Acknowledgements
    We greatly appreciate the peer review comments of J. David Allan,
Richard W. Merritt, and Kelly Wessell from the Department of Ento-
mology, Michigan State Univeristy, Tom Bassita from West Virginia De-
partment of Natural Resources, and Matthew J. Kline from the Univer-
sity of Maryland Center for Enivronmental Science. We also appreci-
ate a review from S.E. Gwin, Dynamac Corp., Corvallis, OR. The ef-
forts and dedication of the following field personnel from 1997 and
1998 in implementing these protocols and providing feedback for clari-
fication and improvement are also recognized: S. Intelmann, A. Cooley,
C. Johnson, M. McCrae, J. Shaich, S. Corbett, A. Uber, and R. Curl. M.
Hails-Avery (National Asian Pacific Center on Aging, Senior Environ-
mental Employment Program, Corvallis, OR) and F. Beck (Dynamac
Corp., Corvallis, OR) assisted with preparing many of the figures. G.
Mosher (OAO Inc., Corvallis,  OR) prepared the field data forms.

-------
     Acronyms, Abbreviations, and
             Measurement Units
  Acronyms and Abbreviations
  AFDM      Ash-free dry mass
  APA       Acid/Alkaline Phosphatase Activity
  BPJ       Best Professional Judgment
  BOD       Biological Oxygen Demand
  CENR     (White House) Committee on the Environment and Natu-
            ral Resources
  CFR       Code of Federal Regulations
  Dbh       Diameter at breast height
  DC       Direct Current
  DIG       Dissolved Inorganic Carbon
  DLGs      Digital Line Graphs
  DO       Dissolved oxygen
  EERD     Ecological Exposure Research  Division
  EMAP     Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program
  EMAP-SW Environmental Monitoring and Assessment Program-
            Surface Waters Resource Group
   EPA
   ERB
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Ecosystems Research Branch
111 f	
1HM

-------
    Acronyms, Abbreviations,  and
   Measurement Units  (continued)

Acronyms and Abbreviations
GPS       Global Positioning System -
ID        identification
LWD       Large Woody Debris
NAWQA    National Water-Quality Assessment Program
NERL     National Exposure Research Laboratory
NHEERL   National Health and Environmental Effects Research
          Laboratory
ORD      Office of Research and Development
OSHA     Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PFD       Personal Flotation Device
P-Hab     physical habitat
PVC      polyvinyl chloride
QA       quality assurance
QC       quality control
R-EMAP   Regional Environmental Monitoring and Assessment
          Program
SL       Standard length
SOP      Standard Operating Procedure
TL       Total length
USGS     United States Geological Survey
WED     Western Ecology Division
YOY      young of year
YSI       Yellow Springs Instrument system

-------
    Acronyms,  Abbreviations, and
    Measurement Units (continued)
Measurement Units
amps     amperes
cm       centimeter
gal       gallon
ha       hectare
Hz       Hertz
in        inches
L        liter
m        meter
m2       square meters
mg/L      milligram per liter
mm       millimeter
m       micrometer
S/cm     microsiemens per centimeter
msec     millisecond
ppm      parts per million
psi       pounds per square inch
V        volts    "
VA       volt-ampere

-------
                        Section  1
                      Introduction
         James M. Lazorchak1, Alan T. Herlihy2, and Daniel K. Averill3
    This manual contains procedures
for collecting samples and measure-
ment data from various biotic and abi-
otic components of non-wadeable
streams and rivers in the Mid Atlantic
and Pacific Northwest. These proce-
dures  were developed and used be-
tween 1997 and 1998 in research
studies of the U.S. Environmental Pro-
tection Agency's (EPA) Environmen-
tal Monitoring and Assessment Pro-
gram  (EMAP). The purposes of this
manual are to: (1) Document the pro-
cedures used in the collection of field
data and various types of samples for
the various research studies; and (2)
provide these procedures for use by
other groups implementing river
monitoring programs. These proce-
'U.S. EPA, National Exposure Research Labora-
tory, Ecological Exposure Research Division, 26
W. Martin Luther King Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45268
Department of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon
State University, c/o U.S. EPA, 200 SW 35th St.,
Corvallis, OR 97333
'Dynamac International Corp., 200 SW 35th St.,
Corvallis, OR 97333
dures are designed for use during a one-day
visit by a crew of four or five persons to sam-
pling sites located On larger, non-wadeable
streams and rivers (generally stream order 4
or greater in the Mid Atlantic and Northwest-
ern U.S.).

1.1   Overview  of  EMAP-
Surface Waters

     The U.S. EPA has designated EMAP
to develop the necessary monitoring tools to
determine the current status, extent, changes
and trends in the condition of our nation's
ecological resources on regional and national
scales (U.S. EPA, 1998). The nation's eco-
logical resources are a national heritage, as
essential to the country now and in the future
as they have been in the past. Data indicate
that regional and international environmental
problems may be endangering these essential
resources. The potential threats include acid
rain, ozone  depletion, point  and nonpoint
sources of pollution, and climate change.

     The tools being developed by EMAP
include appropriate indicators of ecological

-------
condition, and statistical sampling designs to
determine the status and extent of condition,
and to detect regional-scale trends in condi-
tion. When fully implemented in a national
monitoring framework, such as that being
developed by the White House Committee on
Environment and Natural Resources (CENR;
Committee on Environment and Natural Re-
sources, 1997), these tools will provide envi-
ronmental decision makers with statistically
valid interpretive reports describing the health
of our nation's ecosystems (Whittier and
Paulsen, 1992). Knowledge of the health of
our ecosystems will give decision makers and
resource managers the ability to make in-
formed decisions, set rational priorities, and
make known to the public costs, benefits, and
risks of proceeding or refraining from imple-
menting specific environmental regulatory
actions. Ecological status and trend data will
allow decision makers to objectively assess
whether or not the nation's ecological re-
sources are responding positively, negatively,
or not at all, to existing or future regulatory
programs.

     The following three objectives guide
EMAP research activities (U.S. EPA, 1998):

   •  Estimate  the  current status, extent,
     changes and trends in indicators of the
     condition of the nation's ecological
     resources on  a  regional  basis with
     known confidence.

   •  Monitor indicators of pollutant expo-
     sure  and  habitat condition and seek
     associations between human-induced
     stresses and ecological condition.

   •  Provide periodic statistical summaries
     and interpretive reports on ecological
     status and trends to resource managers
     and the public.
    The EMAP Surface Waters Resource
Group (EMAP-SW) is charged with devel-
oping the appropriate tools to assess the health
of lakes, streams, rivers, and wetlands in the
United States. The first phase of the program
started with a study of northeastern lakes be-
tween 1991 and 1996 (Larsen and Christie,
1993; Baker et al, 1997). In 1992 and 1993,
a pilot study of wetland ecosystems was con-
ducted in the Prairie Pothole region of the
northern plains region of the U.S. (Peterson
et al., 1997). In 1993 - 1994 the U.S. EPA
Office of Research and Development and
Region 3 Office, with assistance from the
U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service and States in
the eastern United States (WV, NY,  PA, VA
and MD) conducted the first EMAP wade-
able stream pilot which was called the Mid-
Atlantic Highlands Assessment (MAHA). In
1997 - 1998 the pilot was expanded  to addi-
tional states (DE, NJ, and NC) and ecoregions
and both wadeable and non-wadeable streams
were sampled. The 1997 - 1998 study was
called the Mid-Atlantic Integrated Assessment
(MAIA). Protocols that were used in wadeable
streams in the MAHA and MAIA studies are con-
tained in the manual' Environmental Monitoring
and Assessment Program - Surface  Waters.
Field Operations and Methods for Measuring
the Ecological Condition of Wadeable Streams.
EPA/620/R-94/004F."  (Lazorchak, et al.,
1998). Many of the protocols used  on non-
wadeable streams in 1997-1998 in the eastern
and western United states were adapted or modi-
fied from the 1997 manual. The specific research
studies dealing with non-wadeable streams and
rivers are described in more detail in the following
section.

 1.2  Summary of

 Ecological  Indicators
     The following sections describe the ra-
tionale for each of the ecological indicators

-------
currently included in the non-wadeable river
sampling procedures presented in this manual.
Evaluation activities to determine the suitabil-
ity of individual indicators to robustly deter-
mine ecological condition are ongoing at this
time. This information is presented to help
users understand the various field procedures
and the significance of certain aspects of the
methodologies.

     Currently, EMAP considers two princi-
pal types of indicators, condition and stressor
(U.S. EPA, 1998). Condition indicators are
biotic or abiotic characteristics of an ecosys-
tem that can provide an estimate of the condi-
tion of an ecological resource with respect to
some environmental value, such as biotic in-
tegrity. Stressor indicators are characteristics
that are expected to change the condition of a
resource if the intensity or magnitude is al-
tered.
           Water Chemistry
     Data are collected from each river for a
variety of physical and chemical constituents.
Information from these analyses is used to
evaluate river condition with respect to stres-
sors such as acidic deposition, nutrient enrich-
ment, and other inorganic contaminants. In
addition, rivers can be classified with respect
to water chemistry type, water clarity, mass
balance budgets of constituents, temperature
regime, and presence of anoxic conditions.

 1.2.2   Physical Habitat
     Naturally occurring differences among
surface waters in physical habitat structure
and associated hydraulic characteristics con-
tributes to much of the observed variation in
species composition and abundance within a
zoogeographic province. The structural com-
plexity of aquatic habitats provides the vari-
ety of physical  and chemical conditions to
support diverse biotic assemblages and main-
tain long-term stability. Anthropogenic alter-
ations of riparian areas and river channels,
wetland drainage, grazing and agricultural
practices, and river bank modifications such
as revetments or development, generally act
to reduce the complexity of aquatic habitat
and result in a loss of species and ecosystem
degradation.

     Stressor indicators derived from data
collected about physical habitat quality will
be used to help explain or diagnose river con-
dition relative to various condition indicators.
Important attributes of physical habitat in riv-
ers are channel dimensions, gradient, substrate
characteristics; habitat complexity and cover;
riparian vegetation cover and structure; dis-
turbance due to human activity, and channel-
riparian interaction (Kaufmann, 1993). Overall
objectives for this indicator are to develop quan-
titative and reproducible indices, using both
multiyariate and multimetric approaches, to clas-
sify rivers and to monitor biologically relevant
changes in habitat quality and intensity of dis-
turbance. Kaufmann et al. (1999) discuss pro-
cedures  for reducing EMAP field habitat
measurements and observations to metrics that
describe channel and riparian habitat at the reach
scale.

1.2.3  Periphyton

Assemblage
     Periphyton are the algae, fungi, bacteria,
and protozoa associated  with substrates in
aquatic habitats. These organisms exhibit high
diversity and are a major component in energy
flow and nutrient cycling in aquatic ecosystems.
Many characteristics of periphyton community
structure and function can be used to develop
indicators of ecological conditions in streams.
Periphyton are sensitive to many environmental
conditions, which can be detected by changes

-------
in species composition, cell density, ash free dry
mass (AFDM), chlorophyll, and enzyme activ-
ity (e.g., alkaline and acid phosphatase). Each
of these characteristics may be used, singly or
in concert, to assess condition with respect to
societal values such as biological integrity and
trophic condition.

    A hierarchical framework was used in the
development of the periphyton indices of river
condition. The framework involved the calcula-
tion of composite indices for biotic integrity,
ecological sustainability, and trophic condition.
The composite indices were calculated from
measured or derived first-order and second-
order indices. The first-order indices included
species composition (richness, diversity), cell
density, AFDM, chlorophyll, and enzyme ac-
tivity (e.g., Saylor et al, 1979), which individu-
ally are indicators of ecological condition in
streams. Second-order indices were calculated
from periphyton characteristics, such as the au-
totrophic index (Weber, 1973), community simi-
larity compared to reference sites, and auteco-
logical indices  (e.g., Lowe, 1974; Lange-
Bertalot, 1979; Charles, 1985;Dixitetal, 1992).

1,2.4  Sediment

Community Metabolism
    Ecosystems are complex, self-regulating,
functional units defined by rates and pro-
cesses, such as energy flow or material cy-
cling. These processes are mediated by the
trophic structure of the ecosystem, and inte-
grate the functioning of the entire community.
Energy flow and material cycling are impor-
tant components of two major concepts in
stream ecology: The river continuum concept
and resource spiraling. Heterotrophic micro-
organisms (bacteria and fungi) are responsible
for oxygen sags in streams and for much of
the decomposition of organic matter depos-
ited in them. Measuring the rate of oxygen con-
sumption within the soft sediments of a river
provides a functional indicator of energy flow
and material transformation within the ecosys-
tem

1.2.5   Benthic

Macroinvertebrate

Assemblage
     Benthic macroinvertebrates inhabit the
sediment or live on the bottom substrates of
rivers. The macroinvertebrate assemblages in
rivers reflect overall biological integrity of the
benthic community and monitoring these as-
semblages is useful in assessing the status of
the water body and discerning trends. Benthic
communities respond differently to a  wide
array of stressors. As a result of this, it  is of-
ten possible to determine the type of stress
that has affected a benthic macroinvertebrate
community (Plafkin et al., 1989; Klemm et
al., 1990). Because many macroinvertebrates
have relatively long life cycles of a year or
more  and are  relatively immobile,
macroinvertebrate community structure is a
function of past conditions.

     Two different approaches are currently
being evaluated to developing ecological in-
dicators based on benthic invertebrate assem-
blages. The first is a multimetric approach,
where different structural and functional at-
tributes of the assemblage are characterized
as "metrics". Individual metrics that respond
to different types of stressors are scored
against expectations under conditions of mini-
mal human disturbance. The individual met-
ric scores are then summed into an overall
index value that is used to judge the overall
level of impairment of an individual  river
reach. Examples of multimetric indices based
on benthic invertebrate assemblages include

-------
Kerans and Karr (1994), Fore et al. (1996)
and Barbour et al. (1995; 1996).

    The second approach being investigated.
is to develop indicators of condition based on
multivariate analysis of benthic assemblages
and associated abiotic variables. Examples of
this type of approach as applied to benthic
invertebrate assemblages include RIVPACS
(Wright, 1995), and BEAST (Reynoldson et
al., 1995). Rosenberg  and Resh (1993)
present various  approaches to  biological
monitoring using benthic invertebrates, and
Morris (1995) briefly summarizes and dis-
cusses approaches to  analyzing benthic
macroinvertebrate community data.

1.2,6  Aquatic

Vertebrate Assemblages
    Aquatic vertebrate assemblages of inter-
est to EMAP include fish and amphibians
(more so in the western U.S. where fish taxa
richness is less). The fish assemblage repre-
sents a critical component of biological integ-
rity from both an ecosystem function and a
public interest perspective. Historically, fish
assemblages have been used for biological
monitoring in streams more often than in lakes
(e.g.,  Plafkin et al., 1989; Karr, 1991). Fish
assemblages can serve as good indicators of
ecological conditions because fish are long-
lived  and mobile, forage at different trophic
levels, integrate effects of lower trophic lev-
els, and are reasonably easy to identify in the
field (Plafkin et al., 1989). Amphibians com-
prise a substantial portion of vertebrate biom-
ass in streams of many areas of the U.S.
(Hairston, 1987; Bury et al., 1991). Reports
of dramatic declines in amphibian biodiversity
(e.g.,  Blaustein and Wake, 1990; Phillips,
1990) has increased the level of interest in
monitoring these assemblages. Amphibians
may also provide more information about eco-
system condition in headwater or intermittent
streams in certain areas of the country than
other biological response indicators (Hughes,
1993). The objective of field sampling is to
collect a representative sample of the aquatic
vertebrate assemblage by methods designed
to 1) collect all except very rare species in the
assemblage and 2) provide a measure of the
abundance of species in the assemblages
(McCormick, 1993). Information collected for
EMAP that is related to vertebrate assem-
blages in rivers includes assemblage attributes
(e.g., species composition and relative abun-
dance) and the incidence of external patho-
logical conditions.

    Indicators based on vertebrate assem-
blages are being developed primarily using
the multimetric approach described in Section
1.3.5  for benthic macroinvertebrates,  and
originally conceived by Karr and others (Kan-
el al., 1986). Simon and Lyons (1995) pro-
vide a recent review of multimetric indicators
as applied to stream fish assemblages.

1.2.7   Fish Tissue

Contaminants
    Indicators of fish  tissue contaminants
attempt to provide measures of bioaccumuia-
tion of toxic chemicals in fish. When coupled
with study designs such as those being de-
veloped by EMAP, these indicators can be
used to estimate regional risks of consump-
tion to predators of fish (either wildlife or
human), and to track how this risk changes
with time in a region. It is also meant to be
used in conjunction with the other stressor
indicators (physical habitat, water chemistry,
land use, population density, other records of
relevant anthropogenic  stresses) and condi-
tion indicators (fish, macroinvertebrates, per-
iphyton) to help diagnose whether the probable

-------
cause of river degradation, when it is shown by
the condition indicators to occur, is water qual-
ity, physical habitat, or both.

     The various studies that have been done
on fish tissue contaminants have focused on
different parts of the fish: whole fish, fillets,
livers. For EMAP-SW, the focus is on whole
fish because of the emphasis on the ecologi-
cal health of the whole river (as opposed to a
focus on human health concerns). Whole fish
are a better indicator of risk to piscivorous
wildlife than fillets. We also should be able to
address potential risks to human health by
analyzing whole fish. Whole fish also present
fewer logistical problems for field crews (no
gutting required in the field) and the analyti-
cal lab (no filleting necessary).

     Samples are prepared for two major cat-
egories offish species. One sample is prepared
using a species whose adults are small (e.g.,
sculpins and small  minnows).  The second
sample is prepared using a species whose
adults are of larger size (e.g., squawfish, trout,
suckers, and sunfish). In addition to being
more ubiquitous  than the larger fish (and
therefore more  likely to be present in suffi-
cient numbers to composite), small fish have
other advantages over large fish. Most impor-
tantly, it may be possible to get a more repre-
sentative sample of the contaminant load in
that river segment (although it could be at a
lower level of bioaccumulation) by creating
a composite sample from a larger number of
small individuals than by compositing a few
individuals of larger species. Small fish may
be a more appropriate indicator for assessing
ecological risk, as they might be expected to
be prey for a larger number offish-eating ani-
mals (the majority of which will be piscivo-
rous birds and small mammals). The major
advantage that  larger fish could potentially
offer, whether predators (piscivores) or bot-
tom feeders, is a higher level of bioaccumula-
tion and thus greater sensitivity to detect con-
taminants. The relative bioaccumulation of
contaminants by large and small river fish
is not known, thus the reason for preparing
two samples in this study.

1.3   Objectives and Scope
of the Field Operations
and Methods Manual
     Only field-related sampling and data
collection activities are presented in this
manual. Laboratory procedures and methods
(including sample processing and analytical
methods) associated with each ecological in-
dicator are summarized in Chaloud and Peck,
1994 and Lazorchak et al. 1998); detailed
procedures will be published as a separate
document.

     This manual is organized to follow  the
sequence of field activities during the 1-day
site visit. Section 2 presents a general over-
view of all field activities. Section 3 presents
those procedures that are conducted at a
"base" location before and after a river site
visit. Section 4 presents the procedures  for
verifying the site location and defining a reach
of the river where subsequent sampling and
data collection activities are conducted. Sec-
tions 5 through 12 describe the procedures
,for collecting samples and field measurement
data for various condition and stressor indi-
cators. Specific procedures associated with
each indicator are presented  in stand alone
tables that can be copied, laminated, and taken
into the field for quick reference. Section 13
describes the final activities that are conducted
before leaving a river site. Appendix A con-
tains a list of all equipment and supplies re-
quired by a crew to complete all field activities
at a river. Appendix B presents a set of brief


-------
summaries of field procedures and activities that
can be laminated, collated into a 3-ring binder,
and taken into the field along with the proce-
dure tables. This waterproof handbook can
serve as the primary field reference for field
teams after they complete an intensive training
program. Appendix C contains a list of verte-
brate species names and corresponding species
codes developed for use in the eastern U.S. and
Oregon studies.

     Depending on the specific project and
approach to information management, field
teams may also be provided with an informa-
tion management handbook that contains in-
structions for tracking samples and generating
sampling status reports as well as using the
computers and associated hardware and soft-
ware. Field teams are also required to keep
the field operations and methods manual avail-
able in the field for reference and to address
questions pertaining to protocols that might
arise.

1.4  Quality Assurance

     Large-scale and/or long-term monitoring
programs such as those envisioned for EMAP
require a rigorous quality assurance (QA) pro-
gram that can be implemented consistently by
all participants throughout the duration of the
monitoring period. Quality assurance is a re-
quired element of all EPA-sponsored studies
that involve the collection of environmental
data (Stanley and  Verner, 1986). Field teams
should be provided a copy of the QA project
plan (e.g., Chaloud and  Peck, 1994) for
EMAP-SW activities. The QA plan contains
more detailed information regarding QA/QC
activities and procedures associated with gen-
eral field operations, sample collection, mea-
surement data collection for specific indicators,
and data reporting activities.

     Quality control (QC) activities associ-
ated with field operations are integrated into
the field procedures. Important QA activities
associated with field operations include a
comprehensive training program that includes
practice sampling visits, and the use of a quali-
fied museum facility or laboratory to confirm
any field identifications of biological speci-
mens. The overall sampling design  for
EMAP-SW related studies usually includes a
subset of sites (10 to 15 percent) that are re-
visited within a single sampling period and/
or across years (e.g., Larsen, 1997; Urquhart
et al., 1998).  Information from these repeat
visits is used in part to describe overall sam-
pling and measurement precision for the vari-
ous ecological indicators.

1.5  Literature Cited

Harbour, M.T., J.B. Stribling, and J.R. Karr.
    1995. The  multimetric approach  for
    establishing bidcriteria and measuring
    biological condition, pp. 69-80 IN: W.S.
    Davis and T.P. Simon (eds.) Biological
    Assessment and Criteria: Tools for Water
    Resource Planning and Decision-mak-
    ing. Lewis Publishers, Chelsea, Michi-
    gan.

Barbour, M.T., J. Gerritsen, G.E. Griffith, R.
    Frydenborg, E. McCarron, J.S. White,
    and M.L. Bastian. 1996. A framework for
    biological criteria for Florida streams
    using benthic macroinvertebrates. Jour-
    nal of the North American Benthological
    Society 15(2): 185-211.

Baker, J.R.,  D.V. Peck, and D.W. Sutton
    (editors). 1997. Environmental Monitor-
    ing and  Assessment Program-Surface
    Waters: Field Operations Manual for
    Lakes.  EPA/620/R-97/001.  U.S.  Envi-
    ronmental Protection Agency, Washing-
    ton, D.C.

Blaustein,  A.R.  and  D.B. Wake.  1990.
    Declining  amphibian  populations:  a

-------
   globalphenomenon? Trends in Ecology and
   Evolution 5:203-204.

Bury, R.B., P.C.  Corn, K.B. Autry, F.F.
   Gilbert, and L.L.C. Jones. 1991. Aquatic
   amphibian communities in Oregon and
   Washington,  pp.  353-362  IN:  L.F.
   Ruggiero, K.B. Aubry, A.B. Carey, and
   M.H. Huff (coordinators). Wildlife and
   Vegetation of Unmanaged Douglas-Fir
   Forests. General Technical Report PNW-
   GRT-285. USDA Forest Service, Port-
   land, Oregon.

Chaloud, D. J. and D.V. Peck (eds.). 1994.
   Environmental Monitoring and Assess-
   ment Program: Integrated Quality Assur-
   ance Project Plan for the Surface Waters
   Resource Group. EPA  600/X-91/080.
   Revision  2.00.   U.S.  Environmental
   Protection Agency, Las Vegas, Nevada.

Charles, D.F. 1985.  Relationships between
   surface sediment diatom assemblages and
   lakewater characteristics in Adirondack
   lakes. Ecology 66:994-1011.

Committee on Environment and Natural
   Resources. 1997. Integrating the Nation's
   Environmental Monitoring and research
   Networks and Programs: A Proposed
   Framework. March 1997 revision. Office
   of  Science and Technology  Policy,
   Washington, DC.

Dixit, S.S., J.P. Smol,  J.C. Kingston, and
   D.F. Charles. 1992. Diatoms: Powerful
   indicators  of environmental  change.
   Environmental Science and Technology
   26:22-33.

Fore, L.S., J.R. Karr, and R.W. Wisseman.
    1996. Assessing invertebrate responses to
   human activities, evaluating alternative
   approaches. Journal of the North Ameri-
   can Benthological Society 15:212-231.
Hairston, N.G. 1987. Community Ecology and
   Salamander Guilds. Cambridge University
   Press.

Hughes, R.M. (ed.). 1993. Stream Indicator
   and Design Workshop. EPA/600/R-93/
   138.  U.S. Environmental Protection
   Agency, Corvallis, Oregon.

Karr, J.R. 1991. Biological integrity: a long
   neglected aspect  of  water  resource
   management.  Ecological  Applications
   1:66-84.

Karr, J.R., K.D. Fausch, P.L. Angermeier,
   P.R. Yant, and I.J. Schlosser.  1986.
   Assessing Biological Integrity in Run-
   ning Waters: A Method and its Rationale.
   Illinois  Natural History Survey Special
   Publication 5. Champaign, IL.

Kaufmann,  P.R.   (ed.).   1993.  Physical
   Habitat,  pp. 59-69 IN: R.M. Hughes
   (ed.).  Stream  Indicator  and Design
   Workshop.  EPA/600/R-93/138.   U.S.
   Environmental  Protection  Agency,
   Corvallis, Oregon.

Kaufmann, P.R., P. Levine, E.G. Robison, C.
   Seeliger, and D.V. Peck. 1999. Quantify-
   ing Physical   Habitat  in Wadeable
   Streams. EPA 620/R-99/003.  Environ-
   mental  Monitoring  and  Assessment
   Program, U.S. Environmental Protection
   Agency, Corvallis, Oregon.

Kerans, B.L. and J.R. Karr. 1994. A benthic
   index of biotic integrity (B-IBI) for rivers
   of  the  Tennessee Valley. Ecological
   Applications 4:768-785.

Klemm, D.J., P.A. Lewis, F. Fulk,  J.M.
   Lazorchak. 1990. Macroinvertebrate Field
   and Laboratory Methods for Evaluating
   the Biological  Integrity  of Surface
   Waters. EPA/600/4-90/030. U.S. Envi-

-------
   ronmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati,
   Ohio.

Lange-Bertalot, H. 1979. Pollution tolerance
   of diatoms as criterion for water quality
   estimation. Nova Hedwigia 64:285-304.

Larsen, D.P. and S.J. Christie (eds.) 1993.
   EMAP-Surface  Waters  1991  Pilot
   Report. EPA/620/R-93/003. U.S. En-
   vironmental Protection Agency, Wash-
   ington, D.C.

Larsen, D.P.  1997. Sample survey design
   issues  for  bioassessment  of inland
   aquatic ecosystems.  Human and Eco-
   logical Risk Assessment 3:979-991.

Lazorchak, J.M., DJ. Klemm, and D.V.
   Peck  (eds.).   1998.  Environmental
   Monitoring and Assessment Program-
   Surface Waters: Field Operations and
   Methods for Measuring the Ecological
   Condition of Wadeable Streams. EPA
   620/R-94/004F.  U.S.  Environmental
   Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio.

Lowe, R.L. 1974. Environmental Require-
   ments  and Pollution  Tolerance  of
   Freshwater Diatoms.  U.S. Environ-
   mental Protection Agency, Environ-
   mental Monitoring  Series, National
   Environmental Research Center, Cin-
   cinnati, Ohio.

McCormick,  F.H. 1993. Fish. pp. 29-36
   IN: R.M. Hughes (ed.). Stream Indica-
   tor  Workshop.  EPA/600/R-93/138.
   U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
   Corvallis, Oregon.

Norris, R.H. 1995. Biological monitoring:
   the dilemma of data analysis. Journal of
   the  North  American  Benthological
   Society 14:440-450.
Peterson, S.A., L. Carpenter, G. Gutenspergen,
   and L.M. Cowardin (editors). 1997. Pilot
   Test of Wetland Condition Indicators in the
   Prairie Pothole Region of the United States.
   EPA/620/R-97/002. U.S. Environmental
   Protection Agency, Washington, D.C.

Phillips, K. 1990. Where have all the frogs
   and toads gone? Bioscience 40:422-424.

Plafkin, J.L., M.T. Barbour, K.D. Porter, S.K.
   Gross, and R.M. Hughes.  1989. Rapid
   BioassessmentProtocols for Use in Streams
   and Rivers:  Benthic Macroinvertebrates
   and Fish. EPA/440/4-89/001. U.S. Envi-
   ronmental Protection Agency, Washing-
   ton, D.C.

Reynoldson, T.B., R.C. Bailey, K.E. Day,
   and   R.H.   Norris.   1995.  Biological
   guidelines for freshwater sediment based
   on Benthic  Assessment Sediment (the
   BEAST) using a multivariate approach
   for predicting biological state. Australian
   Journal of Ecology 20:198-219.

Rosenberg,  D.M.  and  V.H. Resh.  1993.
   Freshwater Biomonitoring and Benthic
   Macroinvertebrtates. Chapman and Hall,
   New York.

Sayler, G.S., M. Puziss, and M. Silver. 1979.
   Alkaline phosphatase assay for freshwa-
   ter sediments:  application to perturbed
   sediment systems. Applied and Environ-
   mental Microbiology 38:922-927.

Simon, T.P. and J. Lyons. 1995. Application
   of the index of biotic integrity to evaluate
   water resources integrity in freshwater
   ecosystems, pp. 245-262 IN: W.S. Davis
   and   T.P.   Simon  (eds.),  Biological
   Assessment and Criteria: Tools for Water
   Resource Planning and Decision Mak-
   ing.   Lewis Publishers,  Boca  Raton,
   Florida.

-------
Stanley, T.W.andS.S.Verner. 1986. TheU.S.
   Environmental Protections Agency's quality
   assurance program, pp.  12-19 IN: J.K.
   Taylor and T.W. Stanley (eds.). Quality
   Assurance for Environmental Measure-
   ments. ASTM STP 867, American Society
   for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia,
   Pennsylvania.

Urquhart, N.S., S.G. Paulsen, and D.P. Larsen.
   1998.  Monitoring  for  policy-relevant
   regional trends over time.  Ecological
   Applications 8:246-257.

U.S. EPA. 1998. Environmental Monitoring
   and  Assessment  Program  (EMAP):
   Research Plan  1997.  EPA/620/R-98/
   •002.  U.S.  Environmental  Protection
   Agency, Washington, D.C.
Weber, C.1.1973. Recent developments in the
   measurement of the response of plankton
   and periphyton  to  changes in  their
   environment, pp. 119-138 IN: G. Glass
   (ed.), Bioassay Techniques and Environ-
   mental Chemistry. Ann Arbor Science
   Publishers, Ann Arbor, Michigan.

Whittier, T.R. and S.G. Paulsen. 1992. The
   surface waters component of the Environ-
   mental Monitoring  and Assessment
   Program (EMAP): an overview. Journal
   of Aquatic Ecosystem Health 1:119-126.

Wright, J.F. 1995. Development and use of a
   system for predicting the macroinvertebrate
   fauna in flowing waters. Australian Journal
   of Ecology 20:181-197.

-------
                                Section  2
              Overview of  Field  Operations
                 Jim M. Lazorchak1, Daniel K. Averill2, Brian H. Hill1,
           Frank H. McCormick1, Alan T. Herlihy3, Philip A. Monaco2, and
                                Marlys R. Cappaert4
     This section presents a general overview
of the activities that an EMAP field team con-
ducted during a typical one-day sampling visit
to a non-wadeable river site. General guide-
lines for recording data and using standard-
ized field data forms and sample labels are
also presented in this section. Finally, safety
and health considerations and guidelines re-
lated to field operations are provided. Depend-
ing on the survey region, river sampling dis-
tances are defined as either 40 or 100 times
the wetted width in the vicinity of the point
of entry (Figure 2.1). One reason for  the
length difference is that in the Oregon river
pilot, an objective is to determine a reach
length that will usually yield 95% of the verte-
brate species collected in  a full day of
'U.S. EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory, Eco-
logical Exposure Research Division, 26 W. Martin Luther
King Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45268.
2Dynamac International Corp., 200 SW 35th St., Covallis,
OR 97333.
Department of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon State Uni-
versity, c/o U.S. EPA, 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis, OR 97333.
4OAO, Inc., 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis, OR 97333.
electrofishing or from a reach 100 channel
widths long. Note, subsequently it was found
that this reach length is 85 channel widths for
Oregon rivers (Hughes et al. In Review).
River reaches of 40 channel widths long were
used in the Mid-Atlantic region in order to
make this aspect of field methods consistent
between wadeable  and non-wadeable
streams. In eastern rivers, one 14-16 foot John
boat and one 11 -13 foot inflatable raft, outfit-
ted with a 4 horse powered motor were used.
The John boats were used only for
electrofishing and drift net retrieval, and were
outfitted with 6.6 - 15 horsepower outboard
motors. Two 12-14 foot inflatable rafts were
used in a large river pilot in Oregon because
river access, flow, depth, obstructions and
State or Federal restrictions usually made it
impractical, dangerous, or impossible to use
rigid boats and outboard motors. In both stud-
ies, the larger crafts were generally used on
the larger or faster rivers. Two trucks were
used in each survey, with one pulling a boat
trailer. These boats, motors and truck con-
figurations are only examples of what were

-------
                                                          D
     Distance between transects = or 4
     Times mean wetted width at X-site
            Total reach length = 100 or 40 times mean wetted width at X-site
Figure 2-1.   Stream reach characteristics.
used in the MAIA and Oregon Studies. Other
types, numbers or sizes of boats, motors,
trucks and trailers can be used as long as lo-
cal boating regulations are met and the health
and safety of the crews can be maintained.

2.1   Daily Operational
Scenario
    For western streams a 4-person field
team consisted of two people in the "habitat"
boat and two people in the "fish" boat. Each
boat was staffed by one rower and one pri-
mary data collector. The crew in the habitat
boat was primarily responsible for conduct-
ing the intensive physical habitat character-
ization. The crew in the fish boat is primarily
responsible for collecting biological samples.
Rowers assist with sampling when possible,
although their primary responsibilities were
rowing the rafts and river navigation. Table
2-1 presents the range of times required to
conduct various field activities. Tables 2-2 a
and b present the general sequence of activi-
ties conducted at each river reach for non-
wadeable streams in the west and east.
    In eastern non-wadeable streams a 4 or
5 person  crew was used depending on
whether additional research indicators were
also sampled. In the eastern pilot, the
electrofishing boat had 2 people while the raft
crew had 2-3 people. Times presented in Table
2-1 were similar in eastern streams with the
exception of additional time needed for pro-
cessing additional indicator samples.

    Upon arrival at a river site, the crew chief
was responsible for verifying and document-
ing the site location, determining the length
of stream reach to be sampled, and deter-
mining boat launching and retrieving loca-
tions (in the western pilot the crew chief
was also establishing the required transects,
Figure 2.1) (Section 4). The crew chief was
also responsible for preparing samples for
transport and shipment (Section 3). In addi-
tion to aquatic  vertebrate sampling (Section
10), the western fish crew collected water
chemistry and microbial samples (Section 5),
sediment for the sediment metabolism deter-
mination (Section 8), periphyton (Section 7),
macroinvertebrate samples  (Sections 9),
                                               v
                                              r *W

-------
,  Table2-l.  Range of Times for Field Activities.


•  Activity
Time Required
   (ranges)
'i Scout access locations

I Unload rafts and all
<--- equipment

I Shuttle vehicles and set up
'-" for float
      or float from put-in to
r start of reach
*-
|- Conduct field sampling
inactivities
ir=.-
|lEo_w or float from end of
|: reach to take-out
     i rafts and shuttle
"  vehicles

: "Sediment metabolism
% .processing

JiSample tracking and
*  packing

!            SUMMARY
0 to 1.5 hours

0.5 hours


0.5 to 1.5 hours


0 to 1 hour


5 to 8 hours


0 to 1 hour


0.5 to 1 hour


0.5 hours


1 hour
                           8 to 16* hours
                           per site
jj::;*Indicates  the  longest  total  time  spent on
resampling activities; does not equal the sum of the
^greatest times spent to accomplish each task.
aquatic vertebrates (Section 10), and prepared
samples for tissue contaminants (Section 11).
The habitat crew conducted the intensive
physical habitat characterization (Section 6),
visual stream assessment (Section 12), and the
habitat rower took water chemistry mea-
surements (Section 5). The eastern three
person raft crew collected all these indica-
tors except for fish. A separate two person
electroshocking crew was used for fish and
also for deploying and retrieving drift nets.
2.2  Guidelines for

Recording Data and

Information

     During the one-day visit to a river, a field
team is required to obtain and record a sub-
stantial amount of data and other information
for all of the various ecological indicators
described in Section 1.3. In addition, all the
associated information for each sample col-
lected must be recorded on labels and field
data forms to ensure accurate tracking and
subsequent linkage of other data with the re-
sults of sample analyses.

     It is imperative that field and sample in-
formation be recorded accurately, consistently,
and legibly. Measurement data that cannot be
accurately interpreted by others besides the
field teams, and/or samples with incorrect or
illegible information associated with them, are
lost to the program. The cost of a sampling
visit, coupled with the short index period, se-
verely limits the ability to re-sample a river
when the initial information recorded was in-
accurate or illegible. Some guidelines to as-
sist field personnel with recording informa-
tion are presented in Table 2-3. Examples of
completed data forms and labels are presented
in the sections describing field sampling and
measurement procedures for different indica-
tors.

2.3 Safety and Health

     Collection and analysis of samples (e.g.,
benthic invertebrates, fish, periphyton, sedi-
ment) can involve significant risks to personal
safety and health (drowning, electrical shock,
pathogens, etc.). While safety is often not
considered an integral part of field sampling
routines, personnel must be aware of unsafe
working conditions, hazards connected with
the operation of sampling gear, boats, and

-------
., Table2-2a. General Sequence of Activities Conducted at a Non-wadeable River Reach in the West.

  NOTE:  Sample odd numbered site ID's along the left shore (facing downriver); sample even numbered
          sites along the right shore. Large obstructions or hazards may require temporary diversion.

:  A.Pre-Launch

  1.   Pack and ship the previous day's samples (if necessary).
  2.   Obtain ice for the day's samples.
  3.   At the launch site, all crew members unload all gear and sample containers. During unloading, no time
      is spent loading the boats, setting up gear, etc.
  4.   Two crew members each shuttle a vehicle to the take-out. The two remaining crew members load each
      boat, label sample containers, and prepare data sheets and clipboards. The crew chief determines the
      transect length.
  5.   Set macroinvertebrate drift nets at the most ideal location (put-in or take-out ramps).
  6.   The shuttlers return, and all crew members complete loading preparations and launch.

,, B. Sampling Procedures

" 1.   If a float is required to reach the first transect, this time should be spent completing all  data form
 '     headers, labeling, situating gear on the rafts, etc. If no float, proceed to step B-2.
  2.   At  Transect A, the  habitat crew implements the habitat sampling protocol and records the GPS
      coordinates. The fish crew sets up the electroshoclcing equipment, and takes the site identification and
,     river photos.
 " 3.   Floating between transects (e.g., Transect A downriver to Transect B, alaser rangefinder can be used to
      measure between transects), the habitat crew collects thalweg measurements in the deep part of the
;     channel while the fish crew electrofishes along the designated shoreline. Both rafts cease this activity
      when the next transect is reached. •
  4.   Upon reaching each transect,  the habitat and fish boats pull over and "tie-off at the designated
      shoreline.
        a) Habitat boat duties: The rower takes all measurements requiring instruments while the habitat
        lead records the measurements on  field sheets. The rower then collects shore macroinvertebrate
        samples while the habitat lead completes the remainder of the data form and marks the transect
        location on the topographic  map.
        b) Fish boat duties: The fish ID  specialist processes the catch (identification, measurements,
        weights) while the rower  records. Appropriate specimens are retained and stored  on  board.
        Additionally, the  rower collects sediments and periphyton samples.
        c) Sample container labeling: For QA purposes, the person responsible for taking certain samples
        should be the one to label the sample containers for those samples.
  5.  Repeat steps B-3 and B-4 for each transect.
  6.  At  the final transect (Transect K), water chemistry and microbial samples are collected.

  C. Take-Out Duties

 -  1.  At  the take-out location, two  crew members process macroinvertebrate and periphyton composite
      samples, and set up for sediment metabolism processing. The two other crew members unload the rafts
 -     and load the equipment into the vehicle. All crew members assist with loading the rafts onto the trailer.
  2.  The crew  chief reviews data forms while the other crew members tie down the rafts, clean thoroughly
      and stow equipment, and ready the vehicles. Data forms are reviewed for completeness, accuracy, and
 i     legibility.
 :-i  3.  Call in to supervisor and declare  "Off River Safely."
 =  4.  Proceed to lodging  facility. Take the final DO reading for sediment metabolism.
       JilliM


-------
|lfable2-2b. General Sequence of Activities Conducted on Eastern Non-Wadeable Streams.

          Sample odd numbered site ID's along the left shore (facing downriver); sample even numbered
          sites along the right shore. Large obstructions or hazards may require temporary diversion.
JNOTE:
glnjhe Mid-Atlantic Pilot non-wadeable sampling required two boats operating independently of each
t~           other. One boat (the fish crew) was responsible for fishing the river reach and the other boat (the
§:  -         bio-hab crew) collects the physical habitat, chemistry, macroinvertebrates, periphyton, and
Sj~^         sediment (respiration and toxicity) samples, and fills in the site verification, site assessment,
fi-           and TM validation forms.
fczr"        " .     ''..-':       .     .  ";.'   '.      -.'•'.   '•-"•  •."   ::  :• ':•..'  •':'./•..-'T^-.i
t_A.Pre'-Launch
;5--""                         '       •         ".'.'.       '  '            -    "              '•       ". • - •
El.  Before beginning to sample, assess the river for the applicability of wadeable stream or non-wadeable
te -r stream protocols. If 50% or greater of the river reach is wadeable, than EMAP-SW Stream (Wadeable)
C    Protocols are to be used. If not, EMAP-SW River (Non-Wadeable) Protocols will be used. For rivers
f:-—  non-wadeable throughout the thalweg but wadeable along the shoreline, shock thalweg and as much
E~    l)f the shoreline with non-wadeable protocols as possible.
L 2.  If River protocols are used, then only one side of the river is sampled. If the site number is odd the left
£-..-   side (facing downstream)  of the river is sample. Even numbered sites are sampled on the right side.
fe.  If 'X is easily accessible, verify, using maps and GPS, its location and collect chemistry samples before
I-    traveling to the upper end of the  study reach (Transect  K). If 'X' is not easily accessible, travel to the
•,,-.    point which you believe will be  the upper end of the study reach.
      Determine average river width using one of three methods (listed in order of preference):
        a. If at'X measure wetted width using the rangefinder or tape;
        b. If'X'is not accessible, estimate width based on width at nearest river crossing; or
        c. Estimate widthTfom the 7.5 minute USGS topo map.
      Once average width has beert determined, multiply it by 40 to determine reach length to be sampled
      (e.g., Width=80m, reach length =3200m).
      Once 'X' has been verified, the fish crew and one of the bio-hab crew members, travels upstream, by
      river or road, to the top of the reach (Transect K) and begins sampling, the bio-hab person that has gone
      with the fish crew drives the fish crew vehicle and trailer to the take out area and regroups with the bio-
      hap crew. While the fish crew and bio-hab person are launching and returning, respectively, the other
      two bio-hab crew members travel downstream to the bottom of the reach (Transect A) to set the drift
SEN,
 t||L Sampling Procedures
       After setting the drift nets (drift nets should not be set by one person alone in a boat) and meeting up
       with the one bio-hab person that has returned the fish crew vehicle/trailer, the bio-hab crew travels to;;
       the top of the reach and begins sampling.                                             •'...-'!
       The fish crew will work downstream collecting fish through the entire reach.
       At the end of the reach, the fish crew begins sorting fish for vouchers, tissue, and biomarkers.        j
       Once the fishing crew has cleared the area, the bio-hab boat may begin their sampling of the transect. ;
       At  each  transect,  the bio-hab  boat  will  beach  and  collect physical habitat  information,';
       macroinvertebrates, periphyton, and sediment. All samples are combined with previous samples of 1
       that type (e.g., all macroinvertebrate kick samples are combined, all periphyton samples are combined ..
       and all sediment samples are combined. Sediment samples may be collected using grab samples and/ J
       or ponar sampler.                                                                            i
       Between transects the bio-hab crew will measure thalweg depths, substrate and channel form.       .j
       The 6th transect (Transect F) downstream should be where you verified 'X'. Chemistry samples need to 1
       be collected. TM validation form needs  to be completed. Secchi depth needs to be measured andC
       recorded in one of the comment sections on the "Field Measurements Form-Streams/Rivers".        ~
       Proceed downstream collecting transect, thalweg, and biology samples as in the upper half of the ;
       stream reach.                                                                               !
                                                    ;           •        ;  ...    ,        .(continued) ,

-------
  Table 2-2b. Continued.
  8.  At the bottom of the reach (Transect A), the bio-hab crew sets-up metabolism, bags sediments for
      toxicity, collects drift nets (if deployed) and processes macroinvertebrate and periphyton samples.
  9.  Bio-hab crew joins  fish processing or begins shuttling vehicles and carrying equipment to the
      vehicles.

  C.TAKE-OUTDUTIES

  1. - At the take-out location, two crew members process macroinvertebrate and periphyton composite
      samples, and set up for sediment metabolism processing. The two other crew members unload the rafts
      and thoroughly clean and load all the equipment into the vehicle. All crew members assist with
      loading the rafts onto the trailer.
  2.  The crew chief reviews data forms while the other crew  members tie down the rafts, stow equipment,
      and ready the vehicles. Data forms are reviewed for completeness,  accuracy, and legibility.
  3.  Call in to supervisor and declare "Off River Safely."
  4.  Proceed to lodging facility. Take the final DO reading for sediment metabolism.
i Table 2-3.  Guidelines for Recording Field Data and Other Information.

J Activity                                              Guidelines
I Data Recording
  Data Qualifiers (Flags)
Field Measurements:

Record measurement values and/or observations on data forms preprinted on
  water-resistant paper.
Record information  on forms  using No.  2 pencil only. Erase  mistakes
  completely and write the correct value whenever you can. If you must line
  out an incorrect value, place the correct value nearby so the data entry
  operator can easily find it.
Headers on the second pages of all forms link the data. Fill in all headers of all
  pages (to save time this can be filled out the night before if site is known to be
  accessible) or data will be lost (this is a good one to review at the end of the day).
Record data and  information  so that  all entries  are  obvious.  Enter data
  completely in every field that you use. Follow the "comb" guidelines—print
  each  number  or  letter in  the individual space provided. Keep letters and
  numerals from overlapping. Record data to the number of decimal places
  provided on the forms. Illegible information is equivalent to no information.
Print neatly, using  block  capital  letters  in alphabetical  fields.  Clearly
  distinguish letters from numbers (e.g.; 0 versus 0,2 versus Z, 7 versus T or F,
  etc.). Do not put lines through 7's, O's, or Z's. Do not use slashes.
Record information on each line, even if it has to be recorded repeatedly on a
  series of lines  (e.g., fish species codes or physical habitat characteristics). Do
  not use "ditto marks" (") or a straight vertical line.
When recording  comments, print or write  legibly. Make notations in comments
  field only. Avoid marginal notes, etc. Be concise, but avoid using abbreviations
  and/or' 'shorthand1' notations. If you run out of space, attach a sheet of paper with
  the additional  information, rather than trying to squeeze everything into the
  space provided on the form.

Use only defined flag codes and record on data form in appropriate field.
  K  Measurement not attempted and/or not recorded.

                                                             (continued)

-------
feTable2-3.  Continued.
pnr-	     '    '  .-.•'••
:"Activity
                                                     Guidelines
  Heview of Data Forms
 •Sample Labels
 gSample Collection
 g Information
 f Sample Qualifiers
 |(Elags)
 *.-....
 prr
 jr JReview of Labels and
 J: Collection Forms
             Field Measurements:                                      ;
 -''•'••-'.        •'..':   /    ;i   	-./".-'      .   '••-    '.  i
  Q   Failed quality control check; re-measurement not possible.
  U   Suspect measurement; re-measurement not possible.                  :
  Fn  Miscellaneous flags (n= 1,2, etc.) assigned by a field team during a     ;
      particular sampling visit (also used for qualifying samples).
Explain all flags in comments section on data form.
Field team reviews data forms for accuracy, completeness, and legibility before
  leaving a river.
Data forms from all teams are reviewed  for  completeness,  accuracy, and
  legibility before transfer to the information management staff.

        Sample Collection and Tracking                                :

Use adhesive labels with preprinted ID numbers and a standard recording
  format for each type of sample.                                        ;
Record information on  labels using  a  fine-point  indelible marker. Cover
  completed labels with clear tape.

Record sample ID number from the label and associated collection information
  on sample collection form preprinted on water-resistant paper.
Record information on-field data forms using  No.  2 pencil only (fine-point
  indelible fine-tipped markers can be used if necessary).
Record collection information  using correct  format  as  provided  on the
  collection form.

Use only defined flag codes and record on sample collection form in
  appropriate field.
  K   Sample not collected or lost before shipment; re-sampling not possible.
  U   Suspect sample (e.g., possible contamination, does not meet minimum
       acceptability requirements, or collected using a nonstandard procedure)
  Fn  Miscellaneous flags (n=l, 2, etc.) assigned by a field team during a
       particular sampling visit (also used for field measurements).
 Explain all flags in comments section on sample collection form.

 The field team compares information recorded on labels and sample collection
   form for accuracy before leaving a stream.
The field team reviews labels and collection form for accuracy, completeness,
   and legibility before leaving a stream.
 Sample  collection  forms are reviewed  for  completeness, accuracy, and
   legibility before transfer to the information management staff.
  other risks (Berry et al.,  1983). Personnel
  safety and health are of the highest priority
  for all  investigative activities and must be
  emphasized in safety and health plans for field,
  laboratory, and materials handling operations.
  Preventive safety measures  and emergency
                         actions  must be emphasized. Management
                         should assign health and safety responsibili-
                         ties and establish a program for training in
                         safety, accident reporting, and medical and
                         first aid treatment. Safety documents and stan-
                         dard operating procedures (SOPs) containing

-------
necessary and specific safety precautions
should be available to all field personnel.
Additional sources of information regarding
field and  laboratory  safety related to
biomonitoring studies include Berry et al.
(1983), U.S.  EPA  (1986) and Ohio EPA
(1990).

2,3.1   General
Considerations
     Important considerations related to field
safety are presented in Table 2-4. It is the re-
sponsibility of the  group safety officer or
project leader to ensure that the necessary
safety courses are taken by all field personnel
and that all safety policies and procedures are
followed. Sources of information regarding
safety-related training include the American
Red Cross (1989), the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health (1981), U.S.
Coast Guard (1987) and Ohio EPA (1990).

     Persons using sampling  devices should
become familiar with the hazards involved
and establish appropriate safety practices prior
to using them. Individuals involved in
electrofishing  must be trained by a person
experienced in this method or by attending a
certified electrofishing training  course.
Reynolds (1983) and Ohio EPA (1990) pro-
vide additional  information  regarding,
electrofishing safety procedures and practices.

     Because boats  are used  to access sam-
pling sites, personnel must consider and pre-
pare for hazards associated with water condi-
tions (e.g., obstacles, rapids), safe loading  and
unloading of rafts, and the operation of mo-
tor vehicles, tools, and other incidental equip-
ment. Boat operators should be familiar with
U.S. Coast Guard rules and regulations  for
safe boating contained in a pamphlet, "Fed-
eral  Requirements for Recreational Boats,
 "available from a local U.S. Coast Guard
 Director or Auxiliary or State Boating Offi-
 cial (U.S.  Coast Guard, 1987).  The
 electrofishing raft  must have a fire extin-
 guisher, and both rafts must have whistles,
 Personal Flotation Devices (PFD) and com-
 munication devices.

      A communications plan to address safety
 and emergency situations is essential. All field
 personnel need to be fully aware of all lines
 of communication. Field personnel should
- have a daily check-in procedure for safety.
 An emergency communications plan should
 include contacts for police, ambulance, fire
 departments, and search and rescue person-
 nel.

      Proper field clothing should be worn to
 prevent hypothermia, heat exhaustion, sun-
 stroke, drowning, or other dangers. Field per-
 sonnel should be able to swim. PFD's must
 always be worn while in the boat, and felted
 wading boots must be available for use when
 crew members are sampling outside of the raft.

      Many hazards lie out of sight in the bot-
 toms of rivers. Broken glass or sharp pieces
 of metal embedded in the substrate can cause
 serious injury if care is  not exercised when
 walking or working with the hands  in such
 environments. Infectious agents and toxic sub-
 stances that can be absorbed through the skin
 or inhaled may also be present in the water or
 sediment. Personnel who may be exposed to
 water that is known or suspected to contain
 human or animal wastes or that carry caus-
 ative agents or pathogens must be immunized
 against tetanus, hepatitis, typhoid fever, and
 polio. Biological wastes can also be a threat
 in the form of viruses,  bacteria, rickettsia,
 fungi, or parasites. [Note that nearly one-third
 of Oregon river reaches sampled in the sum-
 mer of 1997 supported bacteria exceeding or
4*»i *

                                                                             **,

-------
it-Table 2-4.  General Health and Safety Considerations.
 ~               '''•             '       '  '
                                       Training:
p Firstaid
jj° Cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR)
ijs Swiftwater rescue
jj° Vehicle safety (e.g., operation of 4-wheel drive vehicles)
EL Boating and water safety
IP Field safety (e.g., weather conditions, personal safety, orienteering, reconnaissance of sites prior to
IF sampling)                                .
|vr? Equipment design, operation, and maintenance
Ea Electrofishing safety       \
p:°; Handling of chemicals and other hazardous materials
If..   "  ' '   '  ••     - '• -;  .-.  "' '•'•• :'' ;:"  '" •.'• '.-'"••'   ;"••••  ~  '  •  -   ;- "  •'  ' /  ; /,'
                                    Communications

   Check-in schedule
e ° Sampling itinerary (vehicle used and its description, time of departure, travel route, estimated time of
|rr return)
i£=? Contacts for police, ambulance, fire departments, search and rescue personnel
i^° Emergency services available near each sampling site and base location
?'* Radios for boat to boat communications and cell phones for emergancies.
£                  "                       "             .       '-'.'..
set:                                   Personal Safety

t^?_ Field clothing and other protective gear
f ° Medical and personal information (allergies, personal health conditions)
p ° Personal contacts (family, telephone numbers, etc.)
tjjf Physical exams and immunizations
 closely approaching body contact standards.
 Microbes can be transferred from fish or the
 water itself, so wash hands before eating and
 avoid  contact  between open  wounds and
 water or fish].

      Prior to a sampling trip, personnel should
 determine that all necessary equipment is in
 safe working condition. Good housekeeping
 practices should be followed in the field.
 These practices protect staff from injury, pre-
 vent or reduce exposure to hazardous or toxic
 substances, and prevent damage to equipment
 and subsequent down time and/or loss of valid
 data. It is also recommended that at least one
 person on each crew should have First Aide
 and CPR training, especially if the crew(s)
 are electrofishing.
2.3.2   Safety Equipment
and Facitities
     Appropriate safety apparel such as
PFD's, felted wading boots, lab coats, insu-
lated gloves, safety glasses, etc. must be avail-
able and used when necessary. It is recom-
mended that whenever two boat crews are
used there are some type of communication
devices on board each -boat so that they can
keep in contact with each other for both safety
and logical reasons.

     First aid kits, fire extinguishers, and blan-
kets must be readily available in the field. A
properly installed and operating fume hood
must be provided in the laboratory for use
when working with carcinogenic chemicals

-------
(e.g., formaldehyde, formalin) that may pro-
duce dangerous fumes. Cellular telephones or
portable radios should be provided to field
teams working in remote areas for use in case
of an emergency. Facilities and supplies must
be available for cleaning of exposed body
parts that may have been contaminated by
pollutants in the water. Soap and an adequate
supply of clean water or ethyl alcohol,  or
equivalent, should be suitable for this purpose.

2.3.3   Safety Guidelines

for Field Operations
     General safety guidelines for field op-
erations are presented in Table 2-5. Person-
nel participating in field activities on a regu-
lar or  infrequent basis should be in  sound
                                              physical condition and have a physical exam
                                              annually or in accordance with Regional,
                                              State, or organizational requirements. All sur-
                                              face waters and sediments should be consid-
                                              ered potential health hazards due to toxic sub-
                                              stances or pathogens. Persons must become
                                              familiar with the health hazards associated
                                              with using chemical fixing and/or preserving
                                              agents. Formaldehyde (or formalin) is highly
                                              allergenic, toxic, and dangerous to human
                                              health (carcinogenic) if utilized improperly.
                                              Chemical wastes can cause various hazards
                                              due to flammability, explosiveness, toxicity,
                                              causticity, or chemical reactivity. All chemi-
                                              cal wastes must be discarded according to stan-
                                              dardized health and hazards procedures (e.g.,
                                              National Institute for Occupational Safety and
                                              Health [1981]; U.S.,EPA [1986]).
 Table2-5.  General Safety Guidelines for Field Operations
   The two rafts must be in view of each other while floating down rivers or streams.
   The river must be adequately scouted prior to sampling to avoid potential hazards (e.g., dangerous
   rapids, obstacles, sweepers, wood jams, portage locations).
   Exposure to  river water and sediments  should be minimized  as much as possible. Use gloves if
   necessary.
   and clean exposed body parts as soon as possible after contact.
   All electrical equipment must bear the approval seal of Underwriters Laboratories and must be properly
   grounded to protect against electric shock.
   Use heavy gloves when hands are used to agitate the substrate during collection of benthic
   macroinvertebrate samples and  when turning over rocks during hand picking.
   Use appropriate protective equipment (e.g., gloves, safety glasses) when handling and using hazardous
   chemicals
   Persons working in areas where poisonous snakes may be encountered must check with the local Drug
   and Poison Control Center for recommendations on what  should be done in case of  a bite from a
   poisonous snake.
1
i
*•
I:;-
         Carry a snake bite kit and be familiar with its use.

   Any person allergic to bee stings, other insect bites, or plants must take proper precautions and have any
   needed medications handy.
   Field personnel should also protect themselves against the bite of deer or wood ticks because of the
   potential risk of acquiring pathogens that cause Rocky Mountain spotted fever and Lyme disease.
   All field personnel should be familiar with the symptoms of hypothermia and know what to do in case
   symptoms occur. Hypothermia can kill a person at temperatures much above freezing (up to 10°C or
   if he or she is exposed to wind or becomes wet.
   Handle and dispose of chemical wastes properly. Do not dispose any chemicals in the field.

-------
2.4   Literature Cited
American Red Cross. 1979. Standard First
   Aid and  Personal  Safety.  American
   National Red Cross. 269 pp.

Berry, C.R. Jr.,  W.T. Helm  and J.  M.
   Neuhold.  1983. Safety in fishery field
   work. pp. 43-60 IN: Nielsen, L.A., and D.
   L. Johnson (eds.). Fisheries Techniques.
   American Fisheries Society, Bethesda,
   MD.

Chaloud, D. J. and D.V. Peck (eds.). 1994
   Environmental Monitoring and Assess-
   ment Program: Integrated Quality Assur-
   ance Project Plan for the Surface Waters
   Resource Group. EPA 600/X-91/080.
   Revision   2.00.  U.S. Environmental
   Protection Agency, Las Vegas, Nevada.

National Institute for Occupational Safety
   and Health. 1981. Occupational Health
    Guidelines for Chemical Hazards (Two
    Volumes). NIOSH/OSHA  Publication
   No. 81-123. U.S. Government Printing
   Office, Washington, D.C.

Ohio EPA. 1990. Ohio EPA Fish Evaluation
   Group Safety  Manual. Ohio Environ-
   mental Protection Agency, Ecological
   Assessment Section, Division of Water
   Quality Planning and Assessment, Co-
   lumbus, Ohio.

Reynolds J.B. 1983.Electrofishing.pp. 147-
    163. IN: L. A. Nielsen and D. L. Johnson
   (eds.). Fisheries Techniques. American
   Fisheries Society, Bethesda, MD.

U.S. Coast Guard. 1987. Federal Require-
   ments for  Recreational   Boats.  U.S.
   Department of Transportation,  United
    States Coast Guard, Washington, D.C.

U.S. EPA. 1986. Occupational Health and
    Safety Manual. Office of Planning and
    Management, U.S. Environmental Pro-
    tection Agency, Washington, D.C.

-------

-------
                               Section 3
                  Base  Location Activities

          Alan T. Herlihy1, Jim Lazorchak2, Daniel K. Averill3, Brian H. Hill2,
            Frank H. McCormick2, Donald J. Klemm2, Phillip A. Monaco3,
                             and Marlys R. Cappaert4
    Field teams conduct a number of activi-
ties at a "base" location before and after visit-
ing each river site. These activities are gener-
ally conducted on the same day as the sam-
pling visit. Close attention to these activities
is required to ensure that the field teams know
where they are going, that access to the sam-
pling site is possible and permissible, that all
the necessary equipment and supplies are in
good order to complete the  sampling effort,
and that samples are packaged and shipped
correctly and promptly.

    Figure 3-1 illustrates operations and ac-
tivities that are conducted before and after each
visit to a river sampling site. Activities that
are conducted after  a sample visit include
equipment cleanup, maintenance, storage,
'Department of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon State Uni-
versity, c/o U.S. EPA, 200 S W 35th St., Corvallis, OR 97333
2U.S. EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory, Eco-
logical Exposure Research Division, 26 W. Martin Luther
King Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45268
3Dynamac International Corp., 200 SW 35th St., Covallis,
OR 97333.
4OAO, Inc., 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis, OR 97333
packing and shipping samples, and commu-
nications with project management to report
the status of the visit'.

3.1   Activities before
each River Visit
    Before each river visit, each field team
should confirm access to the sampling site,
develop a sampling itinerary, inspect and re-
pair equipment, check to make sure all sup-
plies required for the visit are available, and
prepare sample containers. Procedures to ac-
complish these activities are described in the
following sections.

3.1.1    Confirming Site
Access
    Field crews will be provided with dos-
siers containing important location and access
information for each river scheduled for sam-
pling. Before visiting a river, the crew should
review the contents of the specific site dos-
sier. The landowner(s) listed in the  dossier
should be contacted to confirm permission to

-------
                              BASE LOCATION ACTIVITIES
                              BEFORE EACH RIVER VISIT
                       Team Leader               Team Members
                   Review site dossier         • Test and calibrate oxygen and
                   information                conductivity meter
                   Make access contacts       • Initialize GPS (if necessary)
                   Prepare itinerary           • Prepare sample containers and
                                           labels
                                          • Pack equipment and supplies using
                                           checklist
                              AFTER EACH RIVER VISIT
                Team Leader                        Team Members
      Review forms and labels; submit forms with
      dossier information
      Enter sample tracking information onto checklist
      Package and ship samples (if necessary)
      File status report with field coordinator or other
      central contact person
Clean and check equipment; store rafts
Charge or replace batteries
Check and refuel vehicles; check trailer hubs
Obtain ice and other consumable supplies as
needed
Figure 3-1. Activities conducted at base locations
sample and identify any revisions to the in-
formation contained in the dossier. Also, con-
firm that the proposed launch sites (e.g., pub-
lic boat launches) are present and operational.


3.1.2   Daily Sampling
Itinerary
     Based upon the sampling schedule pro-
vided to each team, team leaders are respon-
sible for developing daily itineraries. The team
leader reviews each river dossier to ensure that
it contains the appropriate maps, contact in-
formation, copies of permission letters, and
access  instructions. Additional activities in-
clude determining the best boat access loca-
tions, calling the landowners or local contacts
to confirm permission, confirming lodging
plans for the upcoming evening, and coordi-
nating rendezvous locations, with individu-
als who must meet with field teams prior to
accessing a site. This information is used to
develop an itinerary for the river. The itiner-
ary, should include anticipated departure time,
routes of travel, location of any intermediate
stops (e.g., to drop off samples, pick up sup-
plies, etc.) and estimated time of arrival at the
final destination after completing the river
visit. This information (and any changes that
occur due  to unforeseen circumstances),
should be provided to the field coordinator or
other central contact person identified for the
specific field study. Failure to adhere to the
reported itinerary can result in the initiation
of expensive search and rescue procedures
and disruption of carefully planned schedules.
In addition, each team should cany individual
emergency medical and personal information
with them, possibly in the form of a "safety


-------
log" that remains in the vehicle (see Section
2).

3.1.3  Instrument
Inspections and
Performance Tests
    Each field team is required to test and
calibrate instruments prior to departure for the
river site. Field instruments requiring testing
and/or calibration include a global position-
ing system (GPS) receiver, a conductivity
meter, and a dissolved oxygen meter. Backup
instruments should be available if instruments
fail the performance tests or calibrations de-
scribed in the following subsections.

3.1.3.1   Global Positioning
System  Receiver
    Specific performance checks will vary
among different brands  of GPS receivers.
Follow the instructions in the receiver's oper-
ating  manual to make sure the unit is func-
tioning  properly. Turn on the receiver and
check the batteries. Replace batteries imme-
diately if a battery warning is displayed. Make
sure extra batteries are stored with the receiver
and will be available in the field if necessary.

     Before the initial use, or, in some cases,
if batteries are replaced, the receiver may re-
quire  inputting the coordinates of a positional
reference point that is nearby (e.g., a U.S.
Geological Survey benchmark identified on a
topographic map). Follow the manufacturer's
instructions for initializing the receiver.

3.1.3.2   Dissolved Oxygen
Meter
     As an initial performance test before use
each  year, dissolved oxygen (DO) meters
should be  tested for accuracy against the
Winkler titration method. In addition, inspect
and test the dissolved oxygen meters at the
base location before each river site visit.

    Inspect the meter by checking the status
of the batteries, and the functioning of the
electronics. Confirm the meter is adjusted
correctly for measurements  in fresh water.
Inspect the membrane at the terminal end of
the probe. If bubbles are present, if the mem-
brane is discolored, or if the membrane is torn,
replace the screw-on membrane cap accord-
ing to the manufacturer instructions.

    After inspecting the meter and probe,
attempt to calibrate it, following the instruc-
tions in the instrument operating manual. Do
not record the calibration  information obtained
during the performance test. The meter is cali-
brated again at each river site, at which time
the calibration information is recorded on the
field data form. If the meter cannot be suc-
cessfully calibrated, replace the meter and/or
probe. After the test, turn the meter off, and
store the probe according to the manufacturer's
instructions.

3.1.3.3  Conductivity Meters
    Follow the operating manual provided
with the instrument to check the batteries, the
electronics, and to inspect the probe. New
probes or probes that have been stored dry
may require conditioning before use. The
operation of the conductivity meter is checked
at the base location using a standard solution
of known conductivity.  A daily quality con-
trol check sample (QCCS) is prepared as de-
scribed in Table 3-1. The daily QCCS can be
prepared as either of two dilutions of the stock
standard, depending on the theoretical con-
ductivity desired. A1:100 dilution of the stock
provides a QCCS with a conductivity of 75.3
S/cm at 25°C (Metcalf and  Peck, 1993). A
1:200 dilution results in a QCCS with a con-

-------
 Table 3-1. Stock Solutions, Uses, and Instructions for Preparation.
  Solution
       Use
       Preparation
 Conductivity Standard
 Stock Solution"
 Quality Control
 Check Sample
 Formalin, borax
 bufferedc(pH7-8)
 Ethanol
To prepare conductivity quality
control check sample solution
To check operation of con-
ductivity pen or conductivity
meter
Preservative for fish specimens
and periphyton samples
Preservative for benthic macro-
invertebrate samples.
Dissolve 3.4022 g KH2PO4 and 3.5490 g
Na2HPO4 (analytical grade; dried at
120°C for 3 h and stored desiccated) in
1000.0 g (1.0018 L at 20°C, 1.0029 L at
25°C) reagent water.*

1:100 dilution of standard stock solution
with reagent water (theoretical conductivity
= 75.3 u.S/cm at 25°C)a
1:200 dilution of standard stock solution
with reagent water (theoretical conductivity
= 37.6uS/cmat25°C)b

Add 400 g borax detergent (e.g., Twenty
Mule Team®) to each 20-L container of
100% formalin. Test with pH paper.

None.
 * Premade Packets can be Purchased
 1 Metcalf and Peck (1993) Premade Packets can be Purchased
 b Peck and Metcalf (1991) Premade Packets can be Purchased
 'Handle formalin according to 29 CFR 1910.1048.
ductivity of 37.8 S/cm at 25°C (Peck and
Metcalf, 1991). Afresh lot of the daily QCCS
should be prepared every two weeks from the
stock standard solution. Check the perfor-
mance of the conductivity meter by follow-
ing the procedure presented in Table 3-2.

3.1.4   Preparation of

Equipment and Supplies
     To ensure that all activities at a river can
be conducted completely and efficiently, field
teams should check all equipment and sup-
plies before traveling to a river site. In addi-
tion, sample containers and labels should be
prepared ahead of time to the extent possible.

     Check the inventory of equipment and
supplies prior to departure using the river-visit
                      checklists presented in Appendix A. Pack
                      meters, probes, and sampling gear in such a
                      way as to minimize physical shock and vi-
                      bration during transport. Storing sensitive
                      equipment in protective plastic cases (e.g.,
                      Pelican® cases) is recommended. Also, many
                      smaller pieces of equipment and other sup-
                      plies can be packed in labeled coolers or plas-
                      tic totes. Secure the rafts to the trailer, one on
                      top of the other with tie-down straps and stow
                      the fishing gear in the rafts. Make sure every-
                      thing stored in the rafts is secure so that noth-
                      ing  can blow away when traveling to and
                      from a sample site.

                           If necessary, prepare stock preservative
                      solutions as described in Table 3-1. Follow
                      the regulations of the Occupational Safety and
                      Health Administration (OSHA) for handling

                  p  u

-------
        -2.  Performance Check of Conductivity Meters.
     Check the functioning of the meter according to the manufacturer's operating manual (e.g., zero and
     "red line" of the meter).
     Swirl the meter's probe for 3-5 seconds in a 250-mL bottle containing the daily QCCS solution labeled
     L1RINSE".
     Transfer the probe from the "RINSE" bottle to a second 250-mL bottle of QCCS labeled "TEST". Let
     stabilize for 20 seconds.
     If the measured value of the QCCS is within ±10% or ±10 S/cm of the theoretical value, rinse the probe
     in deionized water. Store as described in the operating manual and package the meter for transport to
     the river site.                   '
N1"
e^
i&
     If the measured value of the QCCS is not within ± 10% or ± 10 uS/cm of theoretical value, repeat Steps
     1 through 3.

       If the value is still unacceptable, replace the QCCS in both the "rinse" and "test" bottles and repeat
    _  the measurement process.

       If the measured value is still not acceptable, clean the conductivity probe as described in the
       manual, check the batteries, soak in deionized water for 24 hours, and repeat Steps 1 through 3.

       If the measured value  is still unacceptable, replace the meter.
 and transporting hazardous materials such as
 formalin and ethanol. Regulations pertaining
 to formalin are in the Code of Federal Regu-
 lations  (CFR;   specifically  29  CFR
 1910.1048). These requirements should.be
 summarized for all hazardous materials be-
 ing used for the project and provided to field
 personnel. Transport formalin and ethanol in
 appropriate containers and, if possible, out-
 side the vehicle cab.

     Refuel vehicles and conduct mainte-
 nance activities the night before each sampling
 trip, if possible. Inspect the  vehicles every
 morning before departure. Check vehicle
 lights, turn signals, brake lights, and air pres-
 sure in the tires. Also inspect the flatbed trailer
 used to transport the rafts. Trailer hubs must
 be greased often, especially if submerged in
 water when launching the rafts.
                                             3.2  Activities after Each
                                             River Visit
                                                  Some sample containers can be labeled
                                             before departing from the base site. Figure 3-
                                             2 illustrates the preprinted labels. A set of three
                                             water chemistry sample containers all having
                                             the same ID number (one for the 4-L cubitainer
                                             and two for the 60-mL syringes) can be pre-
                                             labeled with the appropriate information (de-
                                             scribed in Section 5). After labeling, place the
                                             syringes in their plastic container, and place
                                             the cubitainer and beakers in a clean self-seal-
                                             ing plastic bag to prevent contamination. The
                                             microbial bottle (Section 5) can also be pre-
                                             labeled as described above and stored with
                                             the cubitainer and syringes. Sample contain-
                                             ers for biological and sediment samples should
                                             NOT be pre-labeled before reaching the river

-------
     WATER CHEMISTRY
          CU S1 S2
    SITE ID: ORRV	-	
     DATE:	/	198
          229000
    PERIPHYTON
  APA BIOMASS CHLA ID
SITE ID: ORRV ______
    DATE:	/	/SB
HABITAT:  POOL  RIFFLE/RUN
SUBSAMPLE VOLUME:	mL
COMPOSITE VOLUME:.
                                       229000
SEDIMENT METABOLISM
SITE ID: ORRV _ _-	
    DATE:	/	/SB

SAMPLE TYPE: R1 R2 R3 R4 R5
                                                                   229000
        MICROBIAL

     SITE ID: ORRV	-.

     DATE:	/	/98
          229000
     FISH TISSUE

SITE ID: ORRV	-	

    DATE:	/	196
SAMPLE: PRIMARY SECONDARY
                                         229000
 COMPOSITE BENTHOS
SITE ID: ORRV	-	
    DATE:	/	/98
   HABITAT:  Shore Drift
                                                        FISH - JAR
                                                  SITE ID: ORRV __-_	
                                                      DATE:	/	/98
Figure 3-2.  Sample container labels
site. Problems in sample tracking can result if
jars are labeled and then are not used at a river.

     Upon reaching lodging facilities or the
base site after sampling a river, the team re-
views all completed data forms and sample
labels for accuracy, completeness, and legibil-
ity, and makes a final inspection of samples.
If information is missing from the forms or
labels, the team leader should fill in the miss-
ing information as accurately as possible. The
team leader must initial all data forms after
review. If the team returns to the base site the
day of sampling, the samples are not shipped.
Under these circumstances, all sample infor-
mation such as barcodes and sample condi-
tion is recorded by the team on a central log-
in sheet. The team then stores all samples in
their proper locations (e.g., freezer, refrigera-
tor, chemical cabinet). The other team mem-
           bers should inspect and clean sampling equip-
           ment, store rafts (if at the base site), check the
           inventory of supplies, and prepare samples for
           shipment. If not already completed, the sedi-
           ment metabolism samples should be pro-
           cessed. Other activities that must be conducted
           include shipping samples and communicat-
           ing with the field coordinator or other central
           contact person.

           3.2.1   Equipment Care
                Equipment  cleaning procedures are
           given in Table 3-3. Inspect all equipment, in-
           cluding nets, and clean off any plant or ani-
           mal material. This effort ensures that intro-
           ductions of nuisance species do not occur
           between streams, and prevents possible cross-
           contamination of samples. If nets cannot be
           cleaned thoroughly using water and detergent,
  m
                                                                                t ,rry~tt
                                                                                *J  1

-------
  Table 3-3.  Equipment Care after Each River Visit.
. 1.
fc-3.
J5-
Clean for biological contaminants (e.g., plant and animal material).
  • Prior to departing each river, drain all water from the live well and buckets used to hold and process
    fish.
  • Inspect sampling gear for evidence of plant fragments and remove any fragments observed.
  • At the stream or base site, dry out dip nets, and kick nets, and inspect and remove any remnant
    vegetation or animal life. If the weather is rainy and gear cannot be dried out, then use a different
    (backup) set of gear, if available. If an additional set of gear is not available, disinfect gear with
    10% bleach  solution.
  • Clean the rafts by rinsing dirt and debris from the outside and the floors.
Clean and dry other equipment prior to storage.
  • Rinse chlorophyll filtration chamber three times with distilled water after each use.
  • Rinse periphy ton sampling equipment with tap water at the base site.
  • Rinse coolers with water to clean off any dirt or debris on the outside and inside.
  • Make sure conductivity meter probes are rinsed with deionized water and are stored moist.
  • Rinse all beakers used to collect water chemistry samples three times with deionized water to
    prevent contamination of the next river sample. Place the beakers in a 1-gallon self-sealing plastic
    bag with a cubitainer for use at the  next river.
Check fish nets  for holes and repair, if possible; otherwise, set damaged gear aside and locate
replacements.
Inventory equipment and  supply  needs  and relay orders to  the Field Coordinator.
Remove DO meters and GPS receivers from carrying cases and set up for pre-visit inspections and
performance tests. Examine the DO membrane for cracks, wrinkles, or bubbles; replace if necessary.
Replace batteries as necessary (GPS, DO meter).
Recheck field forms from the day's sampling activities. Make corrections and completions where
possible, and initial each form after review.
Replenish fuel in vehicles, electrofishing generator, and spare gas container.
 clean and disinfect them with a 10% chlorine
 bleach solution. Use bleach only as a last re-
 sort, as repeated use will destroy the net ma-
 terial. Take care to avoid damage to lawns or
 other property.

 3.2.2   Sample Tracking,

 Packing, and Shipment

      Each field team must pack  and ship
 samples from each sampling visit as soon as
 possible after collection, normally the day
 following the visit. Field teams will be pro-
 vided with specific information for shipping
 destinations, contact persons, and the required
 shipping schedule for each type of sample. If
 the team returns to the base site the  same day
                                         samples are collected, and the base site is the
                                         location of all sample analyses, samples are
                                         not required to be shipped.

                                              Sample tracking information (including
                                         sample types, sample ID numbers, sample
                                         condition, number of samples, and other field-
                                         related information that is required by the
                                         laboratory to conduct analyses and associate
                                         results to a specific sample and river site) is
                                         recorded during the packing process. The field
                                         form used to record this information and ac-
                                         company the sample shipment to the labora-
                                         tory is illustrated in Figure 3-3. Procedures
                                         for conducting sample tracking activities
                                         should be provided to each field team by the
                                         information management staff. The sample

-------
FIELD SAMPLE SHIPMENT TRACKING FORM
LABNAME CfffM ON£ AIRBILLNUMBER \2-^ltS()~l ^ O
LAB CONTACT ^. £)O£ IM CONTACT $. "&0 &
DATE SENT ^'S-^g DATE RECEIVED jf_£_9g'
TEAM ID ARy SA/»flL£ fl BAG}
£ TfBes
2 SYRINGES. } CVftrAMER
\ sMPLt
DRIFT SAAPLB (/JA&
SHOJfc S4AFL£ d J/470
ZFlLTERSj 2. TUBES
3 3?4tfS








SAMPLE TYPES CONDITION CODES
B Broken Syringe Tip
BENT Benthos C Cracked Jar
CHEM Water Chemistry F Frozen
FISH Fish Tissue L Leaking
MICR Mioroblal ML Missing Label
PERI Periphyton NP Not Preserved
SMET Sediment Metabolism OK = Seems Fine
VERT Fish Museum T - Thawed but Still Cold
W = Warm
 Rev. 06/16/98 (strvsstr.98)
                                              FIELD SAMPLE SHIPMENT TRACKING FORM - STREAM/RIVERS - 1
Figure 3-3.   Tracking form to accompany shipped samples
 u-4EL ^Bjas^jjaE^aBiii^ai^^aai^jft

-------
tracking system should identify the final des-
tinations for each sample, and provide an in-
formal "chain-of custody" to prevent the loss
of samples and associated information.

     General guidelines for packing and ship-
ping the various types of samples described
in this manual are presented in Table 3-4. Use
fresh ice when shipping samples requiring ice.
Use block ice when available; it should be
sealed in a large plastic bags. If block ice is
not available, contain the ice in several self-
sealing plastic bags. Label each bag of ice as
"ICE" with an indelible marker to prevent any
leakage of meltwater from being misidentified
by couriers as a possible hazardous material
spill. If possible, place samples into a sealed
plastic container to protect them from melt-
water.

     Water chemistry and microbial samples
must be shipped as soon as possible after col-
lection in order to meet holding time require-
ments for some laboratory analyses. To ship
water chemistry and microbial samples, place
 a large (30-gallon) plastic bag in an insulated
 shipping container (e.g., a plastic cooler). The
 sample labels on the cubitainer, syringes, and
 glass microbial bottle(s) should be completely
 covered with clear tape to prevent damage
 from water or condensation during shipment.
 Place the syringes and microbial bottle(s) into
 a separate plastic container for shipment. Place
 the cubitainer and plastic container into a sec-
 ond large plastic bag and close. Place the bag
 containing the samples inside the plastic bag
 lining the shipping container. Place bags of
 ice around the bag of samples, but inside the
 plastic bag lining the shipping container. Then
 close the outer plastic bag. Seal the cooler with
 clear tape. Place the required sample tracking
 forms in the shipping container and close it.
 Seal the container with shipping tape and af-
 fix any required shipping-related labels to the
outside of the container. Attach an adhesive
plastic sleeve to the lid of the container and
insert any required shipping forms.

     Samples that are preserved in buffered
formalin (periphyton ID samples and fish
voucher specimens) or ethanol (benthic
macroinvertebrate samples) should be trans-
ported in appropriate containers and sur-
rounded with some type of acceptable absor-
bent material (e.g., vermiculite). The total
volume of formalin in the periphyton  ID
samples (2 mL per 50-mL centrifuge tube)
may be small enough that they may be shipped
without designating them as a hazardous ma-
terial. Specific directions for packing, label-
ing, transporting, and shipping samples con-
taining formalin or ethanol will be provided
to each field team.

     Each team leader must contact the field
coordinator or other central contact person
after each river visit to notify that the team is
 safely off the river, provide a brief update of
 each sampling visit, and request replenishment
 of supplies, if necessary. The  team leader
 must also provide, for each shipment, the river
 identification number, date sampled, date that
 samples are being shipped, and the  airbill
 number from the courier's shipping form. If
 the shipment date is on a Friday, call the con-
 tact person or leave a message that a Satur-
 day delivery is coming. Teams should inven-
 tory their supplies after each river visit and
 submit requests for replenishment well in ad-
 vance of exhausting on-hand stocks.

3.3   Equipment  and
Supplies
      A checklist of equipment and supplies
 required to conduct the activities described in
 Section 3 is presented in Figure 3-4.  This
 checklist is similar to the checklist in Appen-

-------
   Table3-4.  General Guidelines for Packing and Shipping Samples

   Sample Type
   (container)
                                                       Guidelines
t Water Chemistry
I (4-L cubitainer and
f 60-mL syringes)
I	
I,  .
  Microbial
   (200 mL glass bottle)
.-
             Samples requiring refrigeration (4°C)

                       Ship on day of collection or within 24 hr by overnight
                         courier.
                       Use fresh ice in labeled plastic bags for shipping.
                       Line each shipping container with a large plastic bag.
                    :   Place syringes in a plastic container.
                    "   Place syringe container and cubitainer inside of a second
         	     plastic bag.
                       Cover labels completely with clear tape.
                       The cubitainer and syringes should have same sample ID
                         number assigned.
                       Confirm the sample ID assigned on the labels matches the ID
                         number recorded on the field collection form (or other
                         sample tracking report).

                       Ship on day of collection or within 24 hr by overnight
                         courier.
                       Use fresh ice in labeled plastic bags for shipping.
                       Line each shipping container with a large plastic bag.
                       Place microbial bottles in a plastic container (with syringes).
                       Place container inside of a second plastic bag (as above).
                       Cover labels completely with clear tape.
                       Confirm the sample ID assigned on the labels matches the ID
                         number recorded on the field collection form (or other
                         sample tracking report).

Samples requiring freezing (-20 °C) within 24 hours of collection
  Periphyton chlorophyll
  (filter in aluminum foil)
I Periphyton activity (50-mL
1 centrifuge tube)


£ Sediment metabolism
I (50-mL centrifuge tubes)
                       If samples cannot be kept frozen in the field, ship on day
                         of collection or within 24 h by overnight courier. (Portable
                         Freezers Periphyton biomass (filter are available that can
                         be run off a in aluminum foil cigarette lighter while in the
                         fieldiapdele,ctric;§l.outle^ in,Motels).;

                       Cover the label completely with clear tape.
                       Protect samples from meltwater if ice is used by double
                         bagging ice and placing samples in a plastic container.

                       Confirm the sample ID assigned on the label matches the ID
                         number recorded on the field collection form (or other
                         sample tracking report).
                                                                                                    1
                    Samples requiring freezing (-20°C) within 24 hours of collection

 .Fish Tissue                        ,    ,   If samples cannot be kept frozen in the field, ship on day of
  (aluminum foil;                             collection or within two 30-gal plastic bags) 24 h by
                                             overnight courier. (Portable Freezers are available that can
                                             be run off a cigarette lighter while in  the field and
  •  ;.           ;           	  ' "  :- :;    i     electrical outlets in Motels).                        .

-------
lTabIe3-4.  Continued.

|S ample Type
^container)
                               Preservative
              Guidelines
                                                         Cover labels completely with clear tape.
                                                         Label on each bag should have identical
                                                           Sample ED number assigned.
                                                         Confirm the sample ID assigned on the
                                                           label matches the ID number recorded
                                                           on the field collection form (or other
                                                           sample tracking report).             ,
                                                         Protect samples from meltwater if ice is
                                                           used by doublebagging ice.
                             Samples requiring preservation in formalin
IPeriphyton ID
    nmL centrifuge tube)
                                 10% buffered formalin
      Specimens
      , 2-L, and/or 4-L jars)
                                 10% buffered formalin

Labels or tags placed inside of the jar must
  be of water-resistant paper or 100% rag
  content paper.
The label on outside of the container
  should be completely covered with
  clear tape.
  Confirm the sample ID assigned on the
  label matches the ID number recorded
  on the field collection form (or other
  sample tracking report).
Special  shipping containers, outside
  labeling, and snipping forms may be
  required for shipments containing
  formalin.
                              Samples requiring preservation in ethanol
 jSenthic Macroinvertebrates
 |(500-mL or 1-Ljars)

        ""
                                 70% ethanol
 Confirm the sample ID assigned on the
  label matches the ID number recorded
  on the field collection form (or other
  sample tracking report).           :
 Special shipping  containers, outside
  labeling, and shipping forms may be
  required for shipments containing
  ethanol.

-------
Base Location Activities
Qty. Item
Before Departure for River
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1 set
1
1 set
1
1 box
1
Dossier of access information for'scheduled river site
Sampling itinerary form or notebook
Safety log and/or personal safety information for each team member
GPS receiver with extra batteries
Dissolved oxygen/temperature meter with probe
Conductivity meter with probe
500-mL plastic bottle containing deionized water
500-mL plastic bottles containing conductivity QCCS, labeled "Rinse" and "Test"
Assorted extra batteries for dissolved and conductivity meters
Completed water chemistry sample labels (3 labels with same barcode)
Completed microbial sample label
Water chemistry sample containers (one 4-L Cubitainer and two 60-mL syringes with
a plastic storage container
Microbial sample container (200 mL specially prepared square glass bottle)
Clear tape strips to cover completed sample labels
Checklist of all equipment and supplies required for a river visit














Packing and Shipping Samples

1 box
1-box
2
2

Ice
1-gal heavy-duty scalable plastic bags
30-gal plastic garbage bags
Insulated shipping containers (plastic coolers) for frozen samples
Containers suitable to transport and/or ship samples preserved in formalin and ethanol
Shipping airbills and adhesive plastic sleeves






Figure 3-4.   Equipment and supply checklist for base location activities
                                                 41,

-------
dix A, which is used at the base location to
ensure that all  of the required equipment is
brought to the river. Use this checklist to en-
sure that equipment and supplies are orga-
nized and available at the river site in order to
conduct the activities efficiently.

3.4   Literature Cited
Metcalf, R. C. and D. V. Peck. 1993. A dilute
    standard for pH, conductivity, and acid
   neutralizing capacity measurement. Jour-
   nal of Freshwater Ecology 8:67-72.

Peck, D. V. and R. C. Metcalf. 1991. Dilute,
   neutral pH standard of known conductiv-
   ity and acid neutralizing capacity. Analyst
   116:221-231.

-------

-------
                              Section 4
                   Initial  Site Procedures
                       Alan T. Herlihy1 and Jim Lazorchak2
    When a field team first arrives at a non-
wadeable site, they must first determine if the
stream or river meets certain criteria for sam-
pling and data collection. They must inspect
the selected river reach for appropriate access,
safety, and general river conditions. After lo-
cating public or private launch sites, the rafts
or boats are unloaded and the vehicles are
shuttled to and from launch locations. Cer-
tain conditions at the time of the visit may
warrant the collection of only a subset of field
measurements and samples. The crew then
measures the width of the non-wadeable
stream or river at several points and lays out
the reach boundaries on a map, within which
all subsequent sampling and  measurement
activities are conducted.
'Dept. of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon State University,
c/o U.S. EPA, 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis, OR 97333
2U.S. EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory, Eco-
logical Exposure Research Division, 26 W. Martin Luther
King Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45268
4.1   Site Verification
Activities

4.1.1   Locating the
Index Site
     Non-wadeable stream and river sam-
pling points were chosen from the "blue line"
network represented on  1:100,000- scale
USGS maps, following a systematic random-
ized design developed for EMAP sampling.
Sample sites were then marked with an "X"
on  finer-resolution  l:24,000-scale USGS
maps. This spot is referred to as the "index
site" or "X-site". The latitude/longitude of the
X-site will be listed on an information sheet
that is part of the dossier compiled for each
river (see Section 3).

     Complete a verification form for each
non-wadeable stream or river visited (regard-
less of whether you decide to sampling it),
following the procedures described in Table
4-1. While traveling from a base location to a
site, record a detailed description of the route

-------
Table4~l.  Site Verification Procedures.
i 1.   Find the stream or river location in the field corresponding to the "X" marked on a 7.5" topographic
     map (X-site) that is provided with the dossier for each site. Record the routes taken and other
     directions on the Verification Form so that someone can visit the same location in the future.
 2.   Use a dPS receiver to record the latitude and longitude of transects "A" and "K," and if possible,
     confirm the X-site with the coordinates provided in the  dossier for the site. Record these on the
     Verification Form.
 3.   Use all available means to insure that you are at the correct stream or river as marked on the map,
     including:  1:24,000 USGS map orienteering, topographic  landmarks, county  road maps, local
     contacts, etc.
 4.   While  scouting access and  shuttling  vehicles,  reconnoiter the  river channel  upstream  and
     downstream from the X-site, and assign one of the following sampling status categories to the stream.
     Record the category on the Verification Form.

             "                         :  Target Categories

     A  Regular Wadeable Stream: - The  stream can be sampled with wadeable stream procedures.
     B.  Regular-Partial Boatable and Wadeable Combination: If over half the reach is non-wadeable,
         sample it with the non-wadeable  protocols.
     C.  Regular-Boatable:  A stream too deep to be safely sampled by wading following our wadeable
         stream protocols. The stream or river can be sampled with Non-Wadeable procedures.
     D.  Intermittent Stream: The flow of  water is not continual, but the channel is wet. Sample using
         modified procedures.
 ,;    E,  Dry Channel: A discernible stream channel is present but there is no water at the  site. Sample
 •        using modified procedures.
     . F,'  Aj|ered Channel: There is a stream at the location marked with the X-site on the map, but the
 '        stream channel does not appear the way it is drawn on the map. An example would be a channel
          rerouting following a flood event that cut off a loop of the stream.
          Establish a new X-site at the same  relative position in the altered channel. Make  careful notes
          and sketches of the changes on the Verification Form.

                                      Non-target Categories

          Np Stream Channel (map error):  No water body or stream channefis present at the coordinates
          provided for the X-site.
          Impounded stream: The stream is submerged under a lake or pond due to man-made or natural
          (e.g., beaver dam) impoundments.
          Marsh/Wetland: There is standing  water present, but no definable stream channel.
          In cases of wetlands surrounding a stream channel, define the site as Target but restrict
          sampling to the stream channel.

                              ;        JEnaccessible Categories

      A  Physical Barriers: If you are physically unable to reach the X-site because of poor or no river
          access, or other obstacles that prohibit safe sampling.
      B.No Permission:  You are denied access to launch sites by the landowners.

  5.   Do not sample "Non-target" or "Inaccessible" sites. Place an "X" in the appropriate box in the "Non-
      Sampleable" section of the Verification Form and provide an explanation in the comments section.
     A.

     B.

     C.


-------
taken on page 1 of the Verification Form (Fig-
ure 4-1). This information will allow others
to find the site again in the future. Upon lo-
cating the sample reach and X-site for a stream
or river, confirm its location and that the team
is at the correct stream or river. Use all avail-
able means to accomplish this, and record the
information on page 1 of the Verification Form
(Figure 4-1).
4.1.2  Determining the
Sampling Status of a
Non-wadeable Stream
or River
    Not all chosen non-wadeable sites will
turn out to be streams or rivers. On the basis
of previous synoptic surveys, it was found
                 Reviewed by (initial)
VERIFICATION FORM - STREAMS/RIVERS
SITE NAME: BEAVtF? RIVE/?
SITE ID: ORRV *! 5 - *? *? 9
DATE: % 1 5 1 98 VISIT DO J2 1 D2 OS
TEAMID(X): 01 D2 D3 Q4 D5
D6 D7 Q8
WATERSHED ACTIVITIES AND DISTURBANCES OBSERVED (INTENSITY: BLANK = NOT OBSERVED, L = LOW, M = MODERATE, H = HEAVY)
STREAM/RIVER VERIFIED BY (X all that apply) : |2 Gps
G OTHER (DESCRIBE HERE):
COORDINATES LATITUDE (dd ram ss) NORTH
MAP:
GPS: V5"° 0&' / O~
n LOCAL CONTACT g] SIGNS BROADS gjTOPO.MAP
PI NOT VERIFIED (EXPLAIN IN COMMENTS)
LONGITUDE (ddd mm ss) WEST TYPE OF GPS FIX
D29
1 2 \ ° O~r> 5_6_- &SD
Are GPS Coordinates
w/i 10 Sec. of map?
DYES
INDEX SITE STATUS - X ONE BOX FROM ONE SECTION ONLY
SAMPLEABLE
FJ REGULAR -WADEABLE
P] REGULAR - PARTIAL- BOATABLE & WADEABLE COMBINATION
|3 REGULAR -BOATABLE
rj INTERMITTENT -DRY SPOTS ALONG REACH
rj DRY -NO WATER ANYWHERE ALONG REACH
Q ALTERED - STREAM/RIVER PRESENTiBUT NOT AS ON MAP
1 1 OTHER (EXPLAIN IN COMMENTS)
NON-SAMPLEABLE (No Sample Taken)
Q NO CHANNEL OR WATERBODY PRESENT
fj] IMPOUNDED (UNDERNEATH LAKE/POND)
Q WETLAND (NO DEFINABLE CHANNEL)
NO ACCESS
Q ACCESS PERMISSION DENIED
PJ] INACCESSIBLE (UNABLE TO REACH SITE)
DIRECTIONS TO STREAM/RIVER SITE
FROM B>E/VTO/V , SOUTH- 0H
FW£R -Access JSOAD (CAST SANK)
PUBLIC LflWCti  07' Zl"
LAUNCH AT J030
SUBSTRATE DIFFICULT ro D£TER/JI/V£ OUE TO DEPTHS AHP VELOc/ry.
VE6ETAT/O/V UNDER STORY - SAGE AND WaLOli/




      Rev. OS/29/98 (strweri.98)
                                                   VERIFICATION FORM - STREAMS/RIVER - 1
 Figure 4-1.  Verification Form (page 1).

-------
that the maps are far from perfect representa-
tions of the stream network. A significant part
of EMAP is the estimation of the actual ex-
tent of stream and river length in the area. After
the river and location of the X-site are con-
firmed, evaluate the river reach surrounding
the X-site and classify the stream into one of
three major sampling status categories (Table
4-1). The primary distinction between "Non-
target" and "Target" streams and rivers is the
flow and size characteristics of the water body
and adequate access to a river site.

    Record the site class and pertinent site
verification information on the Verification
Form (Figure 4-1). If the site is non-target or
inaccessible, the site visit is completed, and
no further sampling activities are conducted.

4.1.3  Sampling During

or After Rain Events
    Avoid sampling during high flow rain-
storm events. First, it is often unsafe to be in
the water during such times. In addition, bio-
logical and chemical conditions during epi-
sodes are often quite different from those dur-
ing baseflow. On the other hand, sampling
cannot be restricted to only strict baseflow
conditions. It would be next to impossible to
define' 'strict baseflow" with any certainty at
an unstudied site. Such a restriction would also
greatly shorten the index period when sam-
pling activities can be conducted. Thus, some
compromise is necessary regarding whether
to sample a given stream because of storm
events. To a great extent, this decision is based
on  the judgment of the field team. Some
guidelines to help make this decision are pre-
sented in Table 4-2. The major indicator of
the influence of storm events will be the con-
dition of the stream itself. If a field team de-
cides a site is unduly influenced by a storm
event, do not sample the site that day. Notify
 the field coordinator or other central contact
 person to reschedule the stream for another
 visit

 4.14  Site  Photographs
      Taking site photographs (digital cameras
 may be convenient because no film process-
 ing is required) is  an  optional activity, but
 should be considered if the site has unusual
 natural or man-made features associated with
 it. If you do take any photographs at a stream
 or river, start the sequence with one photo-
 graph of an 8.5 oo 11 inch piece of paper with
 the stream ID and date printed in large letters.
 After the photo of the stream ID information,
 take one photograph at the up river transect
 (A) and one at the X-site. Take any additional
 photos you find interesting  after these first
 three pictures. For pictures of aquatic verte-
 brates (see Section 12) or other small objects,
 place the paper with the stream ID and date
 in each snapshot.

 4.2  Laying out the
 Sampling Reach
      Unlike chemistry, which can be mea-
 sured at a point, most of the biological and
jKTable 4-2.  Guidelines to Determine thei Influence I
C^         of Rain Events

t-   • If it is running at bank full discharge or the
I*    watfr seeni? .much more turbid than typical for ^
fct   the class of stream do not sample it that day.

HI'  • Keep* an eye on tEe weather reports and* rainfall
f*-   patterns. Do not sample a stream during periods "
jp'	 ,of prolonged heavy rains.

pj;':!'?.:-.If the  stream  seems to be close to normal t
ft :   summer flows, and does not seem to be unduly .;
||":"':;..'" influenced By storm events, go ahead and *
E    sample it, even If it has recently rained or is ]
frai.s -, raining,  .' ,." • .,[...  '-. • ..•,.,-.'..".' -.''" . ...'-'.. . , -.'^

-------
habitat structure measures require sampling a
certain length of a non-wadeable stream or
river to get a representative picture of the eco-
logical community. Previous EMAP pilot
studies have  suggested that a length of 40-
100 times the channel width is necessary to
collect at least 90% of the fish species occur-
ring in the stream or river reach. In western
streams a support reach that is 100 channel
widths long around the X-site is required to
characterize the community and habitat asso-
ciated with the sampling point while 40 chan-
nel widths has been found to be adequate in
eastern streams. Establish the sampling reach
about the X-site using the procedures de-
scribed in Table 4-3. Scout the sampling reach
to make sure it is clear of obstacles that would
prohibit sampling and data collection activi-
ties. Record the channel width used to deter-
mine the reach length, and the sampling reach
length upstream and downstream of the X-
site (or the midpoint of the reach) on page 2
of the Verification Form as shown in Figure
4-2. Figure 4-3  illustrates the principal fea-
tures of the established sampling reach, in-
cluding the  location of 11 cross-section
fcTable4-3.  Laying Out The Sampling Reach.
                                                                                        .__-„.
P.! .  Consult the 7.5 minute USGS topographic map in the site dossier. The river width is estimated and the
     reach boundaries are marked between the two boat launches. The total reach length equals 100 times
          times the mean river width.
==2.  Using a laser rangefinder, measure the  non-wadeable stream or river width in several places,
    '- specifically the X-site and the two boat launches.
     •   :   '      - ' '.  .  -v . •  . -/•' •'•...'•''        '    ;              .            .      Jf
    —   Perform these duties while verifying the reach location and evaluating raft or boat launch and/or  "
    ^HiiTjegress sites.      .         .

|:3.  Confirm the river width and reach boundaries. If different than dossier information, adjust as necessary  :
    r by using a map wheel and delineating new reach boundaries on the map. Multiply mean river width by  ,
jfe-—100 or 40 and delineate 50 or 20 charmer widths upstream and downstream of the X-site.
  .=-—-';—•.   ••-:  •  : '•"• .•"""•   :  •••'•••   •.'.•••-':      ••''.'••'•        •    .'     '   I
  :—-    It is OK to shift the reach up or downriver to maximize effort efficiency and access. However, the  :
         X-site must be within the reach to be sampled.
&•— - "   • : •    -.-'"•'  " '    -..'.':.  .  .',_•'."'>'"'•-'--".  '  •'.'   ..-.'-.'    • \ .    -     .  -    .'   •        i
?4.  Record the river \vidth on page 2 of the Verification Formi

p5.  Extensive  shallows, large log jams,  absence of launch  sites or vehicle access, and hazardous  .
P— Whitewater may preclude rafting.
fe=^=^;.:-. ..-..,.;,..„.••;,,:.:.•.:.; V ,•.,:/••....•.;,,..,...••., /,. ,-.•:   •-,•   .   -.-.:...-,•-             j
fe?          •.••••'..         • . - :     ..-.-.--..                           -             **
P67~ With the map wheel, determine the distance from the raft or boat put-in location to the beginning of the
     -reach. This is the distance to float or boat before sampling  begins.

|ff.  Using the laser rangefinder at the most upriver transect (Transect "A"), measure 10 or 4 channel widths
   f^dpwnriyer to the next transact (Transect "B"). Continue this while sampling until the final transect '
   —-Crransect-"K"). "     :    !    :;
             odd numbered STRMJD's along the left shore (facing downriver); sample even numbered
         ; along the right shore.

         Large obstructions or hazards may require temporary diversion.

-------
                                                                             Reviewed by (initial)
                            VER1FICATION FORM - STREAMS/RIVERS
  SITE NAME:   BEAVE"R    FW£i?	DATE: g   15  I 98  VISIT  DO  fll D2  D3

  SITE ID:   ORRV _3. JL " j9.jL3_      TEAM ID (X):  {8(1   D2   D3  D4   D5  D6  D7   D8
                                STREAM/RIVER REACH DETERMINATION
 CHANNEL WIDTH USED TO DEFINE
 REACH (1,1) (XX):
        DISTANCE (M) FROM X-SITE

UPSTREAM LENGTH       DOWNSTREAM LENSTH
                                                                            COMMENT
                               qoo
   ARROW
   INCHOATES
   NCfTTH
      A
       N
                                                                                   FLOW
 ftev. Oi'29.'96 Is!rwetf.98)
                                                                    VERIFICATION FORM - STREAMS/RIVERS - 2
Figure 4-2.   Verification Form (page 2).


-------
                                                           D
    Distance between transects = or 4
    Times mean wetted width at X-site
            Total reach length = 100 or 40 times mean wetted width at X-site
Figure 4-3.  Sampling reach features.
transects used for physical habitat character-
ization (Section 6). Samples for periphyton
(Section 7), sediment metabolism (Section 8),
benthic macroinvertebrate (Section 9), aquatic
vertebrates (Section 10), and tissue (Section
11) are collected only along the designated
shoreline (refer to Table 4-3, step 8).

     There are some conditions that may re-
quire adjusting the reach about the X-site (i.e.,
the X-site no longer is located at the midpoint
of the reach) to accommodate river access or
to avoid river hazards or obstacles. If the be-
ginning or end of the reach cannot be sampled
due to obstacles or hazards, make up for the
loss of reach length by moving ("sliding") the
other end of the reach an equivalent distance
away from the X-site. Similarly, access points
may necessitate sliding the reach. Do not
"slide" the reach so that the X-site falls out-
side of the reach boundaries. Sites which are
100X the average stream may be too time
consuming to consider. So the field crew
should avoid sliding the reach and decide
whether the site really meets site selection
 criteria. If not, then-the reach is not a target
 site. Also, do not "slide" a reach to avoid man-
 made obstacles such as bridges, rip-rap, or
 channelization. These represent features and
 effects that EMAP is attempting to study.

     Before leaving the non-wadeable site,
 mark all transects on the supplied 7.5 minute
 topographic map and note that a photocopied
 version is attached to page 2 of the Verifica-
 tion Form (Figure 4-2). In addition to any
 other interesting features that should be
 marked on the map, note any landmarks/di-
 rections that can be used to find the X-site for
 future visits.

4.3   Equipment  And
Supplies
     A list of the equipment and supplies re-
 quired to conduct the non-wadeable stream
 and river verification and to lay out the sam-
 pling reach is  presented in Figure 4-4. This
 checklist is similar to the checklist presented
 in Appendix A, which is used at the base lo-

-------
Equipment and Supplies for Initial Site Activities
Qty. Item
1
1
1
1

1

1
1
1
1
1
1 copy
1 set
Dossier of site and access information
Topographic map with "X-site" and proposed width and reach boundaries
Site information sheet with map coordinates and elevation of X-site
GPS receiver and operating manual
Extra batteries for GPS receiver
Verification Form
Soft lead (#2) pencils
Laser rangefinder and clear waterproof bag
Map wheel
Calculator
Metric ruler
Waterproof camera and film
Field operations and methods manual
Laminated sheets of procedure tables and/or quick reference guides for
initial site activities















Figure 4-4.    Equipment and supplies checklist for initial site activities.

-------
                                Section  5
        Water Chemistry and Microbiology
                     Alan T. Herlihy1 and Charles W. Hendricks2
     There are two components to collecting
water chemistry information: Collecting
samples of stream or river water to ship to the
analytical laboratory, and obtaining in situ
measurements of specific conductance, dis-
solved oxygen, and temperature. At each river,
teams fill one 4-L container and two 60 mL
syringes with river water. These samples are
stored in a cooler packed with plastic bags
filled with ice and are shipped or driven to
the analytical laboratory within 24 hours of
collection (see Section 3). The primary pur-
poses of the water samples and the field chemi-
cal measurements are to determine:

  •  Acid-base status (Acid Neutralizing
     Capacity, ANC)

  •  Trophic condition (nutrient enrichment)

  •  Chemical Stressors

  •  Classification of water chemistry type.
'Department of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon State Uni-
versity, c/o U.S. EPA, 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis, OR 97333.
2U.S. EPA, National Health and Environmental Effects Re-
search Laboratory, Western Ecology Division, 200 SW 35th
St., Corvallis, OR 97333.
     Water from the 4-L bulk sample is used
to measure the major cations and anions, nu-
trients, total iron and manganese, turbidity and
color. The syringe samples are analyzed for
pH and dissolved inorganic carbon. Syringes
are used to seal off the samples from the at-
mosphere because the pH and dissolved in-
organic carbon (DIG) will all change if the
streamwater equilibrates with atmospheric
CO2. Overnight  express mail for these
samples  is required because the syringe
samples need to be analyzed, and the 4-L bulk
sample needs to be stabilized (by filtration and/
or acidification) within a short period of time
(72 hours) after collection. ,  .

     In situ measurements are made using
field meters and recorded on standard data
forms. Specific conductance (or conductiv-
ity) is a measure of the ability of the water to
pass  an electrical current which is related to
the ionic strength  of a solution. Dissolved
oxygen (DO)  is .a measure of the amount of
oxygen dissolved in solution. In natural wa-
ters, minimal concentrations of oxygen are es-
sential for survival of most aquatic organisms.
Measures of DO and temperature are used to

-------
assess water quality and the potential for
healthy aerobic organism populations. Most
of the procedures outlined in this section are
similar to the  ones utilized by the EPA in
streams for the National Surface Water Sur-
vey (Kaufniann et al., 1988) and have been
adapted from the Survey's field operations
handbook (U.S. EPA, 1989).

5.1   Microbial Sampling

     Separate  samples are collected for the
culture of bacteria that are present in water.
The organisms are living entities and respond
to fluctuations and nutrient stress just like
higher forms. They may be native to the wa-
ter or introduced to the stream or river by the
addition of human or animal contamination.
We are currently using culturing procedures
that can differentiate between the two events
based on relative numbers of bacteria of cul-
tured bacteria.

     Samples of stream and river water are to
be taken in laboratory prepared sterile, glass
bottles. These square bottles are designed for
sample collection, transit and storage, and no
other container should be used for bacterio-
logical samples. Generally one (1) sample is
collected per site, but, duplicate (or triplicate)
 samples from the same site may be requested
 for statistical purposes. Occasionally, two (2)
 or more  samples at specific sites along a
 stream or river reach may be requested. The
 number of samples to be taken will be noted
 on the field activity sheets.

      Ideally, microbiological examination of
 a water sample should begin promptly after
 collection to avoid unpredictable changes in
 the numbers of organisms present in the
 sample. If samples cannot be processed within
 1 hour after collection, an iced cooler for stor-
 age during transport (overnight express mail)
to the laboratory must be used. All microbiol-
ogy samples are to be iced during transport
and refrigerated in the laboratory, while await-
ing analysis within 24 hours of collection.

5.2   Sample Collection

     Before leaving  the base location, pack-
age the sample containers (one 4-L cubitainer,
two 60 mL syringes, and two 200 mL sterile
glass bottles) and the stream sample beaker
to prevent contamination (see Section 3). Fill
out a set of water chemistry and microbial
sample labels as shown in Figure 5-1. Attach
a completed label to the cubitainer, each sy-
ringe,  and  each glass bottle and cover with
clear tape  strips as  described in Section 3.
Make sure  the syringe labels do not cover the
volume gradations on the syringe. In the field,
make sure  that the water chemistry labels all
have the same sample ID number (barcode),
and that the labels are securely attached. Also,
make  sure the microbial labels all have the
 same sample ID number (barcode), and that
 the labels are securely attached.

     The procedure to collect a water chem-
 istry sample is described in Table 5-1. The
 sample is  collected from the middle  of the
 flowing stream whenever feasible or if the X
 Site is not accessible take the sample from the
 river  channel at the  last sample transect.
 Throughout the sampling process, it is impor-
 tant to take precautions to avoid contaminat-
 ing the sample. Rinse all sample containers
 three times with portions of stream water be-
 fore filling them with the sample. Many sites
 have  a very low ionic strength and can be
 contaminated quite easily by perspiration from
 hands, sneezing, smoking, insect repellent, or
  other chemicals used when collecting other
  types of samples. Thus, make sure that none
  of the water sample contacts your hands be-
  fore going into the cubitainer. All of the chemi-


-------
               WATER CHEMISTRY
                    CU(|j)S2
               SITE ID: ORRV 9. £. -99.9

                DATE: 'S I 5198
                     229000
    WATER CHEMISTRY
        CU S1 (§§)
   SITE ID: ORRV 9_ST_-.9 9 _9

    DATE: <5 I & 198
                                                   229000
                WATER CHEMISTRY
                    (5D)S1 S2

                SITE ID: ORRV9.81-93:.?-
                DATE:  <5 I
                      229000
        MICROBIAL

    SITE ID: ORRV.? ? -_?_9_9

     DATE:  % I ff/98
                                                   229000
Figure 5-1.   Completed sample labels for water chemistry and microbiology.
cal analyses conducted using the syringe
samples are affected by equilibration with at-
mospheric carbon dioxide; thus, it is essential
that no outside air contact the syringe samples
during or after collection.

    The procedure to collect a microbial
sample is described in Table 5-2. The sample
is collected from the middle of the flowing
stream or river channel at the last sample
transect. Collect samples that are representa-
tive of the water being tested and use aseptic
techniques to avoid sample contamination.
Take care to  avoid contact with the bank or
stream bed; otherwise, contamination of the
sample may occur making it useless for analy-
sis.

    Record the information from the sample
label on the Sample Collection Form as shown
in Figure 5-2. Note any problems  related to
possible contamination in the comments sec-
tion of the form.
5.3   Field Measurements
    Table 5-3 presents the procedures for
obtaining field measurement data for the wa-
ter chemistry indicator. The conductivity and
dissolved oxygen meters are checked in the
field using the same procedures as those used
at a base location (Section 3). The quality
control check sample solution (QCCS) is pre-
pared according to directions presented in
Section 3. The results of field checks of these
meters, as well as the measured values for
specific conductance, dissolved oxygen, and
stream temperature, are recorded on the Field
Measurement Form as shown  in Figure 5-3,

5.4   Equipment and
Supplies
    A list of equipment and supplies required
to collect samples and field data for the water
chemistry and microbiology indicator is pre-
sented in Figure 5-4. This checklist is similar

-------
Table 5-1.  Sample Collection Procedures for Water Chemistry.
Collect the water samples from either the X site or the last transect in a flowing portion near the middle of the i
river.

1.   Rinse the 500 mL sample beaker three times with river water. Discard the rinse downriver.

2.   Remove the cubitainer lid and expand the cubitainer by pulling out the sides. NOTE: DO NOT BLOW .;
    into the cubitainers to expand them, this will cause contamination.

3.   Fill the beaker with river water and slowly pour 30-50 mL into the cubitainer. Cap the cubitainer and
    rotate it so that the water contacts all the surfaces. Discard the water downstream. Repeat the above
    rinsing procedure two more times.

4.   Collect additional portions of river water with the beaker and pour them into the cubitainer. Let the
    weight of the water expand the cubitainer. The first two portions will have to be poured slowly as the
    cubitainer expands. Fill the cubitainer to its maximum volume. Rinse the cubitainer lid with streamwater.
    Eliminate any air space from the cubitainer, and cap it tightly. Make sure  the cap is tightly sealed and not I
    on at an angle.                                                                              ;

5.   Place the cubitainer in a cooler on ice and shut the lid.

6.   Submerge a 60-mL syringe halfway into the river and withdraw a 15-20 mL aliquot. Pull the plunger to its
    maximum extension and shake the syringe  so the water contacts all surfaces. Point  the syringe
    downstream and discard the water by depressing the plunger. Repeat the rinsing procedure two more
    times.

7.   Submerge the syringe into the river again and slowly fill the syringe with a fresh sample. Try not to get
    any air bubbles in the syringe. If more than 1-2 tiny bubbles are present, discard the sample and draw
     another one.

8.   Invert the syringe (tip pointing up), and cap it with a syringe valve. Tap the syringe lightly to detach any
    trapped air bubbles. With the valve open, expel the air bubbles and a small volume of water, leaving
    between 50 and 60 mL of sample in the syringe. Close the syringe valve. If any air bubbles were drawn
     into the syringe during this process, discard the sample and fill the syringe again (step 8).

9.   Repeat Steps 6 through 8 with a second syringe. Place both syringes in a small plastic tote and store with
     the cubitainer in an ice filled cooler. Keep samples on ice until they reach the laboratory.

 10. Record the site number (Sample ID) on the Sample Collection Form along with the pertinent river
     information (river name, ID, date, etc.). Note anything that could influence sample chemistry (heavy
     rain, potential contaminants) in the Comments section. If you had to move to another part of the reach
     to collect the sample, place the letter of the nearest transect in the "Station Collected" field. Record more
     detailed reasons  and/or information in the Comments section.

-------
\' Table 5-2.   Sample Collection Procedures for Microbiology.
^Collect the water samples from the last transect in a flowing portion near the middle of the stream. The
pTollowing procedures describe sampling of Non-Wadeable streams and rivers for bacterial analysis. These
I techniques have been proven useful in evaluating indicators of functional diversity and sanitary
I1 significance, including the quality of all types of waters.
1C    •     •   "•  - '•• •••:.. :• '•-'-•'•'.' •'•'•: '••  .  ..  : •-• •••,- •'•••. ^ ;•.,  • .. '  ••'"•'   . •  ,•   -  '  '  '"- •/   •  '.  '•    '•
perl.   Keep the sampling bottle closed until it is to be filled.

JKF2.   Remove stopper and cap as a unit; do not contaminate inner surface of stopper or cap and neck of
IT""  bottle.              "••:••'•'        •   .    •' "-      "             •   '
fc •  :  .   . •    - ..-.  ' -,••-.'•.. ., : -..••'•  ."•- •  ;:  " . '•••" ..-.-;•'.•••>•   ••-.   ••:-.,..•.   -  '  '-   •  •
pfc3.   Fill container without rinsing.

ji 4.   Water samples are taken from the upstream side of a boat by holding the bottle near its base in the hand
it;      and plunging it, neck  downward, below the water's surface. Turn bottle until  neck points slightly
      Tlpward and mouth is directed toward the current.
      •           ..•'."..:•••'.    ; ."    : - :     ."'     -   •    .----•-       .   . .     "
  5.   If there is no current, as in the case of a reservoir, create a current artificially by pushing bottle forward
       horizontally in a direction away from the hand.
KH,       '       '     ;   ''••'-."-••.:  •.-.-•••   :  • '    '     . •  ' '   ' ••-.    '•.    .     -    ". . :-..   ••
P_" 6.  _If it is not possible to collect samples from these situations in this way, attach a weight to base of bottle
     — and lower it into the water.
                                                                                                    I

                    •  •   •••-•.-..     •••   -..- -     ••••-             •.•         •     ••         ••..
       When the sample is collected, leave ample air space in the bottle (at least 2.5 cm) to facilitate mixing at
       later stages in the examination of the water.                                      -  ;

       Replace stopper or cap immediately and apply electricians tape around the neck to send the bottle. If
       used, secure the hood around outside of the neck of the ;bottle and cap.
I-  9.   Place the microbial sample with the chemistry syringes in a small plastic tote and surround with ice in a
I??---  cooler.
?:                '          "            ''  '  :'": •  •  .    ''"''•-.-         ''    '       '    •     .     '
ll^lO.  Repeat steps 1 through 9 if duplicate or triplicate samples are desired.

*~ 11.  Record the barcode number (Sample ID) on the Sample Collection Form along with the pertinent river
    _  information (river name, ID, date, etc.). Note anything that  could influence sample chemistry or
       microbiology (heavy rain, potential contaminants) in the Comments section. If you had to move to
       another part of the reach to collect the sample, place the letter of the nearest transect in the "Station
       Collected" field. Record more detailed reasons and/or information in the Comments section.

-------
                                                                          Reviewed by (initial)
                        SAMPLE COLLECTION FORM - RIVERS (continued)
 SITE NAME:
                                                  DATE: g  I S  I 98  VISIT  D0 jg] 1 D2  D3
SITEID:   ORRV
                       5  -  9*? 9       TEAM ID (X):  fg1  D2   D3  D4   D5  Q6   D7   D8
          CHEMISTRY AND MICROBtAL WATER SAMPLE (Chem: 4-L Cubitainer and 2 Syringes, Micro: Glass Bottle)
              SAMPLE ID (BARCODE)   TRANSECT FLAG
                                                                  COMMENTS
 CHEMISTRY
 MICROBIAL
                    113
                                 K
                                     SEDIMENT TOXICITY SAMPLES
   SAMPLE ID (BARCODE)    FLAG
                                                          COMMENTS
                         FISH TISSUE SAMPLES - PRIMARY SAMPLE (min. 50g total wgt)
         SAMPLE ID (BARCODE)
  LINE
              SPECIES CODE
                                             COMMON NAME
                                                                        NUMBER OF INDIVIDUALS
         C Q TT
                                             CPTT/A
 11
  IS COMPOSITE SAMPLE COMPOSED OF INDIVIDUALS COLLECTED FROM THROUGHOUT REACH?  (X)
                                                                               D YES
  IF NO. EXPLAIN:
                 COLLECTED   AT  ONE
                FISH TISSUE SAMPLES - SECONDARY SAMPLE (where available; 5 individuals)
          SAMPLE ID (BARCODE)
  LINE
             SPECIES CODE
                                            COMMON NAME
                                                                          TOTAL LENGTH (MM)
         PTYC.ORE Gr
                               NORTHERN
220
                                 NORTHFRM   SQIJAWFI5H
                                                                           220
          PTYCOREG-
                               NORTHERN/  SQUAWFISH
2.6S
          PTYCOREG-
                                A/ORTHERN   SQUAWFISH
          PTYCOREG
                                NORTHERN   SQL/AlA/F IS AJ
 2 IB
  IS COMPOSITE SAMPLE COMPOSED OF INDIVIDUALS COLLECTED FROM THROUGHOUT REACH?  (X)
                                                                                        D
 IF NO, EXPLAIN:
                                    ' COMMENT OR FLAG EXPLANATION FOR FISH TISSUE
        -Sample not collected; U - Suspect sample; F1.F2, etc. = misc. flag assigned by field crew. Explain all flags In Comments sections.

 Rev. 05/29/98 L.rvscmb.98)                     '                             SAM PLE COLLECTION FORM - RIVERS - 2
Figure5-2.   Sample Collection Form (page 2), showing data recorded for water chemistry and
microbial samples.

-------
I = Table 5-3.  Procedures for Streamside and In Situ Chemistry Measurements,
  r___                           '•'.-''-     : Specific Conductance

^|.  Check the batteries and electronic. functions (e.g., zero, "red line") of the conductivity meter as  :
^^-^ instructed by the operating manual.

£-Z-  Insert the probe into the "RINSE" container of the quality control check sample (QCCS) and swirl for 3
^-  to 5 seconds. Shake off the probe and transfer to the "TEST" container of QCCS; let stabilize for 20  ]
|r— seconds. Record the conductivity of the QCCS on the Field Measurement Form.
S[~              • .      .          ;    ''••. ': ,        '   "-''-'•"-.".!"•    -.:.•,-  '  '        '' .    .      -   •
E"        If the measured conductivity is not within 10% or 1.0 S/cm of theoretical value, repeat the
p-=—     measurement process. If the value is still unacceptable, flag the conductivity data on the Field    :
pl~v-     Measurement Form.                                                                      ;

fHJ.  Submerge the probe in an area of flowing water near the middle of the channel at the same location where  j
iEt-; the water chemistry sample is collected. Record the measured conductivity on the Field Measurement  '
E     Form.
t                                 Dissolved Oxygen and Temperature

JT  1-  Inspect the probe for outward signs of fouling and for an intact membrane. Do not touch the electrodes
H™   inside the probe with any object. Always keep the probe moist by keeping it inside its calibration
"-__   chamber.

   2.  Check the batteries and electronic functions of the meter as described in the operating manual. Record
      the results of these checks on the Field Measurement Form.           :

,   3.  Calibrate theoxygen probe in water-saturated air as describedin the operating; manual. Allow at least 15
^ _    minutes for the probe to equilibrate before attempting to calibrate. Try to perform the calibration as close
1      to stream temperature as possible (not air temperature) by using stream water to fill the calibration
T      chamber prior to equilibration. For doing the elevation correction, the elevation of the sample site is
'"     given  on the site Information sheet in the dossier for  the site.  Record the pertinent calibration
I      information on the Field Measurement Form.                                             :

   4.  After the calibration, submerge the probe in midstream at mid-depth at  the same location where the
      water chemistry sample is collected. Face the membrane of the probe upstream, and allow the probe to
      equilibrate. Record the measured DO and stream temperature on the Field Measurement Form. If the DO
      meter is not functioning, measure the stream  temperature with a field  thermometer and record the
 ~   reading on the Field Measurement Form along with pertinent data flags and comments.

-------
                                                                               Reviewed by (initial)
                         FIELD MEASUREMENT FORM - STREAMS/RIVERS
SITE NAME:
                                       DATE: g   I 5  I 98  VISIT  DO  Jfl 1 D2 D3
SITEID:    ORRV _f[ jL-_3fL
                             TEAM ID (X):
                                                               D2   D3   D4   D5  D6  D7   D8
                                         WEATHER CONDITIONS (X)
                CLOUD COVER
                                             D 5-25% .      D 25-50%
                                                                           D 50-75%
                                                                            D  >75%
               PRECIPITATION
                                  NONE
                                              D LIGHT
                                             D MODERATE     D HEAVY
   PREVIOUS PRECIPITATION (24 H)
                                  NONE
                              D LIGHT
                                                            n MODERATE
                                                                              HEAVY
          AIR TEMPERATURE XX
                                     °C
                  IN SITU MEASUREMENTS
                                               STATION ID:    \^    Assume X-site unless marked
           O.CCS COND uS/CM XXXX
                   75"
                                                        Ar
    STREAM/RIVER COND iiS/CM XXXX
                   \\0
                                                             TRAM5CCT  *£"
        STREAM/RIVER DO MG/LXX.X
                                         AT TRAUSECT  *K"
        STREAM/RIVER TEMP -CXX.X    f ~f,  fa
                                               TRANSECT  "K"
                FISH TISSUE SAMPLES - SECONDARY SAMPLE (where available; 5 individuals)
  iNTTIALO,
   (MOW.)*
   XX.X
  INITIAL
INCUBATION
 TEMP. CC)
  XX.X
                               INCUBATION TIME
                                (24-HR TIME)
                                       FINISH
                                       IHrtMMI
                                                DURATION OF
                                                 INCUBATION
                                                  (HHiMM)
               If-H-
             lg'30
                                    22:30
: 00
    SAMPLE ID
    (BAHCOOE)
     FINAL O,
     (MOa.)2
      XX.X
                    1,5
                      INITIAL  D.Qv   AT  IQOO'ELEVATION
                      FINAL     P.O.    AT  2200'  -  METER   CALIBRATED
                    7.2
  24-3665
                        FOR  EACH   ELEVATION
                    7.0
 COA/fROL
                                       OXYGEN METER CALIBRATION INFORMATION
 MEMBRANE CHECK
                                            ELECTRONIC ZERO
 CALBRATION CHAMBER TEMPERATURE:
                                                     SATURATED O2 @ @ TEMP.:
 STATION ELEVATION (FROM TOPO. MAP OR ALTIMETER):
                            /OOP
                                                     ELEVATION CORRECTION FACTOR:   X
Tbo caUxalion value Is obtained by multiplying the saturated DO concentration times an.
«tavati£n correction (actor (obtained Irom the tables on the back of the YSI meter). Adjust the
meief reading to trie calibration value.
                                                     CALIBRATION VALUE:
flag codes: K - no measurement or observation made: U - suspect measurement or observation; Q - unacceptable QC check associated with measurement; F1, F2, etc. =
mtscoitaneous (lags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags in comments section.
Rev. 05/29/98 (sbvfldm.98)
                                                                  FIELD MEASUREMENT FORM - STREAMS/RIVERS - 1
Figure 5-3.    Field Measurement Form (page 1), showing data recorded for water chemistry.

-------
Equipment And Supplies For Water Chemistry
Qty. Item
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1


Iroll
1 copy
1 set
Dissolved oxygen/Temperature meter with probe
DO repair kit containing additional membranes and probe filling solution
Conductivity meter with probe
500-mL plastic bottle of conductivity QCCS labeled "Rinse" (in plastic bag)
500-mL plastic bottle of conductivity QCCS labeled "Test" (in plastic bag)
500-mL plastic bottle of deionized water to store conductivity probe
Field thermometer
500 mL plastic beaker with handle (in clean plastic bag)
4-L cubitainer with completed sample label attached (in clean plastic bag)
60 mL plastic syringes (with Luer type tip) with completed sample labels
attached
200 mL sterile glass microbial bottles with completed sample label attached
(in clean plastic bag)
Plastic container with snap-on lid to hold filled syringes
Syringe valves (Mininert® with Luer type adapter, or equivalent, available
from a chromatography supply company)
Cooler with 4 to 6 plastic bags ( 1 -gal) of ice OR a medium or large opaque
garbage bag to store the water sample at streamside
Sample Collection From
Field Measurement Form
Soft-lead pencils for filling out field data forms
Fine-tipped indelible markers for filling out labels
Electricians tape
Field operations and methods manual
Laminated sheets of procedure tables and/or quick reference guides for water
chemistry and microbiology





















Figure 5-4.   Checklist of equipment and supplies for water chemistry.

-------
to the checklist presented in Appendix A,
which is used at the base location (Section 3)
to ensure that all of the required equipment is
brought to the Non-Wadeable stream or river.
Use this checklist to ensure that equipment
and supplies are organized and available at
the stream or river site in order to conduct the
activities efficiently.

5.5 Literature Cited
Kaufmann, P., A. Herlihy, J. Elwood, M.
    Mitch, S. Overton, M. Sale, J. Messer, K.
    Reckhow, K. Cougan, D. Peck, J. Coe,
    A. Kinney, S. Christie,  D.  Brown, C.
   Hagley, and Y. Jager. 1988. Chemical
   Characteristics of Streams in the Mid-
   Atlantic and Southeastern United States.
   Volume I: Population Descriptions and
   Physico-Chemical Relationships. EPA
   600/3-88/021a. U.S. Environmental Pro-
   tection Agency, Washington, D.C.

U.S. EPA. 1989. Handbook of Methods for
   Acid Deposition Studies:  Field Opera-
   tions for Surface Water Chemistry. EPA
   600/4-89/020. U.S. Environmental Pro-
   tection Agency, Office of Research and
   Development, Washington, D.C.

-------
                              Section 6
       Physical  Habitat  Characterization-
                   Non-wadeable  Rivers
                                     by
                                 Philip R. Kaufmann
    In the broad sense, physical habitat in
rivers includes all those physical attributes that
influence or provide sustenance to river or-
ganisms. Physical habitat varies naturally, as
do biological characteristics; thus expectations
differ even in the absence of anthropogenic
disturbance. Within a given physiographic-
climatic region, river drainage area and chan-
nel gradient are likely to  be strong natural
determinants of many aspects of river habitat,
because of their influence on discharge, flood
stage, and stream power (the product of dis-
charge times gradient). Summarizing the habi-
tat results of a workshop conducted by EMAP
on stream monitoring design, Kaufmann
(1993) identified seven general physical habi-
tat attributes important in influencing stream
'U.S. EPA, National Health and Environmental Effects Re-
search Laboratory, Western Ecology Division, 200 SW 35th
St.,Corvallis,OR97333.
ecology that are likely applicable in rivers as
well. They include:

  • Channel Dimensions

  • Channel Gradient

  • Channel Substrate Size and Type

  • Habitat Complexity and Cover

  • Riparian Vegetation Cover and Struc-
    ture

  • Anthropogenic Alterations

\ • Channel-Riparian Interaction

    All of these attributes may be directly or
indirectly altered by .anthropogenic activities.
Nevertheless, their expected values tend to
vary systematically with river size (drainage
area) and overall gradient (as measured from

-------
topographic maps). The relationships of spe-
cific physical habitat measurements described
in this EMAP-SW field manual to these seven
attributes are discussed by Kaufmann (1993).
Aquatic macrophytes, riparian vegetation, and
large woody debris are included in this and
other physical habitat assessments because of
their role in modifying habitat structure and
light inputs, even though they are actually bio-
logical measures. The field physical habitat
measurements from this field habitat charac-
terization are used in the context of water
chemistry, temperature, and other data sources
(e.g., remote sensing of basin land use and
land cover). The combined data analyses will
more comprehensively describe additional
habitat attributes and larger scales of physical
habitat or human disturbance than are evalu-
ated by the field assessment alone.

     This protocol is intended for evaluating
physical habitat in non-wadeable streams and
rivers. Kaufmann and Robison (1998)  de-
scribe other methods for use in smaller, wade-
able streams. Like the methods for wadeable
streams, these methods are most efficient dur-
ing low flow conditions and when leaves are
on terrestrial vegetation, but may be applied
during other seasons and higher flows except
as  limited by safety considerations. It is de-
signed for monitoring applications where ro-
bust, quantitative descriptions of reach-scale
habitat are desired, but time is limited.

     Like the wadeable streams protocol
(Kaufmann and Robison 1998) this  habitat
characterization approach employs a random-
ized, systematic spatial sampling design to
minimize bias in the placement and position-
ing of measurements. Measures are taken over
defined channel areas and these sampling ar-
eas or points are placed systematically at spac-
 ings that are proportional to baseflow chan-
nel width. This systematic sampling design
scales the sampling reach length and resolu-
tion in proportion to stream size. It also al-
lows statistical and series analyses of the data
that are not possible under other designs. We
strive to make the protocol objective and re-
peatable by using easily learned, repeatable
measures of physical habitat in place of esti-
mation techniques wherever possible. Where
estimation is employed, we direct the sam-
pling crew to estimate attributes that are oth-
erwise measurable, rather than estimating the
quality or importance of the attribute to biota
or its importance as an indicator of distur-
bance. We have included the more traditional
visual classification of channel unit scale habi-
tat types because they have been useful in
past studies and enhance comparability with
other work.

     The time commitment to gain repeatabil-
ity and precision is greater than that required
for more qualitative methods. In our field tri-
als, two people typically complete the speci-
fied channel, riparian, and discharge measure-
ments in about three  hours of field time.
However, the time required can vary consid-
erably with channel characteristics, flow con-
ditions, and  the location of boat launching
areas.

     The protocol defines the length of each
sampling reach proportional to river wetted
width and then systematically places measure-
ments to statistically represent the entire reach.
Stream thalweg depth measurements, habitat
classification, and mid-channel substrate ob-
servations are made at very tightly spaced in-
tervals; whereas channel "littoral" and ripar-
ian stations for measuring or observing
substrate, fish cover, large woody debris, bank
characteristics and riparian vegetation struc-
ture are spaced  further apart. The  tightly
 spaced depth measures allow calculation of
 indices of channel structural complexity, ob-

-------
jective classification of channel units such as
pools, and quantification of residual pool
depth, pool volume, and total stream volume.

6.1   Components of the

Field Habitat

Assessment
     Field data collection for the physical
habitat assessment is accomplished in a single
float down each river sample reach. Depend-
ing on the survey region, river sample reach
lengths are defined as either 40 or 100 times
the wetted width in the vicinity of the point
of entry (Figure 6-1). In addition to physical
habitat assessment, the 2-person habitat team
 of the field  crew collects  chemical,
 macroinvertebrate, andperiphyton samples (if
 applicable). They may also recon the chan-
 nel if they precede the electrofishing boat down
 the river. To characterize mid-channel habitat
 (Table 6-1), they measure a longitudinal thal-
 weg (or mid-channel) depth profile, tally
 snags, classify channel habitat types, charac-
 terize mid-channel substrate, and locate the
 11 systematic transect locations for littoral/ri-
 parian sampling and other habitat observations
 (Figures 6-1 and 6-2). At each of the 11
 marked reach transect locations (A-K), they
 measure channel wetted width, bankfull chan-
 nel dimensions, incision, channel constraint,
 bearing and gradient; then assess near-shore,
 shoreline, and riparian physical habitat char-
 acteristics by measuring or observing littoral
 depths, riparian canopy cover, substrate, large
 woody debris, fish cover, bank characteris-
 tics, riparian vegetation, and evidence of hu-
 man activities (Table 6-1). They also collect
 benthic macroinvertebrates (Section 9), take
 benthic algal samples (if applicable), and
 measure conductivity and water temperature
  using procedures described in section 5.
    Mid-channel habitat measurements and
observations are recorded on multiple pages
of the Thalweg Profile Form (Figure 6-3).
Instructions for these mid-channel procedures
are given in section 6.5. Measurements made
while anchored or tied up to the 11 littoral/
riparian plot stations (' 'transects'') are recorded
on 11 copies of the two sided Channel/Ri-
parian Transect Form (Figures 6-4 and 6-5).
Instructions for these transect or littoral/ripar-
ian assessment activities are discussed in sub-
section 6.6.

6.2 Habitat Sampling

Locations On  The Study

Reach
     Measurements are made at two scales of
resolution along the mid-channel length of the
reach; the results are later aggregated and ex-
pressed for the entire reach, a third level of
resolution (Figure 6-1). We want to assess
 habitat and other river indices over river reach
 lengths that are long enough to incorporate
 the habitat variability due to river meander-
 ing and pool-riffle structure. To accommodate
 habitat variability in a way that adjusts for
 varying sizes  of rivers, EMAP protocols
 specify sample reach lengths that are a mul-
 tiple of their average  wetted width (40 or 100
 Channel-Widths). Water velocity, habitat
 complexity, fish abundance, and species rich-
 ness may also affect capture efficiency and
 consequently the required sample reach
 length. In the Oregon river pilot, it was found
 that 85 channel widths is adequate for Oregon
 rivers (Hughes et al.  In Review). In the Mid-
 Atlantic region, river reaches of 40 channel
 widths long were used in order to make this
 aspect of field methods consistent between
 wadeable and non-wadeable streams. For this
 field manual, we discuss the methods used to

-------
                                                                        Upstream End
                                                                             Flow
                                                         Thalweg Profile Increments
                                                                      Downstream End
Figure 6-1.   River reach sample layout.

-------
i  Table6-l.  Components of River Physical Habitat Protocol.
        Thalweg Profile:

        At 10 equally spaced intervals between each of 11 channel cross-sections (100 along entire reach*):

        * Classify habitat type, record presence of backwater and off-channel habitats. (10 between cross
         : sections, 100 total)
        * Determine dominant substrate visually or using sounding rod. (10 between cross-sections, 100
          total)  '".                  .        ;

        At 20 equally spaced intervals (for 100 ChW reach) or 10 equally spaced intervals  (for 40 ChW
        reach) between each of 11 channel cross-sections:

        * Tally mid-channel snags - 10 (or 20) between cross-sections, 100(or 200) total.
        * Measure thalweg (maximum) depth using Sonar or rod -10 (or 20) between cross-sections, 100(or
          200) total.        -

        Littoral/Riparian Cross-Sections:  @ 11 stops ("transects") at equal intervals along reach length:

      ... Measure/estimate from one chosen bank on 11 channel cross-sections:

        * Gradient (clinometer or Abney level)  between cross-section and next one downstream.
        .* Bearing (compass) between cross-section and next one downstream.
        .*./Wetted width (laser range finder).
        * Mid-channel bar width (laser range finder).             .
        * Bankfull width and height (estimate).
        * Incision height (estimate).
      _  * Bank angle (estimate).
        *  Riparian canopy cover (densiometer) in four directions from chosen.bank.
        * Shoreline Substrate in the first 1m above waterline (est. dominant and subdominant size class).
 fan 20m long Littoral Plot extending streamward 10m from chosen bank:
 St.. "-•'•;"•        *- "                      -    • -


 fc:
 fc
* Littoral depth at 5 locations systematically-spaced within plot (Sonar or sounding rod).
* Dominant and Subdominant substrate size class at 5 systematically-spaced locations (visual or
  sounding rod).
* Tally large woody debris in littoral plot and in bankfull channel by size and length class.
* Areal cover class of fish concealment and other features, including:
               filamentous algae
               aquatic macrophytes
               large woody debris
               brush and small woody debris
                                      overhanging  vegetation
                                      undercut banks
                                      boulders and rock ledges
                                      artificial structures
 f-r
 !K:
     . 20m long Littoral Plot extending 10m landward starting at bankfull margin:'
  1L- '  , * Estimate areal cover class and type (e.g., woody) of riparian vegetation in Canopy, Mid-Layer,
  &       and Ground Cover
  L      * Observe and record human activities and disturbances and their proximity to the channel.

  gFor largest visible Riparian Tree:
  %"                    • •      '          •  -       "               -
  §-     * Estimate diameter (Dbh), height, species, and distance from river edge.

-------
                                                              Unvegetated Cutbank
                                                        Right Bank
Figure6-2.   Littoral-Riparian Plots for characterizing riparian vegetation, human influences, fish
cover, littoral substrate, and littoral depths.
sample reaches 40 times the mean wetted
width at the vicinity of the launch point in
Mid-Atlantic region streams and 100 times the
mean wetted width in Oregon streams.

     Section 4 describes the procedure for
locating the X-site that defines the midpoint
of the sample reach. This sampling location
is already marked on a 1:24,000 map prior to
going into the field. It has precise coordinates
of latitude and longitude, and was selected
by the EMAP design group using a random-
ized systematic sampling design. Subsections
6.3 and 6.4 describe the protocol for delin-
eating a sample reach that is 40 or 100 times
its width. Those sections also describe the pro-
tocol for measuring out (with a laser range
finder) and locating the 11 littoral/riparian sta-
tions where many habitat measurements will
be made. The distance between each of these
stations is  II1 Oth the total length of the sample
reach.

     The thalweg profile measurements must
be spaced as evenly as practicable over the
entire sample reach length. In addition, they
must be sufficiently close together that they
do not "miss" deep areas and habitat units that
are in a size range of about 1/3 to 1/2 of the
average channel width distance. To  set the

-------
                                                                                    Reviewed by (initial)
PHab: THALWEG PROFILE FORM - RIVERS
SITE NAME: BEAVER RlV£/? DATE: g l5 1 98 VISIT DOjgh D2 D3
SITE ID: ORRV ^ % '.. - 9 ^ 9 TEAM ID (X): 01 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
TRANSSECT(X) gfA-B QB-C QC-D QP-E Q E-F D F-G DG-H DH-I Dl-J QJ-K
SUBSTRATE CODES CHANNEL HABITAT CODES OTHER
BH - Bedrock/Hardpan (smooth or rough) • (larger than a car) PO = Pool
BL = Boulder (250 to 4000 mm) • (basketball to car) GL= Glide Off Ch.
CB = Cobble (64 to 250) • (tennis ball to basketball) Rl - Riffle
GR = Coarse to Fine Gravel (2 to 64) • (ladybug to tennis ball) RA« Rapid Off Channel
SA = Sand (0.06 to 2 mm) • (gritty - up to ladybug size) CA = Cascade °r
FN = SiltfCIay/Muck • (not gritty) FA = Falls Backwater
OT = Other © (Comment Please) DR = Dry Channel
Circle One Substrate Code for Each Station ^'code^Ea^Statfon^ x if Yes
REMEMBER: A = Upstream End of Reach and K = Downtown End of Reach
STA
TION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
SNAG
(X)








X











DEPTH (ETHER)
SONAR
(tt)xx
a
10
°i
9
6
.r

-------
                                                                                   Reviewed by (initial)
                        PHab: CHANNEL/RIPARIAN TRANSECT FORM - RIVERS
 SITE NAME:
                                                        DATE: g   I 5  I 98  VISIT   DOJg|lD2D3
SITE ID:   ORRV _3_ _|5_ -_35_2
                                              TEAM ID (X):
                                                                  D2   D3  D4  D5  D6  D7   D8
TRANSSECT(X):  DA    DB    DC    Efo
                                                                    DH    PI    DJ    DK
               "LITTORAL" SUBSTRATE INFORMATION
                                                                         SLOPE / BEARING / DISTANCE
 SHORE
IOM SEC
 BL
GF
SA
FN
HP
WD
OT
     RS
    CB
    GC
    GF
    SA
    FN
    HP
    WD
    OT
         BOTTOM
          BL
         GC
         GF
        SA
         FN
         HP
        WD
        OT
GF
SA
FN
HP
WD
OT
                   CLASS
                         BOTTOM SUBSTRATE FROM (X ONE):
                            JUDGEMENT -OR-    OBS. @ 5 LITTORAL DEPTHS
                                                                INTENDED TRANSECT SPACING xxx (mH
                  RS - BEDROCK (SMOOTH) • (LARGER THAN A CAR)
                                                                   SLOPE
                                                                   xx.x %
                  RR - BEDROCK (ROUGH) • (LARGER THAN A CAR)
                   BL - BOULDER (250 TO 4000 MM) • (BASKETBALLTO CAR)
                  CB - COBBLE (64 TO 250 MM) • (TENNIS BALL TO BASKETBALL)
                  GC - COARSE GRAVEL (16 TO 64 MM) • (MARBLE TO TENNIS BALL]
                                                                               BEARING
                                                                                0 - 360°
                                                                                           H-OO
                                                                                           DISTANCE
                                                                                             xxx (m)
                                                                                         FLAG
                                                                                                       Fl
                   GF - FINE GRAVEL (2 TO 16 MM) • (LADYBUG TO MARBLE)
SA- SAND (0.06TO2MM) • (GRITTY-UP TO LADYBUG SIZE)
CANOPY DENSITY @ BANK
 - DENSIOMETER (OTO 17 MAX)
FN - SILT/CLAY/MUCK* (NOTGRITTV)
HP - HARDPAN • (FIRM, CONSOLIDATED FINE SUBSTRATE)
                                                       UP
WD-WOOD- (ANY SIZE)
                                                      LEFT
OT- OTHER © (COMMENT)
                                                                        FLAG
                                                                            DOWN
                                                                            RIGHT
     BANK CHARACTERISTICS
CIRCLE ONE
   V

   G
   F
        Near Vertical/Undercut (>75°)
        Steep (30-75°)
        Gradual (5-30°)
        Flat(<5°)
 WETTED WIDTH
 BANKFUU. WIDTH
 BANKFUU. HT.
 INCISED HT.
                XXX(m)
                   O
                 75-
                 0.7
                           FLAG
                            K
    BANK
   ANGLES
 Rat (<5'
                                     LARGE WOODY DEBRIS in Wet Channel (10 x 20m Plot)
                                    DIAMETER
                                   0.3 - 0.6 m
                                   0.6 - 0.8 m
                                   0.8-1.0m
                                    >1.0m
                                                WOOD ALL/PART IN WETTED CHANNEL
                                               LENGTH5-15m      15-30m
                                           DRY OUT ALL/PART IN BANKFULL CHANNEL
                                    0.3 - 0.6 m
                                    0.6 - 0.8 m
                                   0.8-1.0m
                                     >1.0m
                                                                                              DEPTH
                                                                                        SONAR (It) xx
                                                                                                   POLE (m) x.x)
                                                                                                    0,6
                                                                                                    0.6
                                                                                                    0-6
                                                                                          IN SITU WATER
                                                                                         MEASUREMENTS
                                                                                       WATER TEMPERATURE °C (xxxx)
                                                                                        CONDUCTIVITY nS/CM (xxxx]
                                                                                                (OS
                                                                                        FLAG
                                                                                                COMMENTS
                                                                                                  && TKEP
                                                                                        K=
 Flag Codes: K - no measurement made; U = suspect measurement; F1, F2, etc. = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags in comments section
 on this side or on Side 2 of this form.
Rev. 05/29/98 (_rvphc_.98)
                                                                   PHab: CHANNEL/RIPARIAN TRANSECT FORM - RIVERS -1
Figure 6-4.   Channel/Riparian transect form - page 1  (front side).

-------
interval between thalweg profile measure-
ments, measure the wetted channel width with
a laser range finder at several locations near
the upstream end of the reach and multiply it
by 40 (100) to  set the river sample reach
length. Then divide that reach length by 100
(or 200) to set the thalweg increment distance.
Following these guidelines, you will be mak-
ing 100 or 200 evenly-spaced thalweg pro-
file measurements, 10 or 20 between each
detailed channel cross section where  littoral/
riparian observations are made. The number
and spacing of measurements are as  follows
for the two different sample reach lengths:
               40 Ch-W
           number spacing
                  100 Ch-W
              number spacing
 Transects and  10   4 Ch-W    10   10 Ch-W
 Riparian Plots

 Thalweg     100  0.4 Ch-W  200   0.5 Ch-W
 Depth
 measurements
 Thalweg
 Substrate,
 Habitat Class
100   0.4 Ch-W  100   1.0 Ch-W
 6.3   Logistics, Work
 Flow,  and  Defining
 Sample Locations
     The two-person habitat assessment team
 uses the most nimble of the selection of wa-
 tercraft judged capable of navigating the river
 reach. In a single midstream float down the
 40 or 100 Channel-width reach, the team ac-
 complishes a reconnaissance, a sonar/pole
 depth profile, and a pole-drag to tally snags
 and characterize mid-channel substrate. The
 float is interrupted by stops at 11 transect lo-
 cations for littoral/riparian observations. They
 determine (and mark ~ optional) the position
 of each successive downstream transect us-
 ing a laser range finder to measure out and
mentally note each new location 4 (or 10)
channel-width's distance from the preceding
transect immediately upstream. The crew then
floats downstream along the thalweg to the
new transect location, making thalweg pro-
file measurements and observations at 10 (or
20) evenly-spaced increments along the way.
When they reach the new downstream transect
location, they stop to do cross-section, littoral,
and riparian measurements. Equipping the
boat with a bow or stern  anchor to stop at
transect locations can greatly ease the shore
marking operation and shoreline  measure-
ment activities. In addition, while they are
stopped at a cross-section station, the crew
can fill out the habitat "typing" entries retro-
spectively and prospectively for the portion
of the stream distance that is visible up- and
downstream. They can also record reconnais-
 sance and safety notes at this time. While
 stopped at the transect location, the crew
 makes the prescribed measurements and ob-
 servations, collects biological samples,
 backsites slope and bearing towards the pre-
 vious upstream transect, and sets or mentally
 notes eye-level flags or reference points on
 shore for subsequent backsites. The habitat
 crew also assists the electrofishing boat crew
 over jams and helps to conduct shuttles (this
 can take considerable time where put-ins and
 take-outs are distant).

 6.4  Reconnaissance

 and Reach Marking

      The purpose of the reconnaissance is to
 locate (and optionally mark) the reach sam-
 pling location and to inform the second boat
 of the route, craft, and  safety precautions
 needed during its subsequent electrofishing
 activities. After finding adequate put-in and
 take-out locations, the team may opt to mark
 the upstream end of the sample reach end with

-------
 colored flagging. Based on several channel
 width measurements using a laser range finder,
 they determine the sample reach length (40 x
 or 100 x Channel Width), the transect spac-
 ing (4 x or 10 x Channel Width) and thalweg
 sampling interval (0.5 x Channel Width). As
 the crew floats downstream, they stop (and
 optionally flag) 11 transect locations along the
 riverbank in the process of carrying out slope,
 bearing, and distance backsites. As the team
 floats downstream, they may choose andcom-
 municate to the electrofishing crew the most
 practical path to be used when fishing with a
 less maneuverable boat, taking into consider-
 ation multiple channels, blind channels, back-
 waters, alcoves, impassible riffles, rapids,
 jams, and hazards such as dams, bridges and
 power lines. They determine if and where
 tracking or portages are necessary.

 6.5  Thalweg  Profile
     "Thalweg" refers to the flow path of the
 deepest water in a river channel. The thalweg
 profile is a longitudinal survey of maximum
 depth and several other selected characteris-
 tics at 100 (or 200) near-equally spaced points
 along the centerline of the river between the two
 ends of the river reach (Figure 6-1). For practi-
 cal reasons, field crews will approximate a thal-
 weg profile by sounding along the river course
 that they judge is deepest, but also safely navi-
 gable. Data from the thalweg profile allows cal-
 culation of indices of residualpool volume, river
 size, channel complexity, and the relative pro-
portions of habitat types such as riffles and pools.
The procedure for obtaining  thalweg profile
measurements is presented in Table 6-2. Record
data on the Thalweg Profile Form as shown in
Figure 6-3.

 6.5.1   Thalweg Depth
 Mh   mmm            *^
Profile
    A thalweg depth profile of the entire 40
or 100 Channel-width reach shall be approxi-
 mated by a sonar or sounding rod profile of
 depth while floating downstream along the
 deepest part of the channel (or the navigable
 or mid-channel path). In the absence of a re-
 cording fathometer (sonar depth sounder with
 strip-chart output or electronic data recorder),
 the crew records depths at frequent, relatively
 evenly-spaced downstream intervals while
 observing a sonar display and holding a
 surveyor's rod off the side of the boat (see
 subsection 6.5.2, below). The sonar screen is
 mounted so  that the crew member can read
 depths on the sonar and the rod at the same
 time. The sonar sensor may  need to be
 mounted at the opposite end  of the boat to
 avoid mistaking the rod's echo  for the bot-
 tom, though using a narrow beam (16 degree)
 Sonar transducer minimizes this problem. It
 is surprisingly easy to hold the sounding rod
 vertical when you are going at the same speed
 as the water.  In our river trials, one measure-
 ment every half-channel-width (10 to 15 m)
 in current moving at about 0.5 m/s resulted in
 one measurement every 20 to 30  seconds. To
 facilitate accomplishing this work fast enough,
 the field form only requires "checks" for any
 observations other than depth measurements.
 To speed operations further, it may also be
 advantageous to mount a bracket on the boat
 to hold the clipboard.

 6.5.2  Pole Drag for

 Snags and Substrate

 Characteristics
    The procedure for obtaining pole drags
for snags and substrate characteristics is pre-
sented in Table 6-2. While floating down-
stream, one crew member holds a calibrated
PVC sounding tube or fiberglass surveying
rod down vertically from the gunwale of the
boat, dragging it lightly on the bottom to si-
multaneously "feel" the substrate, detect

-------
snags, and measure depth with the aid of so-
nar. The number of large snags hit by this rod
shall be recorded as an index of fish cover
complexity (modification of Bain's "snag
drag"). While dragging  the sounding rod
along the bottom, the crew member shall
record the dominant substrate type sensed by
dragging the rod along the bottom (bedrock/
hardpan, boulder, cobble, gravel, sand, silt &
finer) (Figure 6-3). In shallow, "wild," fast-
water situations, where pole-dragging might
be hazardous, prews will estimate bottom con-
ditions the best they can visually and by us-
ing paddles and oars. If unavoidable, suspend
measurements until out of Whitewater situa-
tions, but make notes and appropriately flag
observations concerning your best judgements
of depth and substrate.

6.5.3   Channel Habitat

Classification
     The crew will classify and record the
channel habitat types shown in Figure 6-3
(fall, cascade, rapid, riffle, glide, pool, dry)
and check presence of off-channel and back-
water habitat at a spatial resolution of about
0.4 channel-widths on a  40 Channel-width
reach. On a 100 Channel-width reach habitat
classifications are made every 1.0 channel-
widths and off-channel and backwater habi-
tat presence is checked every  0.5 channel-
width distance — the same interval as thalweg
'depths. The resulting database of traditional
visual habitat classifications will provide a
bridge of common understanding with other
studies. The procedures for classifying chan-
nel habitat are presented in Table .6-2. The
designation of side channels, backwaters and
other off-channel areas is independent of the
main-channel habitat type. Main channel
habitat units must meet a minimum size crite-
ria in addition to the qualitative criteria listed
in Table 6-3. Before being considered large
enough to be identified as a channel-unit scale
habitat feature, the unit should be at least as
long as the channel is wide. For instance, if
there is a small, deep (pool-like) area at the
thalweg within a large riffle area, don't record
it as a pool unless it occupies an area about as
wide or long as the channel is wide.

     Mid-Channel Bars, Islands, and Side
Channels pose some problems for the sam-
pler conducting a thalweg profile and neces-
sitate some guidance. Mid-channel bars are
defined here as channel features below the
bankfull flow level that are dry  during
baseflow conditions (see Section 6.6.4 for
definition of bankfull channel). Islands are
channel features that are dry even when the
river is at bankfull flow. If a mid-channel fea-
ture is as high as the surrounding flood plain,
it is considered an island. Both mid-channel
bars and islands cause the river to split into.
side channels. When a bar or island is encoun-
tered along the thalweg profile, choose to
navigate and survey the channel that carries
the most flow.

     When side channels are present, the com-
ments column of the Thalweg Profile form
should reflect their presence by checking the
"Off-Channel" column., These checkmarks
will begin at the point of divergence from the
main channel, continuing downstream to the
point of where the side channel converges with
the main channel. In the case of a slough or
alcove, the "off-channel" checkmarks should
continue from the point of divergence.

6.6  Channel  Margin
("Littoral")  And Riparian
Measurements
     Components of this section include slope
and bearing, channel margin depth and sub-

-------
Table 6-2.  Thalweg Profile Procedure.
1.  Determine the interval between measurement stations based on the wetted width used to determine
the       length of the sampling reach.
2.  Complete the header information on the Thalweg Profile Form, noting the transect pair (upstream to
    downstream).
3.  Begin at the upstream transect (station"!" of "20" or station"!" of "10").

Thalweg Depth Profile

    a)  While floating downstream along the thalweg, record depths at frequent, approximately even-
        spaced downstream intervals while observing a sonar display and holding a surveyor's rod off the
        side of the boat.

    b)  A depth recording approximately every 0.4 (or 0.5) channel-width distance is required, yielding
        10 (or 20) measurements between channel/riparian cross-section transects.

    c)  If the depth is less than approximately 0.5 meters, or contains a lot of air bubbles, the sonar
        fathometer will not give reliable depth estimates. In this case, record depths using a calibrated
        measuring rod. In shallow, "wild," fast-water situations depths may have to be visually estimated
        to the nearest 0.5 meter.
    d)  Measure depths to nearest 0.1 m and record in the "SONAR" or "POLE" column on the Thalweg
        Profile Form.
Pole Drag for Snags and Substrate Characteristics

    a)  From the gunwale of the boat, hold a fiberglass surveying rod or calibrated PVC sounding tube
        down vertically into the water.
    b)  Lightly drag the rod on the river bottom to "feel" the substrate and detect snags.
    c)  Observations are taken at half the frequency as depth measurements (i.e., at every other depth
        measurement point on 100 Channel-Width reaches).
    d)  Record the number of snags hit by the rod and the dominant substrate  type sensed by dragging
        the rod along the bottom.
    e)  On the Thalweg Profile Form, circle the appropriate "SUBSTRATE" type and tally the number of
        "SNAGS".

Channel Habitat Classification

    a)  Classify and record the channel habitat type at increments of every 1.0 channel width.
    b)  Check for off-channel and backwater habitat at increments of every 0.4 (or 0.5) channel width.
    c)  If channel is split by a bar or island, navigate and survey the channel with the most discharge.
    d)  When a side channel is encountered, check the "OFF-CHANNEL" column beginning with the
        point of divergence from the main channel, continuing downriver until the side channel
converges                       with the main channel.
    e)  On the Thalweg Profile Form, circle the appropriate "CHANNEL HABITAT" and check the off-
        channel column as described in (d) above.
4.  Proceed downriver to the next station ("2"), and repeat the above procedures.
5.  Repeat the above procedures until you reach the next transect. Prepare a new Thalweg Profile Form,
    then repeat the above procedures for each of the reach segments, until you reach the downriver end of
     the sampling reach (Transect "K").

-------
; Table 6-3.  Channel Unit Categories.
 Class (Code)
                                 Channel Unit Habitat Classes"

                                                        Description
 Pools (PO):


 ? Plunge Pool

   Trench Pool

   Lateral Scour Pool

 •  Backwater Pool

   Dam Pool

 Glide (GL)

piffle (RI)
tr

feapid (RA)
i

^Cascade (CA)



!Fails(FA)

«-._-.
f Dry Channel (DR)

Ipff-Channel Areas
f--	
                      Still water, low velocity; smooth, glassy surface, usually deep compared to other
                      parts of the channel:

                        Pool at base of plunging cascade or falls.

                        Pool-like trench in the center of the stream

                        Pool scoured along a bank.

                        Pool separated from main flow off the side of the channel.

                        Pool formed by impoundment above dam or constriction.

                        Water moving slowly, with a smooth, unbroken surface. Low turbulence.

                        Water moving, with small ripples, waves and eddies -- waves not breaking,
                        surface tension not broken. Sound:  "babbling", "gurgling".

                        Water movement rapid and turbulent, surface with intermittent Whitewater and
                        breaking waves. Sound: continuous rushing, but not as loud as cascade.

                        Water movement rapid and very turbulent over steep channel bottom. Most of
                        the water surface is broken in short, irregular plunges, mostly Whitewater.
                        Sound: roaring.

                        Free falling water over a vertical or near vertical drop into plunge, water
                        turbulent and white over high falls. Sound: from splash to roar.

                        No water in the channel

                        Side-channels, sloughs, backwaters, and alcoves that are separated from the
                        main channel.
? Note that in order for a channel habitat unit to be distinguished, it must be at least as wide or long as the
t:ehannel is wide.
 strata, large woody debris, bank angle and    @ Q 1   SIODG
 channel cross-section morphology, canopy      "
 cover, riparian vegetation structure, fish cover,    BSSFIFIQ
 and human influences. All measurements are        The slop£j or gradient5 of the stream
 recorded on the two-sided Channel/Riparian   reach is useful in three different ways. First,
 Transect Form (Figures 6-4 and 6-5).          the overall stream gradient is one of the ma_

-------
                                                                                       Reviewed by (initial)
PHab: CHANNEL/RIPARIAN TRANSECT FORM - RIVERS (continued)
SITE NAME: BEAVER RlV£/? DATE: # I 5 / 98 VISIT DO $10203
SITE ID:
ORRV °l 8 -_3^_9_ TEAMID(X): 01 Q2 Q3 D4 O5 D6 Q7
D8
TRANSSECT(x>: QA DB DC HD DE DF DG DH DI DJ DK
VISUAL RIPARIAN
ESTIMATES
RIPARIAN
VEGETATION COVER
(10mx20mPlot)

LEFT
BANK
RIGHT
BANK
FLAG
0. ABSENT ( 0%) D = DECIDUOUS
1- SPARSE (  C.CONFEROUS .
2 -MODERATE (10-40%) E . BROADLEAF EVERGREEN
3 - HEAVY (40 - 75%) M - MIXED
4 -VERY HEAVY 1 >75%) N-NONE
CANOPY (>5m HIGH)
VEGETATION TYPE
BIG TREES (TRUNK > 0.3 m DBH)
SMALLTREES (TRUNK > 0 Z m DBH)

D C E M C£fl
0 1234
©1234
D C E MOO
( ON BANK
2) P C B
(3) P C B
(o) P C B
0 Q5 C B
Q) P C B
(2? PCS
(a) PCS
@ P C B
(jj) P C B
(^ P C p
(p) P ' C B
_. . — '""i'mViVmr^^s--;;^
yy PCS
©PCS
£5) P C B
0. (PJ C B
©PCS
O P C B
(o) P C B
O P C B
(a) P OB
(5J P C B
© P C B
COMMENTS (A



FLAG



F7






ddition
FISH
COVER/
OTHER
(10 mX 20m Plot)
FILAMENTOUS ALGAE
MACROPHYTES
WOODY DEBRIS (> 0.3 m - BIG)
BRUSH/WOODY DEBRIS (-= 0.3 m - SMALL)
.OVERHANGING VEG. (s 1 m OF SURFACE)
UNDERCUT BANKS
BOULDERS/LEDGES
ARTIFICIAL STRUCTURES
COVER IN-CHAN
0 = ABSENT (
1 = SPARSE <
2. MODERATE 10
3 = HEAVY 40
4 = VERY HEAVY
CIRCLE ONE
@ 1234
0 Q 2 3 4
(5) 1 2 3 4
Q^ 1234
(0\ 1234
00234
00234
(J5 1234
CHANNEL CONSTRAINT
DISTANCE FROM SHORE TO RIPARIAN VEGETATION (XX] xxx*- £
CIRCLE ONE
NEL
0%)
10%)
- 40%)
-75%)
>75%)
FLAG








D

(Q CHANNEL IS CONSTRAINED.
U CHANNEL IS UNCONSTRAINED IN BROAD VALLEY.
B CHANNEL IS IN BROAD VALLEY BUT CONSTRAINED BY INCISION.
N CHANNELISIN NARROW VALLEY BUT NOT VERY CONSTRAINED.
CIRCLE ONE
^E^ 1 COULD READILY SEE OVER THE BANK.
NO 1 COULD NOT READILY SEE OVER THE BANK.
al space available on Side 1)
RAfLRoAp GRADE

.................. ..............J






Flag Codes: K - no measurement made; U - suspect measurement; F1, F2, etc. = misc. flags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags in comments section
on mis side or on Side 1 of this form.
Rev. 05/29«8 <_rvphc_.98)
                                                                      PHab: CHANNEL/RIPARIAN TRANSECT FORM - RIVERS - 2
Figure 6-5.    Channel/Riparian transect form-page 2 (backside).

                             •fit


-------
jor stream classification variables, giving an
indication of potential water velocities and
stream power; both of which are in turn im-
portant controls on aquatic habitat and sedi-
ment transport within the reach. Second, the
spatial variability of stream gradient is a mea-
sure of habitat complexity, as reflected in the
diversity of water velocities and sediment sizes
within the stream reach. Lastly, using meth-
ods described by Stack (1989), Robison and
Kaufmann (1994),  and Kaufmann et  al.,
(1999), the water surface slope will allow us
to compute residual pool depths and volumes
from the multiple depth and width measure-
ments taken in the thalweg profile (Subsec-
tion 6.5). Compass Bearings between cross
section stations, along with the distance be-
tween stations, will allow us to estimate the
sinuosity of the channel (ratio of the length of
the reach divided by the straight line distance
between the two reach ends).

     Measure  slope  and bearing  by
"backsiting" upstream from cross-section sta-
tion B to A, C to B, D to C, etc., down to the
llth cross section (Figure 6-1). To measure
the slope and bearing between adjacent sta-
tions, use an Abney Level (or clinometer), and
a bearing compass following the procedure
presented in Table 6-4. Record data for slope
and bearing in the Slope/Bearing/Distance
section of the Channel/Riparian Transect
Form (Figure 6-4).

     It may be necessary to set up intermedi-
ate slope and bearing stations between  the
normal 11 stations if you do not have direct
line-of-site along (and within)  the channel
between stations. This can happen if brush is
too heavy or if there are tight meander bends
or sharp slope breaks. To backsite upstream
from supplemental stations, treat them just as
you do a normal transect location in steps 1
to 6 of Table 6-4. Record supplemental slope,
bearing, and distance backsites sequentially
in the spaces provided on the field form.

6.6,2   Channel Margin
Depth and Substrate
     Substrate size is one of the most impor-
tant determinants of habitat character for fish
and macroinvertebrates in streams. Along with
bedform (e.g., riffles and pools), substrate in-
fluences the hydraulic roughness and conse-
quently the range of water velocities in the
channel. It also influences the size range of
interstices that provide living space and cover
for macroinvertebrates, salamanders, and
sculpins (as well as other benthic fishes). Sub-
strate characteristics are often sensitive indi-
cators of the effects of human activities on
streams. Decreases in the mean substrate size
and increases in the percentage of fine sedi-
ments, for example, may destabilize channels
and indicate changes in the rates of upland
erosion and sediment supply.

     Channel margin depths are measured
along the designated shoreline at each transect
within the 10m swath of the 20m channel mar-
gin length that is centered on the transect lo-
cation. Dominant and sub-dominant bottom
substrates are determined and recorded at 5
systematically-spaced locations that are lo-
cated by eye within the 1 Om x 20m plot. These
methods are an adaptation of those used by
the U.S.EPA for evaluating littoral substrates
in lakes  (Kaufmann and Whittier 1997),
where the substrate size may be visually as-
sessed or estimated by "feel" using the sur-
veyors rod or PVC sounding  tube in deep,
turbid water. The procedure for obtaining
channel margin depth and substrate measure-
ments is described in more detail in Table 6-
5. Record these measurements on the Chan-
nel/Riparian Transect Form  as shown in
Figure 6-4.

-------
Table 6-4.  Procedure for Obtaining Slope and Bearing Data.
 1.  Set eye-level flagging atupstream transect: Place flagging or mentally note a landmark at a standardized
    eye level along the shoreline at Transect A while doing shoreline measurements. To accomplish this, sit
    in the boat with your clinometer or Abney level held against your measuring rod at a comfortable,
    standardized height above the water surface (or designated place on bottom of boat). This shall be the
    same height you plan to use for all slope backsites from downstream. Site towards the nearby bank with
    the clinometer or Abney level indicating 0% slope. Note the level on the object sited and place flagging
    on it (optional). Accuracy of the clinometer measurements can be checked  occasionally against a
    surveyors level.
 2.  Using the laser rangefinder. determine  and record the intended location and distance  of the next
    downstream Transect.
 3.  Float downstream (doing your thalweg profile measurements at 10 or 20 increments) to Transect B,
    where the next channel/riparian station is located.
 4.  Measure (w/ laser rangefrndert and record the distance back to the flagged upstream transect.  (Note
    that, because of hazards and maneuvering problems, this distance may unavoidably differ from the
    "intended transect spacing" that is set at 4 (or 10) times the wetted width in the near vicinity  of the
    furthest upstream transect (A).
 5.  Backsite the river gradient: While at the bank at Transect B, hold your Abney or clinometer at the same
    level on your measuring rod that you used at the previous station when you set up the eye-level
    flagging. Site back upstream at your flagging at Station A; read and record percent Slope on the field
    form. Be careful, the clinometer reads both percent slope and degrees of the slope angle. Percent slope
    is the scale on the right hand side as you look through most clinometers. If using an Abney Level,
    insure that you are reading the scale marked " PERCENT."
 6.  Backsite the compass bearing: From the bank at Station B, site back with your compass to the flagging
    you placed at Station A and record your compass bearing ("Azimuth"). It does not matter for these
    measurements whether or not you adjust your compass bearings for magnetic declination, but it is
    important that you are consistent in the use of magnetic (unadjusted) or true (adjusted) bearings
    throughout all the measurements you make on a given reach. Write on the field form which type of
    bearings you take. Also guard against recording "reciprocal" bearings (erroneous bearings 180 degrees
    from what they should be). The best way to do this is to know where the primary (cardinal) directions
    are in the field - north (0 degrees), east (90 degrees), south (180 degrees), and west (270 degrees) -- and
    insure that your bearings "make sense."
 7.  Repeat step 1, setting your eye-level flagging at Transect B before floating down to a new downstream
    transect. Then repeat steps 2 through 7.
     Again adapting methods developed for
lake shorelines by Kaufmann and Whittier
(1997), identify the dominant and subdomi-
nant substrate present along a shoreline swath
20 meters long and 1  meter back from the
waterline. The substrate size class choices are
as shown in Table 6-5.

6.6.3    Large  Woody
Debris
     Methods for tallying large woody debris
(LWD) are adapted from those described by
Kaufmann and Robison (1998). This com-
ponent of the EMAP Physical Habitat proto-
col allows estimates of the number, size, and
total volume of large woody debris within the
river reach. LWD is defined here as woody
material with small end diameter of at least
30 cm (1ft) and length of at least 5 m (15 ft).
These size criteria are larger than those used
by Kaufmann and Robison (1998) in wade-
able streams because of the lesser role that
small wood plays in controlling velocity and
morphology of larger rivers.

     The procedure for tallying LWD is pre-
sented in Table 6-6. The tally includes all
pieces of LWD that are at least partially in the
baseflow channel (Wetted Channel).  Sepa-


-------
Table 6-5.  Channel Margin Depth and Substrate Procedure.
    If not already done, fill in the header information on page 1 of a Channel/Riparian Transect Form. Be
    sure to indicate the letter designating the transect location.

    Measure depth and observe bottom substrates within a 10m swath along the 20m of the channel
    margin that is centered on each transect location.

    Determine  and record  the depth and the dominant and subdominant substrate size class at 5
    systematically-spaced locations estimated by eye within this 10m x 20m plot and 1m back from the
    waterline. If the substrate particle is " artificial" (e.g. concrete or asphalt), choose the appropriate
    size class, flag the observation and note that it is artificial in the comment space.
    Code      Size Class

    RS    Bedrock (Smooth)
    RR   Bedrock (Rough)
    HP    Hardpan
    BL   Boulders
    CB   Cobbles
    GC   Gravel (Coarse)
    GF   Gravel (Fine)
    SA   Sand

    FN   Fines
    WD  Wood
    OT   Other
                         Size Range (mm)

                         >4000
                         >4000

                         :>250 to 4000
                         >64 to 250
                         >16 to 64
                         > 2 to 16
                         >0.06 to 2

                          <0.06
                          Regardless of Size
                          Regardless of Size
           Description

Smooth surface rock bigger than a car
Rough surface rock bigger than a car
Firm, consolidated fine substrate
Basketball to car size
Tennis ball to basketball size
Marble to tennis ball size
Ladybug to marble size
Smaller than ladybug size, but visible as
particles - gritty between fingers
Silt Clay Muck (not gritty between fingers)
Wood & other organic particles
Concrete, metal, tires, car bodies etc.
(describe in comments)
 4.
On page 1 of the Channel/Riparian Transect Form, circle the appropriate shore and bottom substrate
type and record the depth measurements ("SONAR" or "POLE" columns).
 5.   Repeat Steps 1 through 4 at each new cross section transect.
rately tally wood that is presently dry but con-
tained within the "BankfuH" or active chan-
nel (flood channel up to bankroll stage). In-
clude wood  that  spans above the  active
channel or spanning above the active chan-
nel with the "Dry but within Bankfull" cat-
egory. For each tally (Wetted Channel and
Dry but within Bankfull), the field form (Fig-
ure 6-4) provides 12 entry boxes for tallying
debris pieces visually estimated within three
length and four diameter class combinations.
Each LWD piece is tallied in only one box.
Woody debris is not tallied in the area be-
tween channel cross, sections, but the pres-
ence of large debris dams and accumulations
should be mapped and noted in the comments.
                                              For each LWD piece, first visually esti-
                                         mate its length and its large and small end di-
                                         ameters in order to place it in one of the di-
                                         ameter and length categories. The diameter
                                         classes on the field form (Figure 6-4) refer to
                                         the large end diameter. The diameter classes
                                         are 0.3m to <0.6m, 0.6m to <0.8m, and 0.8m
                                         to <1 .Om and >1 .Om. The length classes are
                                         5m to < 15m, 15m to <30m, and >30m. Some-
                                         times LWD is not cylindrical, so it has no clear
                                         "diameter". In these cases visually estimate
                                         what the diameter would be for a piece of
                                         wood with circular cross section that would
                                         have the same volume.  When evaluating
                                         length, include only the part of the LWD piece
                                         that has a diameter greater than 0.3m (1 ft).

-------
 Table 6-6. Procedure for Tallying Large Woody Debris.
 Note:     Tally pieces of large woody debris (LWD) within the 11 transects of the river reach at the same
           time the shoreline measurements are being determined. Include all pieces whose large end is
           located within the transect plot in the tally.

 1.  LWD in the active channel is tallied in 11 "plots" systematically spaced over the entire length of the
     stream reach. These plots are each 20 m long in the upstream-downstream direction.  They are
     positioned along the chosen bank and extend from the shore in 10m towards mid-channel and then all
     the way to the bankfull margin.
 2.  Tally all LWD pieces within the plot that are at least partially within the baseflow channel.  Also tally
     LWD that is dry but contained within the active channel. First, determine if a piece is large  enough to
     be classified as LWD (small end diameter 30 cm [1 ft.]; length 5 m [15 ft.])
 3.  For each piece of LWD, determine its diameter class based on the diameter of the large end (0.3 m to <
     0.6 m, 0.6 m to <0.8 m, 0.8 m to <1.0 m, or >1.0 m), and the length class of the LWD pieces based on the
     part of its length that has diameter 30 cm. Length classes are 5m to < 15m, 15m to <30m, or >30m.
         • If the piece is not cylindrical, visually estimate what the diameter would be for a piece of wood
          with circular cross section that would have the same volume.
         • When estimating length, include only the part of the LWD piece that has a diameter greater than
          0.3m (1ft.)
 4.  Place a tally mark hi the appropriate diameter °° length class tally box in the  "WOOD All/Part in
     WETTED .Channel1' section of the Channel/Riparian Transect Form.
 5.  Tally all shoreline LWD pieces along the littoral plot that are at  least partially within or above
     (bridging) the bankfull channel, but not in the wetted channel. For each piece, determine the diameter
     class based on the diameter of the large end (0.3 m to < 0.6 m, 0.6 m to <0.8 m, 0.8 m to <1.0 m, or >1.0
     m), and the length class based on the length of the piece that has diameter 30 cm. Length classes are 5m
     to <15m, 15m to <30m, or >30m.
 6.  Place a tally mark for each piece in the appropriate diameter =» length class tally box in the "DRY BUT
     ALL/PART IN Bankfull Channel" section of the Channel/Riparian Transect Form.
 7.  After all pieces within the segment have been tallied, write the total number of pieces for each diameter
     oo length class in the small box at the lower right-hand corner of each tally box.
 8.  Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the next river transect, using a new Channel/Riparian Transect Form.
Count each of the LWD pieces $s one tally en-
try and include the whole piece when assessing
dimensions, even if part of it is outside of the
bankfull channel. If you encounter massive,
complex debris jams, estimate their length,
width, and height Also estimate the diameter
and length of large "key" pieces and judge the
average diameter and length of the other pieces
making up the jam. Record this information in
the comments section of the form.

6.6.4   Bank Angle and
Channel Cross-Section
Morphology
     Undercut, vertical, steep, and gradual bank
angles are visually estimated as defined on the
field form (Figure 6-4). Observations are made
from  the wetted channel margin up 5 m (a
canoe's length) into the bankfull channel mar-
gin on the previously chosen side of the stream.

     The channel dimensions to be measured
or estimated are the wetted width, mid-chan-
nel bar width, bankfull height and width, the
amount of incision, and the degree of chan-
nel constraint. These shall be assessed for the
whole channel (left and right banks) at each
of the 11 cross section transects. Each are re-
corded on the Channel/Riparian  Transect
Form (Figure 6-4). The procedure for obtain-
ing bank angle and  channel  cross-section
morphology measurements is presented in
Table 6-7.

-------
Table 6-7.  Procedure for Bank Angle and Channel Cross-Section.
    Visually estimate the bank angle (undercut, vertical, steep, gradual), as defined on the field form.
    Bank angle observations refer to the area from the wetted channel margin up 5 m (a canoe's length)
    into the bankfull channel margin on the previously chosen side of the river. Circle the range within
   .which the observed band  angle falls on the "Bank CHARACTERISTIC" section of the Channel/
    Riparian Transect Field Form.                                                      .
    With a laser rangefinder at a cross-section transect, measure and record the wetted width value in the
    "Wetted Width" field in the bank characteristics section of the field data form. Also determine the
    bankfull channel width and the width of exposed mid-channel bars (if present) with the laser
    rangefinder and surveyor's rod. Record these values in the "Bank CHARACTERISTIC" section of the
    field data form.
    To estimate bankfull height, hold the surveyor's rod vertical, with its base planted at the water s edge.
   -Using the rod as a guide while examining both banks, estimate (by eye) the height of bankfull flow
    above the present water level. Look for evidence on one or both banks such as:
    •  An obvious slope break that differentiates the channel from a relatively flat floodplain terrace
    higher                     than the channel.
    •  A transition from exposed river sediments to terrestrial vegetation.
    •  A transition from sorted river sediments to unsorted terrestrial soils.
    •  Transition from bare rock to moss growth on rocks along the banks.
    •  Presence of drift material caught on overhanging vegetation.
    •  Transition from flood- and scour-tolerant vegetation to that which is relatively intolerant of these
       conditions.
    Hold the surveyor's rod vertical, with its base planted at the water's edge. Using the surveyor s rod as
    a guide while examining both banks, estimate (by eye) the channel incision as the height up from the
    water surface to the elevation of the first terrace of the valley floodplain (Note this is at or above the
    bankfull channel height). Record this value in the "Incised Height" field of the Bank Characteristic
    section on the field data form.
    Repeat Steps 1 through 4 at each cross-section transect. Record data for each transect on a separate
    field data form.
     Wetted width refers to the width of the
channel as defined by the presence of free-
standing water; if greater than 15m, it can be
measured with the laser range finder. Mid-
channel bar width, the width of exposed mid-
channel gravel or sand bars in the channel, is
included within the wetted width, but is also
recorded separately. In channel cross-section
measurements, the wetted and active channel
boundaries are considered to include mid-
channel bars. Therefore,  the  wetted width
shall be measured as the distance between
wetted left and right banks. It is  measured
across and over mid-channel bars and boul-
ders. If islands are present, treat them like bars,
but flag these measurements and indicate in
the comments that the "bar" is an island. If
you are unable to see across the full width of
the river when an island separates a side chan-
nel from the main channel, record the width
of the main channel, flag the observation, and
note in the comments section that the width
pertains only to the main channel.

      Bankfull height and width shall be esti-
mated with the aid of the surveyor's rod and
laser range finder. The "bankfull" or "active"
channel is defined as the channel that is filled
by moderate sized flood events that fill the
channel to its flood banks. Measure bankfull
width  over and across mid-channel bars.
Bankfull flows typically recur every 1 to 2
years and do not generally overtop the chan-
nel banks to inundate the valley floodplain.
They are believed to be largely responsible
for the observed channel dimensions in most

-------
 rivers and streams. If the channel is not greatly
 incised, bankfull channel height and the
 amount of incision will be the same. How-
 ever, if the channel is incised greatly, the
 bankfull level will be below the level of the
 first terrace of the valley floodplain, making
 "Bankfull Height" smaller than "Incision"
 (Figure 6-6). You will need to look for evi-
 dence of recent flows (within about 1  year)
 to distinguish bankfull and incision heights,
 though recent flooding of extraordinary mag-
 nitude may be misleading.
       Estimating the level of bankfull flow dur-
  ing baseflow conditions requires judgement
  and practice; even then it remains somewhat
  subjective. In many cases there is an obvious
  slope break that differentiates the channel from
  a relatively flat floodplain terrace higher than
  the channel.  Because scouring and inunda-
  tion from bankfull flows are often frequent
  enough to inhibit many types of terrestrial
  vegetation, the bankfull channel may be evi-
  dent by a transition from exposed river sedi-
  ments and water-loving plants to upland ter-
      A. Channal not "Incised"
                                            Downcutting over Geologic Time
                                                  Stream - No recent incision.,,
                                                  Bankfull Level at Valley
                                                  Bottom
                                                               , First Terrace on
                                                               Valley Bottom
                                                           Second Terrace
                    Valley Fill
     B. Channal "Incised"
Downcutting over Geologic Time
                                               Recent incision: Bankfull
                                               Level below first terrace of
                                               Valley Bottom
                                                               First Terrace on
                                                               Valley Bottom
                                                              Second Terrace
                   Valley Fill
Figure 6-6.   Schematic showing bankfull channel and incision for channels. (A) not recently incised
and (B) recently incised into valley bottom. Note level of bankfull stage relative to elevation of first
terrace on valley bottom (Stick figure included for scale).

-------
restrial vegetation. Similarly, it may be iden-
tified by noting where moss growth on rocks
along the banks has been removed by flood-
ing. The bankfull flow level may also be seen
by the presence of drift material caught on
overhanging vegetation.

     As described in Table 6-7 and shown in
Figure 6-6, examine both banks and estimate
(by eye) the amount of channel incision from
the water surface to the elevation of the first
terrace of the valley floodplain. In cases where
the channel is^utting a valley sideslope and
has oversteepened and destabilized that slope,
the bare "cutbank" is not necessarily an indi-
cation of recent incision. Examine both banks
to make a more accurate determination of
channel downcutting. Finally, assess the de-
gree of river channel constraint by answering
the four questions on the form (Figure 6-5)
regarding the relationships among channel
incision, valley sideslope, and width of the
valley floodplain.

 6.6.5   Canopy Cower
 (Densiometer)
     Riparian  canopy cover over a river is
important not only for its role in moderating
water temperatures through shading, but also
as riparian wildlife habitat, and as an indica-
tor of conditions that control bank stability and
the potential for inputs of coarse and fine par-
ticulate organic material. Organic inputs from
riparian vegetation become food for river or-
ganisms and structure to create and maintain
complex channel habitat.

     Vegetative cover over the river margin
 shall be measured at the chosen bank at each
 of the 11 transect locations (A-K). This mea-
 surement employs the Convex Spherical
 Densiometer, model B (Lemmon, 1957). The
 densiometer must be taped exactly as shown
in Figure 6-7 to limit the number of square
grid intersections to 17. Densiometer readings
can range from 0 (no canopy cover) to 17
(maximum canopy cover). Four measurements
are obtained at each cross-section transect
(upriver, downriver, left, and right). Concen-
trate on the 17 points of grid intersection on
the densiometer. If the reflection of a tree or
high branch or leaf overlies any of the inter-
section points, that particular intersection is
counted as having cover. The measure to be
recorded on the form is the count (from 0 to
17) of all the intersections that have vegeta-
tion covering them. Therefore, a higher num-
ber indicates greater canopy extent and den-
sity. In making this measurement,  it is
important that the densiometer be leveled us-
ing the bubble level (Figure 6-7).

     The procedure for obtaining canopy
cover data  is presented in Table 6-8. These
bank densiometer readings complement your
visual estimates of vegetation structure and
cover within the riparian zone (Section 6.6.6).
For each of the four directions, count the num-
ber of covered densiometer intersection points.
Record these counts in the "Canopy Density
@  Bank" section of the Channel/Riparian
Transect Form as shown in Figure 6-4.

 6.6.6   Riparian
  Vegetation  Structure
     The previous section (6.6.5) described
 methods for quantifying the cover of canopy
 over the river margin. .The following visual
 estimation procedures, adapted  from
 Kaufmann and Robison (1998), are a semi-
 quantitative evaluation of riparian vegetation
 structure, the type and amount of different
 types of riparian vegetation. These field char-
 acterizations shall be used to supplement in-
 terpretations of riparian vegetation from aerial
 photos and satellite imagery. Together, they

-------
             Tape
                                               Bubble Leveled-
Flgure6-7.   Schematic of modified convex spherical canopy densiometer (From Mulvey et al.,
1992). In this example, 10 of the 17 intersections show canopy cover, giving a densiometer reading
of 10. Note proper positioning with the bubble leveled and face reflected at the apex of the "V".
 Table 6-8.  Procedure for Canopy Cover
           Measurements.

 1.  Take densiometer readings at a cross-section
     transect while anchored or tied up at the river
     margin.
 2.  Hold the densiometer 0.3 m (1  ft) above the
     surface of the river. Holding the densiometer
     level using the bubble level, move it in front of
     you so your face is just below the apex of the
     taped 'V.
 3.  At the channel margin measurement locations,
     count the number of grid intersection points
     within the "V" that are covered by either a tree,
     a leaf, a high branch, or the bank itself.
 4.  Take 1 reading each facing upstream (UP),
     downstream (DOWN), left bank (LEFT), and
     right bank (RIGHT). Right and left banks are
     defined with reference to an observer facing
     downstream.
 5.  Record the UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT
     values  (0 to 17) in the "CANOPY COVER @
     BANK"  section of  the  Channel/Riparian
     Transect Form.
 6.  Repeat Steps 1 through 5 at each cross-section
     transect.  Record data for each transect on a
     separate field data form.
are used to evaluate the health and level of
disturbance of the river/riparian corridor. They
also indicate the present and future potential
for various types of organic inputs and shad-
ing. The cover and structure of riparian veg-
etation is estimated in three riparian layers
within 1 Om x 20m plots along the river shore-
line that are centered on the transect location
with boundaries estimated by eye. As em-
ployed by Allen-Gill (unpublished manu-
script), these plots shall be set back from the
channel so that they describe vegetation above
bankfull flow. As a result, gravel bars within
the bankfull channel are not included in the
vegetation plot (Figure 6-2).

     Observations to assess riparian vegeta-
tion apply to the riparian area upstream 10
meters and downstream 10 meters from each
of the 11 cross-section stations (Figure 6-2).
They include the visible area from the river

-------
bankfull margin back a distance of 10m (30
ft) shoreward from both the left and right
banks, creating a 10m X 20m riparian plot on
each side of the river (Figure 6-2). The ripar-
ian plot dimensions are estimated, not mea-
sured. On steeply sloping channel margins,
the 10m X 20m plot boundaries are defined
as if they were projected down from an aerial
view. If the wetted channel is split by  a mid-
channel bar, the bank and riparian measure-
ments shall be for each side of the channel,
not the bar. If an island obscures the far bank
of the main channel, assess riparian vegeta-
tion on the bank of the island.

     Table 6-9 presents the procedure for
characterizing riparian vegetation structure
and composition. Figure 6-5 illustrates how
measurement data are recorded in the "Visual
Riparian Estimates" section of the field form.
Conceptually divide the riparian vegetation
into three layers: a CANOPY LAYER (>5m
high), an UNDERSTORY (0.5 to 5m high),
and a GROUND COVER layer (<0.5 high).
Note that several vegetation types (eg. grasses
or woody shrubs) can potentially occur in
more than one layer. Similarly note that some
things other than vegetation are possible en-
tries for the "Ground Cover" layer (eg. bar-
ren ground and duff, which includes fallen
leaves, needles and twigs),

     Before estimating the areal coverage of
the vegetation layers, record the type of veg-
etation (Deciduous, Coniferous, Broadleaf
Evergreen Mixed, or None) in each of the
two taller layers (Canopy and Understory).
Consider the layer "Mixed" if more than 10%
of the areal coverage is made up of the alter-
nate vegetation type.

     You will estimate the areal cover sepa-
rately in each of the three vegetation layers.
Note that the areal cover can be thought of as
the amount of shadow cast by a particular layer
alone when the sun is directly overhead. The
maximum cover in each layer is 100%, so the
sum of the areal covers for the combined three
layers could add up to 300%. The four entry
choices for areal cover within each of the three
vegetation layers are "0" (absent: zero cover),
"1" (sparse: <10%), "2" (moderate: 10-40%),
"3" (heavy: 40-75%), and "4" (very heavy:
>75%). These ranges of percentage areal
cover corresponding to each of these codes
are also shown on the Field Form. When rat-
ing vegetation cover types, mixtures of two
or more  subdominant classes might all be
given sparse ("1") moderate ("2") or heavy
("3 ") ratings. One very heavy cover class with
no clear subdominant class might be rated' '4''
with all the remaining classes either moder-
ate ("2"), sparse ("1") or absent ("0"). Two
heavy classes with 40-75% cover can both
be rated "3".

     As an additional assessment of the "old
growth" character of riparian zones, search
for the largest riparian tree visible on either
side of the river from the littoral-riparian sta-
tion. Identify if possible the species or the
taxonomic group of this tree and estimate its
height, diameter (Dbh), and distance from the
wetted river margin.

6.6.7  Fish Cover,
Algae,  Aquatic
Macrophytes
     This portion of the EMAP physical habi-
tat protocol  is a visual estimation procedure
modified from methods developed for  lake
shorelines (Kaufmann and Whittier 1997) and
for wadeable streams (Kaufmann and Robison
 1998). The aim is to evaluate, semi-quantita-
tively, the type and amount of important types
of cover for fish and macroinvertebrates. Over

-------
  Table 6-9.  Procedure For Characterizing Riparian Vegetation Structure.

  1.  Anchor or tie up at the river margin at a cross-section transect; then make the following observations
      to characterize riparian vegetation structure.

  2.  Estimate the distance from the shore to the riparian vegetation plot; record it just below the title
      "Channel Constraint" on the field form.

  3.  Facing the left bank (left as you face downstream), estimate a distance of 10 m back into the riparian
      vegetation, beginning at the bankfull channel margin. Estimate the cover and structure of riparian
      vegetation in 3 riparian layers along the river shoreline within an estimated 10m x 20m plot centered
      on the transect, and beginning at the bankfull river margin along the river shoreline.
|,
I:
      • On steeply-sloping channel margins, estimate the distance into the riparian zone as if it were pro-
        jected down from an aerial view.

4.  Within this 10 m <» 20 m area, conceptually divide the riparian vegetation into three layers: a CANOPY
    LAYER (>5m high), an UNDERSTORY (0.5 to 5 m high), and a GROUND COVER layer (<0.5 m high).

5.  Within this  10 m °° 20 m area, determine the dominant vegetation type for the CANOPY LAYER
    (vegetation  > 5 m high) as either Deciduous, Coniferous, broadleaf Evergreen, Mixed, or None.
    Consider the layer "Mixed" if more than 10%  of the areal  coverage is made up of the alternate
    vegetation type. Indicate the appropriate vegetation type in the "Visual Riparian Estimates" section of
    the Channel/Riparian Cross-section and Thalweg Profile Form.

6.  Determine separately the areal cover class of large trees (> 0.3 m [1 ft] diameter at breast height [DBH])
    and small trees (< 0.3 m DBH) within the canopy layer. Estimate areal cover as the amount of shadow
    that would be cast by a particular layer alone if the sun were directly overhead. Record the appropriate
    cover class on the field data form ("0"=absent: zero cover, "1 "=sparse: <10%,  "2"=moderate: 10-40%,
    "3"-heavy:  40-75%, or "4"=very heavy: >75%).

7.  Look at the UNDERSTORY layer (vegetation between 0.5 and 5  m high). Determine the dominant
    vegetation type for the undersfory layer as described in Step 5 for the canopy layer.

8.  Determine the area! cover clasjs for woody shrubs and saplings separately from non-woody vegetation
    within the understory, as described in Step 6 for the canopy layer.

9.  Look at the GROUND COVER layer (vegetation < 0.5 m high). Determine  the  areal cover class for
    woody shrubs and seedlings, non-woody vegetation, and the amount of bare ground present as
    described in Step 6 for large canopy trees.
                              1  '    ;..•;;         ,     	,                          :'!
10. Repeat Steps 1 through 9 for the opposite bank.

11. Repeat Steps 1 through 10 for all cross-section transects, using a separate field data form for each
    transect.
 a defined length and distance from shore at 11
 systematically spaced plot locations, crews shall
 estimate by eye and by sounding the propor-
 tional cover offish cover features and trophic
 level indicators including large woody debris,
 rootwads and snags, brush, undercut banks,
                                               overhanging vegetation, rock ledges, aquatic
                                               macrophytes, filamentous algae, and artificial
                                               structures. Alone and in combination with other
                                               metrics, this information is used to assess habi-
                                               tat complexity, fish cover, and channel distur-
                                               bance.

-------
     The procedure to estimate the types and
amounts of fish cover is outlined in Table 6-
10. Data are recorded in the "Fish Cover/
Other" section of the Channel/Riparian
Transect Form as shown in Figure 6-5. Crews
will estimate the areal cover of all of the fish
cover and other listed features that are in the
water and on the banks within the 1 Om x 20m
plot (refer to Figure 6-2).

     Observations to assess  fish cover and
several other in-channel features apply to a
10 m x 20 m inundated area  adjacent to the
selected bank extending 10 m out from the
channel margin, and then upstream 10m and
downstream 10m from each of the 11 transect
cross-sections (Figure 6-2). These plot dimen-
sions are estimated by eye. The ranges of per-
centage afeal cover corresponding to each of
these codes are the same as for riparian veg-
etation cover (Section 6.6.6) and are also
shown on the Field Form.
I Table 6-10. Procedure For Estimating Fish Cover.
P=.l.
 2.
        .           -.. . ..   •  ....  ,..  .    ...
     Stop at the designated shoreline at a cross- .
     section transect and estimate a 10m distance ]
     upstream and downstream (20m total length), '
     and a  10m distance out from the banks to
     define a 20m x 10m littoral plot.
     Examine the water and the banks within the :
     20m x 10m littoral plot for the  following
     features and types of fish cover: filamentous
     algae,  aquatic macrophytes, large  woody ,
     debris, brush and small woody debris, over- j
     hanging vegetation, undercut banks, boulders,
     and artificial structures.
     For each cover type, estimate its areal cover ;
     by  eye and/or  by  sounding with a pole. "
   :~z Record the appropriate  cover class  in the
     "Fish Cover/Other" section of (he Channel/ ]
     Riparian Transect Form ("0"=abserit:  zero 1
     cover, "l"=sparse: <10%, "2"=moderate: 10-"
         ., "3"=heavy: 40-75%, or "4"=very heavy: "
                                      "''
 -4.  Repeat Steps  1  through 3 at each cross-
     section transect,  recording data from each
 f-™™ transect on a separate field data form.
P;	_..	_;,	f	• '.-„ .:.,._„.;•...'. . . '... -.' 		i,.~...
     Filamentous algae pertains to long
streaming algae that often occur in slow mov-
ing waters. Aquatic macrophytes are water
loving plants in the river, including mosses,
that could  provide  cover for fish  or
macroinvertebrates. If the river channel con-
tains live wetland grasses, include these as
macrophytes. Woody debris includes the
larger pieces of wood that can provide cover
and influence river morphology (i.e., those
pieces that would be included in the large
woody debris tally [Section 6.6.3]). Brush/
woody debris pertains to the smaller wood
that primarily affects cover but not morphol-
ogy. The entry for trees or brush within one
meter above the water surface is the amount
of brush, twigs, small debris etc. that is not in
the water but is close to the river and pro-
vides cover. Boulders are typically basketball
to car sized particles. Many streams contain
artificial structures designed for fish habitat
enhancement. Streams may also have in-chan-
nel structures discarded (e.g. cars or tires) or
purposefully placed for diversion, impound-
ment, channel stabilization, or other purposes.
Record the cover of these structures on the
form.

 6.6.8  Human Influences
     Field characterization of the presence
 and proximity of various important types of
 human activities, disturbances, and land use
 in the river riparian area is adapted from meth-
 ods developed by Kaufmann and Robison
 (1998) for wadeable streams. This informa-
 tion shall be used in combination with ripar-
 ian and watershed landuse information from
 aerial photos and satellite  imagery to assess
 the potential degree of disturbance of the
 sample river reaches.'

     For the left and right banks at each of
 the 11 detailed Channel/Riparian Cross-Sec-

-------
 tions, evaluate the presence/absence and the
 proximity of 11 categories of human influ-
 ences outlined in Table 6-11. Confine your
 observations to  the river and riparian  area
 within 10m upstream and 10m downstream
 from the cross-section transect (Figure 6-2).
 Four proximity classes are used:  On the
 riverbank within 10m upriver or downriver
 of the cross-section transect, present within
 the 10m x 20m riparian plot, present outside
 of the riparian plot, and not present. Record
 human influences on the Channel/Riparian
 Transect Form (Figure 6-5).

      You may mark "P" more than once for
 the same human influence observed outside
 of more than  one riparian observation plot
 (e.g. at both Transect D and E). The rule is
 that you count human disturbance items as
 often as you see them, BUT NOT IF you have
 to site through a previously counted transect
 or its 1 Ox20m riparian plot.
                                             6.7   Summary of
                                             Workflow

                                                  Table 6-12 lists the activities performed
                                             at and between each transect for the physical
                                             habitat characterization. The activities are
                                             performed along the chosen river bank and
                                             mid-channel (thalweg profile).

                                             6.8   Equipment and
                                             Supplies
                                                  Figure 6-8 lists the equipment and sup-
                                             plies required to conduct all the activities de-
                                             scribed for characterizing physical habitat.
                                             This checklist is similar to the checklist pre-
                                             sented  in Appendix A, which is used at the
                                             base location (Section 3) to ensure that all of
                                             the required equipment is brought to the river.
                                             Use this checklist to ensure that equipment
                                             and supplies are organized and available at
                                ,
i Table 6-1 1. Procedure for Estimating Human Influence.
                                        -     -
  1 .
  2.
  3.
*
i-
p5.
I !. 6.
 1
                                                                        .
      Stop at the designated shoreline at a cross-section transect, look toward the left bank (left when facing
      downstream), and estimate a lOm distance upstream and downstream (26m total length). Also, ]
      estimate a distance of 10m back into the riparian zone to define a riparian plot area.
      Examine the channel, bank and riparian plot area adjacent to the defined river segment for the *
      following human influences:  (1) walls, dikes, revetments, riprap, and dams;  (2) buildings; (3)
      pavement (e.g., parking lot, foundation); (4) roads or railroads, (5) inlet or outlet pipes; (6) landfills or
      trash (e.g., cans, bottles, trash heaps); "(7) parks or maintained lawns;~(8) row crops; (9) pastures, '
      rangeland, or hay fields; (10) logging; and (11) mining (including gravel mining).
      For each type of influence, determine if it is present and what its proximity is to the river and riparian
      plot area. Consider human disturbance items as present if you can  see them from the cross-section "',
      trarisect"Do not 'include fliem'ir' you  have 'to site'ftrough"' another transect or its 1pm o° 20rn riparian '
                                •         """"''"'     " "'"  '"     " "'""'""' ................. '''" ''
                            .              .             ...  ..._ ..       ..          -,..
     For each type of influence, record the appropriate proximity class in.the "Human Influence" part of the
     "Visual Riparian Estimates" section of the Channel/Riparian Transect Form. Proximity classes are:  ~\
       • B("Bank")      Present wimin the defined 20m river segment and located in the stream or on ;
          ................................ ............ ........... the wetted or bankfull bank.      .   _  ./ _. . ........ c_^ ........ -  _  •' ...... •  ..... ' ....... ; 'j
       • C ("Close")     Present within the 10 °° 20m riparian plot area, but above the bankfull  level.
       • P ("Present") ............  Pjesent,iibiut_obseryedi gutside^e^riparian plot' area.  '•  '  -   '. ....... ^   }
       • O(" Absent")     Not present within or adjacent to the 20m river segment or the riparian plot area '
                        at the transect                      .................                ...,„'
     Repeat Steps 1  through 4 for the opposite bank.                                           •
     Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for each cross-section transect, recording data for each transect on a separate
     field form.                                .       '   .   .   ......  '  ....... '-..-'  :' *

-------
                      of Workflow - River Physical Habitat Characterization.
tgrA.  At the chosen bank on first transect (farthest upstream):
   :1.
      Move boat in a "loop" within 10 x 20 meter littoral plot, measuring five littoral depths and probing '
      substrate.     .    ..........         '  " "- .     .';:-.-.      .;   . -.'•-.  '•'.'".  .'•  :•-.-.'    .      ' ''t
     , Estimate dominant and subdominaiit littpral substrate, based on probing the five locations.         :
      Estimate areal cover of fish concealment features ;in 10 Jt20 meter littoral plot.              :      r
      Tally LWD wimin or partially within the 10 x 20 meter littoral plot.                             '
      Measure water conductivity and temperature.                                                :
      Do densiometer measurements at bank (facing upstream, downstream, left, right).                  ]
      Choose bank angle class, estimate bankfull height, width and channel incision. (Note that width and •
      incision estimates incorporate both left and right banks.).                                      :
      Tally LWD entirely outof water but at least partially within the bankfull channel.   .            .  *
      Estimate and record distance to riparian vegetation on the chosen bank.
      Make visual riparian vegetation cover estimates for the 10 x 20 meter riparian plot on both sides of the '\
      channel. (Note that riparian plot starts at bankfuli and continues back  10m away from the bankfull
                     '    '            "'        - •••             ~    ----•••••      ••••
  |11. Identify species, height, Dbh, and distance from riverbank of largest riparian tree within your vision. ;
  S12. Make visual human disturbance tally. It has the same plot dimensions as the riparian vegetation — «
    """except if a disturbance item is observed in the river or within the bankfull channel, then the proximity j
    ^ code is "B", the closest rating. Disturbances within the plot get a rating of "C"; those visible beyond..,
 ""7  the plot are rated T".                                     :  \                            '"
    3. Siting clinometer level (0%) towards the near or far bank at the current transect, mark or remember an I
      eyeTlevel point to which you will be siting when backsiting from the next downstream transect.     >
    4^ Get out far .enough from the bank so you can see downstream. Then use the'laser rahgefinder to site and •
      record the distance to the intended position of the next downstream transect.                     :
  LB.Thalweg Profile:
    1 . As soon as you get out from the bank after doing transect activities, take the first of 20 thalweg depth *
  5   measurements and substrate/snag probes using sonar and pole — also classify habitat type.
t   2. Estimate thalweg  measurement distance increments by keeping track of boat lengths or channel- i
ft- -------- width distances traversed; each increment is I/ 10th (or l/20th) the distance between transects.      ]
    _3. At the 20th thalweg measurement location, you are one  increment upstream of the next transect. 1
      Backsite compass bearing mid-channel, then measure the  distance and % slope back to your visual «
      "mark" on the bank at the previous transect.                                               ••'•?>
                   -.    -:• ... -  \ '^-\(; ,••••   -:••:•••••:.  •'• ^,-..:::- •'.;•,-:•;.  v.-.r-:V- '•  •••••••••\
           the Whole Process (for the remaining 1.0 transects and spaces in between).                 .. i
|L~.."
 the river site in order to conduct the activities
 efficiently.

 6.9   Literature Cited
                                                 Bain, M.B., J.T. Finn, and H.E. Booke.
                                                     1985. Quantifying stream substrate
                                                     for  habitat  analysis  studies.  Nor.
                                                     Amer. Jour, of Fish. Man. 5:499-500.
 Allen-Gil, S., M. Green, and D. H. Landers.   Frissell, C.A., W.J. Liss, C.E. Warren,
     Unpublished  manuscript.  Fish  abun-
     dance, instream habitat and the effects of
     historical landuse practices in two large
     alluvial rivers on the Olympic Penninsula,
     Washington. U.S. EPA, WED.
                                                     and M.D. Hurley. 1986. A hierarchi-
                                                     cal  framework  for  stream  habitat
                                                     classification:  viewing  streams in a
                                                     watershed contest. Environ. Mgmt.
                                                     10(2): 199-214.

-------
Equipment and Supplies for Physical Habitat
Qty. Item
1
1
1
1
Irollea.
2

2pair
1

1
1
1
1 1 plus
extras
1 1 plus
extras
1 copy
1 set
Surveyor's telescoping leveling rod (round profile, fiberglass, metric scale, 7.5m
extended)
Clinometer (or Abney level) with percent and degree scales.
Convex spherical canopy densiometer (Lemmon Model B), modified with taped
"V
Bearing compass (Backpacking type)
Colored surveyor's plastic flagging (2 colors)
Covered clipboards (lightweight, with strap or lanyard to hang around neck)
Soft (#2) lead pencils (mechanical are acceptable)
Chest waders with felt-soled boots for safety and speed if waders are the
neoprene "stocking" type
Camera- waterproof 35mm with standard and wide angle lens
Film - 35mm color slide film, ASA 400 and 100
Fiberglass Tape and reel (50m metric) with good hand crank and handle
SONAR depth sounder - narrow beam (16 degrees)
Laser rangefinder - 400 ft. distance range - and clear waterproof bag
Channel/Riparian Transect Forms
Thalweg Profile Forms
Field operations and methods manual
Laminated sheets of procedure tables and/or quick reference guides for physical
habitat characterization

















Figure 6-8.   Checklist of equipment and supplies for physical habitat

-------
Kaufmann, P.R. (ed.) 1993. Physical Habitat.
    Pages 59-69 in R.M. Hughes, ed. Stream
    Indicator and Design Workshop.. EPA/
    600/R-93/138. U.S. Environmental Pro-
    tection Agency, Corvallis, OR.

Kaufmann, P.R., P. Levine, E.G. Robison, C.
    Seeliger, and D.V. Peck (1999). Quanti-
    fying Physical Habitat in Wadeable
    Streams. EPA 620/R-99/003. U.S. Envi-
    ronmental Protection Agency, Washing-
    ton, D.C. 102 pp + Appendices.

Kaufmann, P.R. and  E.G.  Robison.  1998.
    Physical Habitat Assessment, pp 77-118
    In: Lazorchak, J.L., Klemm, D.J., and
    D.V.  Peck (editors).,  Environmental
    Monitoring and Assessment Program -
    Surface Waters: Field  Operations and
    Methods for Measuring the Ecological
    Condition of Wadeable Streams.  EPA/
    620/R-94/004F.  U.S.  Environmental
    Protection Agency, Washington D.C.

Kaufmann, P.R. and T.R. Whittier. (1997).
    Habitat Assessment. Pages 5-1 to 5-25 In:
    J.R. Baker, G.D.  Merritt, and  D.W.
    Sutton (eds) Environmental Monitoring
    and Assessment Program — Lakes Field
    Operations Manual. EPA/600/R-97/003.
    U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
    Las Vegas, NV,  Corvallis, OR, and
    Cincinnati, OH.

Lemmon, P.E. 1957. A new instrument for
    measuring forest overstory density. J. For.
    55(9):667-669.

Mulvey, M., L. Caton, and R. Hafele.  1992.
    Oregon  nonpoint  source  monitoring
    protocols stream  bioassessment  field
    manual:  for  macroinvertebrates  and
    habitat assessment. Oregon Department
    of  Environmental Quality  Laboratory
    Biomonitoring Section. 1712 S.W. llth
    Ave. Portland, OR, 97201. 40 p.

Plafkin, J.L., M.T. Barbour, K.D. Porter,
    S.K. Gross, R.M.  Hughes. 1989. Rapid
    bioassessment  protocols for  use  in
    streams   and   rivers:    benthic
    macroinvertebrates and fish. EPA/440/4-
    89/001. U.S. Environmental Protection
    Agency, Assessment and  Watershed
    Protection Division, Washington, DC.

Platts,  W.S., W.F.  Megahan,  and G.W.
    Minshall. 1983. Methods for evaluating
    stream,  riparian, and biotic  conditions.
    USDA For. Serv.,  Gen. Tech. Rep. INT-
    183, 71 p.

Robison, E.G. and R.L. Beschta. 1990.
    Characteristics of coarse woody, debris
    for several  coastal streams of'southeast
    Alaska, USA. 47(9): 1684-1693.

Robison, E.G.  and P.R.  Kaufmann. 1994.
    Evaluating  two objective techniques to
    define pools in small streams, pgs 659-
    668,  In  R.A.   Marston  and  V.A.
    Hasfurther  (eds.)  Effects  of  Human
    Induced changes on hydrologic systems.
    Summer Symposium proceedings, Ameri-
    can Water Resources Association,. June
    26-29, 1994, Jackson Hole, WY. 1182
    pp.

Stack, BLR.  1989. Factors influencing pool
    morphology in Oregon coastal streams.
    M.S. Thesis, Oregon State  University.
    109 p.

-------

-------
                               Section  7
                              Periphyton
                         Brian H. Hill1 and Alan T. Herlihy2
    Periphyton are algae, fungi, bacteria,
protozoa, and associated organic matter asso-
ciated with channel substrates. Periphyton are
useful indicators of environmental condition
because they respond rapidly and are sensi-
tive to a number  of anthropogenic distur-
bances, including habitat destruction, con-
tamination by nutrients, metals, herbicides,
hydrocarbons, and acidification.

    Periphyton samples are collected at the
near-shore shallows when stopped at each of
the cross-section  transects (transects  "A"
through "K") established within the sampling
reach (Section 4). Periphyton samples are
collected at each transect at the same time as
sediment samples (Section 8) and benthic
macroinvertebrate samples (Section 9). One
composite "index" sample of periphyton is
'U.S. EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory, Eco-
logical Exposure Research Division, 26 W. Martin L. King
Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45268
Department of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon  State
Univeristy, c/o U.S. EPA, 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis, OR
97333
prepared for each river site. At the comple-
tion of the day's sampling activities, but be-
fore leaving the river, four types of labora-
tory samples are prepared from the composite
periphyton sample.

7.1  Sample Collection
    The general scheme for collecting per-
iphyton samples from the sampling reach at
each river is illustrated in Figure 7-1. At each
transect, samples are collected from the shore-
line assigned during the layout of the reach
(Section 4). The substrate selected for sam-
pling  should be collected from a depth no
deeper than can be reached by submerging
your arm to mid-bicep depth. If a sample can-
not be collected because the location is too
deep,  skip  the transect. The procedure for
collecting samples and preparing a compos-
ite  sample is presented in Table 7-1. One
sample is collected from each of the transects
and composited in one bottle. The volume of
the sample is recorded on the Sample Collec-
tion Form as shown in Figure 7-2.

-------
     K      J
             Cross Section Transects (A to K)
                                Transect Samples (11 Total)
                               Composite Transect Samples
       ID/Enumeration Sample
                                                 Acid/Alkaline
                                               Phos
    50-mL aliquot
    Preserve with 10% formalin
                                                                   50-mL aliquot
                                                                   Store at -20 °C
                                                   Chlorophyll Sample
                                                        o
     Biomass Sample
                                                   Filter 25-mL aliquot
                                                    lass-fiber filter)
                                                     re at -20 °C
Filter 25-mL aliquot (glass-fiber filter)
Store filter at -20 °C
Figure 7-1.   Index sampling design for periphyton.
7.2  PrGDaratiOn Of              ^ex samPl£s: an ID/enumeration sample (to
.   .               ^       -               determine taxonomic composition and rela-
L3DOratOry oampieS           tiveabundances),achlorophyllsample,abio-

     Four different types of laboratory   mass sample (for ash-free dry mass [AFDM]),
samples are prepared from the composite in-   and an acid/alkaline phosphatase activity

-------
 = TabIe 7-1.  Procedure for Collecting Composite Index Samples of Periphyton.

;: 1,  Starting with Transect "A", collect a single sample from the assigned shoreline using'the procedure
   ^ below.
 •-   (a)   Collect a sample of substrate: (rock or wood) that is small enough (< 15 cm diameter) and can be
 r         easily removed from the river. Place the substrate in a plastic funnel which drains into a 500-mL
 '"'"'™      plastic bottle with volume graduations marked on it.
 ; V  (b)   Use the area delimiter to define a 12-cm2 area on the upper surface of the substrate. Dislodge
 e        attached periphyton from the substrate within the delimiter into the funnel by brushing with a
 ;rf       stiff-bristled toothbrush for 30 seconds. Take care to ensure that the upper surface of the sub-
 ;  :       strate is the surface that is being scrubbed, and that the entire surface within the delimiter is
 pe—-= -   -scrubbed.
 EL  (c)   Fill a wash bottle with river water. Using a minimal volume of water from this bottle, wash the
 B        dislodged periphyton from the funnel into the 500-mL bottle.
 ; If no coarse sediment (cobbles or larger) are present:
 ''-•'-: (d)   Use the area delimiter to confine a 12-cm2 area of soft sediments.
 S -   (e)   Vacuum the top 1 cm of sediments from within the delimited area into a de-tipped 60-mL
 i;        syringe.
 ;    (f)   Empty the syringe into the same 500-mL plastic bottle as above.
 " 2.  Repeat Step 1 for transects "B" through "K". Place the sample collected at each sampling site into the
 HE  single 500-mL bottle to produce the composite index sample.
  3.  After samples have been collected from all 1-1 transects, thoroughly mix the 500-mL bottle regardless
     of substrate type. Record the total estimated volume of the composite sample in the  periphyton
     section of the Sample Collection Form.
 (APA) sample. All the sample containers re-
 quired for an individual river should be sealed
 in plastic bags  until use (see Section 3) to
 avoid external sources of contamination (e.g.,
 dust, dirt, or mud) that are present at river
 shorelines.

     A set of completed periphyton sample
 labels is shown in Figure 7-3. All labels in a
 set have the same sample ID number. Circle.
 the habitat type of the composite index sample
 and the appropriate type of sample (chloro-
 phyll, biomass, etc.) on each label. Attach
 completed labels to the appropriate contain-
 ers and cover with clear tape. When attach-
 ing the completed labels, avoid covering any
 volume graduations and markings on the con-
 tainer.

 7.2.1    ID/Enumeration
 Sample
      Prepare the ID/Enumeration sample as
 a 50-mL aliquot  from the composite index
sample, following the procedure presented in
Table 7-2. Preserve each sample with 2 mL
of 10% formalin. Record the ID number
(barcode) from the container label and the total
volume of the sample in the appropriate fields
on the Sample Collection Form as shown in
Figure 7-2. Store the preserved samples up-
right in a container cpntaining absorbent ma-
terial, according to the guidelines provided for
handling formalin-preserved samples.

7.2.2   Chlorophyll
Sample
     Prepare the chlorophyll sample by fil-
tering a 25-mL aliquot of the composite in-
dex  sample through a glass fiber filter (0.45
m nominal pore size). The procedure for pre-
paring chlorophyll samples is presented in
Table 7-3. Chlorophyll can degrade rapidly
when exposed to bright light. If possible, pre-
pare the samples in subdued light (or shade),
filtering as quickly as possible after collec-

-------
                                                                           Reviewed by (initial)
                              SAMPLE COLLECTION FORM - RIVERS
 SITE NAME:   BEAVER    RlV£/f
                                              DATE: g   IS  1 98  VISIT  DO J3 1 D2 D3
 SITE ID:   ORRV
5 -
                                     TEAM ID (X):
                              D2   D3  D4   H5  D6   D7  D8
                                    COMPOSITE BENTHOS SAMPLES
  BANK SAMPLED (LOOKING DOWNSTREAM):   ]S LEFT
                                         RIGHT
          SAMPLED
          (BARCODE)
                         HABITAT
                       (CIRCLE ONE)
                  NO.
                 OF JARS
                  FLAG
                                                        S = SHORE
                                                                    M = MID-CHANNEL
                                                                                       D = DRIFT
                                                                       COMMENTS
24-56 I Z
                                                      RlfiKTE4Mr-S4MPL£D AT LAUtJCff
                                                      HO SHORE KICK AT -nf?AwsEcrs
                                                                 => TOO DEEP
     STATION (CIRCLE IF DONE)
          SHORE KICK
         MID-CHANNEL
s

M
                                                       s

                                                       M
                                                             M
                                                              s

                                                              M
(£>
 M
                                                                       S

                                                                      M
 DRIFT
  NET
                           TRANSECT
                                                             TIME (24-HR CLOCK)
                                                     START
                                                                                 VELOCITY
                                                                                 (FT/SEC)
                                                                                  XX.XX
   IA DB DC  Do DE DF  DG DH Di DJ  DK
                                                                                       3. 0
                                   COMPOSITE PERIPHYTON SAMPLES
  SAMPLE ID (BARCODE)*
                     2. QfO 1 3
                                            COMPOSITE VOLUME xxxx mL *•
                                                  32.5
     ASSEMBLAGE ID
       (50-mLTUBE)
                     CHLOROPHYLL
                      (GF/F FILTER
                                 BIOMASS
                               (TARED FILTER)
                                                     APA SAMPLE
                                                     (50-mLTUBE)
     SUB. SAMPLE VOL.
         xx ml
                     VOL. FILTERED
                        xxxxmL
                                             FILTER NO.
                                     VOL. FILTERED
                                        xxxxmL
                                                   SUB. SAMPLE VOL.
                                                      xxxx mL
                              2.5
                                                                               £-0
  COMMENTS:
 Flag codes; K- Sample no* collected; U» Suspect sample; F1.F2, etc. - misc. flag assigned by field crew. Explain all flags in Comments sections.

 Rav. OS/29/98 (jvscmb.SS)                                                   SAMPLE COLLECTION FORM - RIVERS -1
Figure 7-2.   Sample Collection Form (pagel) showing data recorded for periphyton samples.


-------
                   PERIPHYTON
              ^PA) BIOMASS  CHLA ID
              SITE ID: ORRV j? £ - 3. 9 9.
                    DATE: JL/5/J.8
               HABITAT:  POOL <§IFFLE/RUN^
               SUBSAMPLE VOLUME: 50 mL
               COMPOSITE VOLUME:32£.mL
                       229000
     PERIPHYTON
APA <@OMAS§> CHLA  ID
SITE IDTSHHV 3 JL - 3. 5L 3.
      DATE: JL/ 5/_98  _
HABITAT:  POOL
SUBSAMPLE VOLUME: 25" mL
COMPOSITE VOLUME:£2£.mL
                                                            229000
                    PERIPHYTON
               APA BIOMASS (gR
               SITE ID: ORRV j?
                    DATE: JL/ 5/98
               HABITAT: POOL
               SUBSAMPLE VOLUME:^£_mL
               COMPOSITE VOLUME:32£.mL
                       229000
     PERIPHYTON
 APA  BIOMASS  CHLA (5)
SITE ID: ORRV J? £ - 9_ 9. 37
      DATE: JL / jS / 98 _
 HABITAT:  POOL (RIFFLE/RUN)
 SUBSAMPLE VOLUME: 5"O mL
 COMPOSITE VOLUME:
                                                            229000
 Figure 7-3.   Completed set of periphyton sample labels.
I: Table7-2.  Preparation of ID/Enumeration Samples for Periphyton.
JT1.   Prepare abarcoded sample label and circle the sample type ("ID") on the label. Record the volume of
|~=   the subample (typically 50 mL) and the volume of the composite index sample on the label. Attach the
C     completed label to a 50-mL centrifuge tube; avoid covering the volume graduations and markings.
JT~"   Cover the label completely with a clear tape strip.

| 2.   Record the sample ID number (barcode) of the label and the total volume of the composite index
!„, " sample on the form.

£v3.   Rinse a 60-mL syringe with deionized water.
K;-"'~  -             ••..••.           •     •    •                 :     .
I 4.   Thoroughly mix the bottle containing the composite sample.
F               •                .   ' .         •                       .
:l . - •                   • .       .                    • •           '                             :
fe 5.   Withdraw 50 mL of the mixed sample into the syringe. Right after mixing, place the contents of the
JET   syringe sample into the labeled 50-mL centrifuge tube.

|; 6r Wearing gloves and safety glasses, use a syringe or bulb pipette to add 2 mL of 10% formalin solution
I     to the tube. Cap the tube tightly and seal with plastic electrical tape. Shake gently to distribute
£•-     preservative.
  7.  Record the volume of the sample in the centrifuge tube (excluding the volume of preservative) in the
      "Assemblage ID Subsample Vol." field of the Sample Collection Form.

-------
 Table 7-3.  Procedure for Preparing Chlorophyll Samples for Periphyton.
 1.
 2.
 3.
 4.
 5.
 6.
   Using clean forceps, place a glass fiber filter on the filter holder. Use a small amount of deionized water
   from a wash bottle to help settle the filter properly. Attach the filter funnel to the filter holder and filter
   chamber, then attach the hand vacuum pump to the chamber.
   Rinse the sides of the filter funnel and the filter with a small volume of deionized water.
   Rinse a 25-mL or 50-mL graduated cylinder three times with small volumes of deionized water.
   Mix the composite sample bottle thoroughly.
   Measure 25 mL (±1 mL) of sample into the graduated cylinder.
   • NOTE: For a composite sample containing fine sediment, (e.g., the "DEPOSITIONAL" sample),
     allow grit to settle for 10 - 20 seconds before pouring the sample into the graduated cylinder.
   Pour the 25-mL aliquot into the filter funnel, replace the cap, and pull the sample through the filter
   using the hand pump. NOTE: Vacuum pressure from the pump should not exceed 15 psi to avoid
   rupture of fragile algal cells.
   • If 25 mL of sample will not pass through the filter, discard the filter and rinse the chamber
     thoroughly with deionized water. Collect a new sample using a smaller volume of sample, measured
     to ±1 mL. Be sure to record the actual volume sampled on the sample label and the Sample
     Collection Form.
   Remove both plugs from the filtration chamber and pour out the filtered water in the chamber.
   Remove the filter funnel from the filter holder. Remove the filter from the holder with clean forceps.
   Avoid touching the colored portion of the filter. Fold the filter in half, with  the colored sample
   (filtrate) side folded in on itself. Wrap the folded filter in a small piece of aluminum foil.
   Complete a periphyton sample label for chlorophyll, including the volume filtered, and attach it to
   the foil. Cover the label completely with a strip of clear tape. Place the foil packet into a self-sealing
   plastic bag.
   Record the sample ID  number (barcode) of the label and the total volume of the composite index
   sample on the form. Record the volume filtered in the "Chlorophyll" field on the Sample Collection
   Form. Double check that the volume  recorded on the collection form matches the total volume
   recorded on the sample label.
10. Place the plastic bag containing the filter into a portable freezer or between two sealed plastic bags of
   ice or frozen gel packs in a cooler.
11. Rinse the filter funnel, filter holder, filter chamber, and graduated cylinder thoroughly with deionized
   water.
 7.
 8.
 9.
tion to minimize degradation. The filtration
apparatus is illustrated in Figure 7-4. Rinse
the filtration chamber with deionized water
each day before use at the base site and then
seal in a plastic bag until use at the stream
(see Section 3). Keep the glass fiber filters in
a dispenser inside a sealed plastic bag until
use.

     It is important to measure the volume of
the sample being filtered accurately (±1 mL)
with a graduated cylinder. During filtration,
do no exceed 15 pounds per square inch (psi)
to avoid rupturing cells. If the vacuum pres-
                                              sure exceeds 15 psi, prepare anew sample. If
                                              the filter clogs completely before all  the
                                              sample in the chamber has been filtered, dis-
                                              card the sample and filter, and prepare a new
                                              sample using a smaller volume of sample.

                                                   After filtering each sample, wrap the fil-
                                              ter in aluminum foil. Complete a sample la-
                                              bel (Figure 7-3) and check it to ensure that all
                                              written information is complete and legible.
                                              Affix the label to the foil packet and cover it
                                              completely with a strip of clear tape. Record
                                              the barcode  assigned to the sample on  the
                                              Sample Collection Form (Figure 7-2). Make
                           ™|,'!:V "ijK .-• v
-------
                                                                    Hand
                                                                 Vacuum Pump
                                                Clear
                                                Plastic
                                                Tubing
Figure 7-4.   Filtration apparatus for preparing chlorophyll and biomass subsamples for periphyton.
Modified from Chaloud et al. (1989).
sure the volume recorded on each sample la-
bel matches the corresponding volume re-
corded on the Sample Collection Form.
Record a flag and provide comments on the
Sample Collection Form if there are any prob-
lems in collecting the sample or if conditions
occur that may affect sample integrity. Store
each foil packet in a self-sealing plastic bag.
Store the sample frozen until shipment to the
laboratory (Section 3).

 7.2.3   Biomass Sample
     Prepare the biomass sample from a 25-
 mL aliquot of the composite index sample.
 As with the chlorophyll sample, it is impor-
 tant to measure the volume to be filtered ac-
 curately (±1 mL).
    After filtering each sample, complete a
sample label as shown in Figure 7-3. Check
each sample label to ensure that all written
information is complete and legible. Affix the
label to the filter container and cover it com-
pletely with clear tape. Record the bar code
assigned to the sample, the container num-
ber, and the volume filtered on the Sample
Collection  Form as shown in Figure 7-2.
Make sure the information recorded on each
sample label and filters container matches the
corresponding values recorded on the Sample
Collection Form. Record a flag and provide
comments on the Sample Collection Form if
there are any problems in collecting the
sample or if conditions occur that may affect
sample integrity. Store each labeled filter con-

-------
Table7-4.  Procedure For Preparing Biomass Samples For Periphyton.

1.  Using clean forceps, remove a glass-fiber filter and place it on the filter holder. Use a small amount of
    deionized water from a wash bottle to help settle the filter properly. Attach the filter funnel to the filter
    holder and filter chamber, then attach the hand vacuum pump to the chamber.
    Rinse the filter chamber and filter with a small volume of deionized water.
    Rinse a 25-mL or 50-mL graduated cylinder three times with small volumes of deionized water.
    Mix the composite sample bottle thoroughly.
    Measure 25 mL (±1 mL) of composite sample into the graduated cylinder.
    • NOTE: For a composite sample containing fine sediment, allow grit to settle for 10 - 20 seconds
     before pouring the sample into the graduated cylinder.
    Pour the 25-mL aliquot into filter funnel, replace the cap, and pull the sample through the filter using
    the hand pump. NOTE: Filtration pressure should not exceed 15 psi to avoid rapture of fragile algal
  2.
  3.
  4.
  5.
  6.
7.
8.
9.
       If 25 mL of sample will not pass through the filter, discard the filter and rinse the chamber
       thoroughly with deionized water. Collect a new sample using a smaller volume of sample, measured
       to ±l mL- Be sure to record the actual volume filtered on the sample label and the Sample Collection
       Form.
      Remove both plugs from the filtration chamber and pour out the filtered water in the chamber.
      Remove the filter funnel from the filter holder. Remove the filter from the holder with clean forceps
      Avoid touching the colored sample portion of the filter.
      Complete a periphyton sample label for biomass, including the volume filtered, and attach it to the
      foil. Cover the label completely with a strip of clear tape. Place the foil packet into a self-sealing
      plastic bag.
      Record the sample ID number (barcode) of the label and the total volume of the composite sample on
      the form. Record the volume filtered in the "Biomass" portion on the Sample Collection Form. Double
      check that the volume recorded on the collection form matches the total volume recorded on the
      sample label.
  10.  Place the labeled filter container into a cooler containing two sealed plastic bags of ice.
  1 1 .  Rinse the filter funnel, filter holder, filter chamber, and graduated cylinder thoroughly with deionized
      water.
 tainer frozen until shipment to the laboratory
 (Sections).

 7.2.4   Acid/Alkaline

Phosphatase Activity
Sample
     The Acid/Alkaline phosphatase activity
 (APA)  sample is prepared from a 50-mL
 subsample of the composite index sample.
 Table 7-5 presents the procedure for prepar-
 ing APA samples. No field treatment (i.e., fil-
 tration, preservation) of the APA sample is
 necessary. Complete a label for each sample
 as shown in Figure 7-3 and affix it to a 50-
 mL centrifuge tube. Record the ID number
                                           (barcode), and the volume of the subsample
                                           on the Sample Collection Form (Figure 7-2).
                                           Check to ensure that the information recorded
                                           on the Sample Collection Form matches the
                                           corresponding information recorded on the
                                           sample label. Store APA samples frozen until
                                           shipment to the laboratory (Section 3).

                                          7.3  Equipment  and
                                          Supplies
                                               Figure 7-5 is a checklist of equipment
                                           and supplies required to conduct periphyton
                                           sample collection and processing activities.
                                           This checklist is similar to the checklist pre-
                                           sented in Appendix A, which is used at the
                                           base location (Section 3) to ensure thatall of

-------
|Table7-5.  Procedure for Preparing Add Alkaline Phosphatase Activity Samples for Periphyton.
i£i

Prepare a barcoded sample label. Circle the sample type ("APA") and the habitat type ("Riffle/
Run" or "Pool") on the label. Record the volume of the sample (typically 50 mL) and the
volume of the composite index sample on the label. Attach the completed label to a 50-mL
centrifuge tube; avoid  covering the volume graduations and markings. Cover the label
completely with a clear tape strip.                  ..".,.
Rmse a 60-mL syringe with deionized water.
Thoroughly mix the bottle containing the composite sample.
Withdraw 50 mLof the mixed sample into the syringe. Place the contents of the syringe sample
into the labeled 50-mL centrifuge tube. Cap the tube tightly and seal with plastic electrical
tape.    '-''"•'.'''- ' : .•  .       "    '''"''.    '	-'-•.-
Record the sample ED number (barcode) of the  label and the  total volume of the composite
index sample on the form.
Record the volume of the sample in the centrifuge tube in the "APA Sample" field of the
Sample Collection Form.
Equipment and Supplies for Periphyton
Qty. Item
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1 box
1 pair
1
1
1
2
2
4mL
1
1 pair
1 pair
1 set
1


1 pkg.
1
1 copy
1 set
Large funnel (15-20 cm diameter)
12-cm2 area delimiter (3.8 cm diameter pipe, 3 cm tall)
Stiff-bristle toothbrush with handle bent at 90° angle
1 -L wash bottle for stream water
1-L wash bottle containing deionized water
500-mL plastic bottles for the composite sample.
60 mL plastic syringe with 3/8" hole bored into the end
50-mL screw-top centrifuge tubes (or similar sample vials)
Glass-fiber filters for chlorophyll and biomass samples
Forceps for filter handling.
25-mL or 50-mL graduated cylinder
Filtration unit, including filter funnel, cap, filter holder, and receiving chamber
Hand-operated vacuum purnp and clear plastic tubing
Aluminum foil squares (3" x 6")
Self-sealing plastic bags for chlorophyll samples
10% formalin solution for ID/Enumeration samples
Small syringe or bulb pipette for dispensing formalin
Chemical-resistant gloves for handling formalin
Safety glasses for use when handling formalin
Sample labels (4 per set) with the same barcode ID number
Sample Collection Form for river
Soft (#2) lead pencils for recording data on field forms
Fine-tipped indelible markers for filling out sample labels
Clear tape strips for covering labels
Cooler with bags of ice to store frozen samples
Field operations and method manual
Laminated sheets of procedure tables and/or quick reference guides for periphyton




























Figure 7-5.   Checklist of equipment and supplies for periphyton

-------
the required equipment is brought to the river.
Use this checklist to ensure that equipment
and supplies are organized and available at
the river site in order to conduct the activities
efficiently.

7.4  Literature  Cited
Handbook of Methods for Acid Deposi-
tion Studies: Field Methods for Surface
Water Chemistry. EPA 600/4-89-020.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Washington, D.C.
Chaloud, D. J., J.M. Nicholson, B.P. Baldigo,
    C.A. Hagley, and D.W. Sutton. 1989.

-------
                              Section 8
        Sediment  Community Metabolism
                         Brian H. Hill and Alan T. Herlihy
      This section describes procedures to
collect a composite sediment sample from the
sampling reach. Sediment samples are col-
lected from each transect at the same time as
periphyton samples (Section 7) and benthic
macroinvertebrate samples (Section 9). At
each river, a composite "index" sample of sedi-
ment is prepared and used in the determina-
tion of sediment community metabolism.

    The method outlined here for determin-
ing sediment community metabolism is de-
signed for headwater to mid-order streams,
and has been adapted for larger rivers or lakes.
The method measures changes in dissolved
oxygen (DO) concentrations of the overlying
water within microcosms containing small
amounts (ca. 10 mL) of sediments as a means
of assessing  benthic microbial community
activity. Sediments are collected from depo-
sitional habitats along the study reach. Fol-
'U.S. EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory, Eco-
logical Exposure Research Division, 26 W. Martin L. King
Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45268.
Department of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon State Uni-
versity, c/o U.S. EPA, 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis, OR 97333.
lowing incubation, the DO is re-measured and
the sediments are saved for ash-free dry mass
(AFDM) analysis. Respiration rate, estimated
as the change in DO concentration per hour
within each microcosm, is adjusted for
AFDM, yielding a  measure of community
respiration per gram of AFDM. Organic car-
bon turnover time can be calculated from the
empirical relationship between the organic
carbon content of the sediment (estimated as
0.5 oo AFDM) and oxygen consumption.

8.1  Sample Collection
     Table 8-1  describes the procedure for
collecting the composite  sediment sample.
Collect sediment from depositional areas (e.g.,
pools, eddies, and backwaters) located at or
near each of the cross-section transects within
the sampling reach. If soft sediments are
scarce, collect them from wherever you can
within the sampling reach. At each sampling
point, use a small plastic scoop to collect the
top 2 cm ( 1  inch) of soft surface sediment.
Combine sediments from different sampling
points into a single jar or self-sealing plastic
bag to prepare a single composite index sample

-------
  Table8-l.  Sediment Collection Procedure.

  1.   At the first cross-section, locate a depositional
      habitat (a pool, eddy, or backwater).
        • If soft sediments are scarce, collect them
         wherever you can within the reach
  2.   Use a plastic scoop to collect a sample of
      surficial  sediment (top 2 cm). Remove any
      visible organisms from the sediment. Place the
      sample in aplastic jar with volume graduations
      labeled "SEDIMENT SAMPLE":
        • Approximately 250 mL of sediment (~ 30
         mL per transect) is required for sediment
         metabolism.
  3.   Repeat Steps 1 through 2 for Transects "B"
      through "K".
                                           for the river reach. A composite sample vol-
                                           ume of 250-mL is sufficient to prepare sedi-
                                           ment metabolism samples.

                                           8.2  Determining
                                           Sediment Respiration
                                                The procedure to measure sediment res-
                                           piration in presented in Table 8-2. A dissolved
                                           oxygen meter, equipped with a  biological
                                           oxygen demand (BOD) probe and stirrer, is
                                           used for the determination of respiration rates.
                                           This may or may not be the same meter used
  Table 8-2.  Procedure To Measure Sediment Respiration.
  1.
i 2.
  3.




I *

l- 5.

S 6.
I	:	
=
L  7.
.
I:
i	
I  8.

\  9.

f,-,

L, ia
 Inspect the probe of the dissolved oxygen meter for outward signs of fouling and for an intact
 membrane. Do not touch the electrodes inside the probe with any object. Always keep the probe moist
 by keeping it inside its calibration chamber. Check the batteries and electronic functions of the meter as
 described in the meter's operating manual.
 Calibrate the oxygen probe in water-saturated air as described in the operating manual. Allow at least 15
 minutes for the probe to equilibrate before attempting to calibrate.
   •  NOTE: Try to perform the calibration as close to river temperature as possible (not air temperature)
     by using river water to fill the calibration chamber prior to equilibration.
   •  NOTE: For doing the elevation correction, the elevation of the sample site is provided on the site
     information sheet in the dossier for the site^ Alternatively, obtain the elevation from a topographic
 map.             .       ' '      	!'       '.   	             -.-•••
 Prepare a set of five sediment metabolism sample labels. Note that each label will have a different sample
JD number (barcode). Attach each completed label to a 50-mL screw-cap centrifuge tube.
   •  NOTE: Avoid covering volume gradations on the tube with the label. Cover each label with a strip
     of clear tape.
 Fill a small insulated cooler full with river water. Measure the dissolved oxygen and temperature of the
 water in the cooler. Record the values in the "Initial O2" and "Initial Incubation Temp." fields in the
 metabpHsm section of the .Field Measurement Form.  	'	___	_	_  r	    -
 Thoroughly mix the composite sediment sample. Use a small plastic spoon to transfer 10 mL of sediment
 from the composite sample container to each of the five labeled tubes.
 Fill each tube to the top (no head space) with river water from the cooler and seal the tube. Fill a
 centrifuge tube labeled "BLANK" with river  water from the cooler and seal. This tube serves as a
 control for changes in ambient conditions during the incubation period.
 Place the six tubes in a 1 -L plastic beaker and place the beaker inside the cooler. Record the start time in
 the "Incubation Time" area of the Field Measurement Form. Close the cooler and incubate the sediment
 samples for 2 hours.
 After incubation, re-calibrate the oxygen probe (i.e., the meter was turned off or you have moved to a
 different elevation during the incubation) before the end of the incubation period.
 At the end of the incubation period, record the end time in the "Incubation Time" area of the Field
 Measurement Form. Measure the DO in each tube, including the blank. Record the sample ID number of
 each tube and its measured DO concentration on the Field Measurement Form.
 Decant the overlying water from each labeled tube, retaining the sediment. Tightly seal each tube and
 place in a cooler with bags of ice as soon as possible. Keep the samples frozen until they can be
 shipped. Discard the water from the "BLANK" tube.

-------
to determine in situ dissolved oxygen concen-
tration (Section 5). If a separate meter is used
to measure sediment respiration, check the
probe membrane and the meter's batteries and
electronics according to the instrument's op-
erating manual (see Sections 3 and 5, also).
Calibrate the meter  as directed  in the
instrument's operating manual.

     A small cooler filled with stream water
is used as an incubation chamber. The initial
dissolved oxygen concentration and tempera-
ture of the water in the cooler are measured
and recorded on the Field Measurement Form
as shown in Figure 8-1. This concentration is
assumed to be the initial concentration of all
subsamples. Five sediment subsamples (10-
mL ±1 mL) are prepared from the composite
sediment sample. A set of completed sample
labels for these subsamples is shown in Fig-
ure 8-2. A 10-mL subsample of water from
the incubation cooler is used as a control for
changes in ambient conditions during the
incubation. The subsamples are incubated in
the cooler for 2 hours. After the incubation,
the final DO concentration of each tube is de-
termined and recorded on the Field Measure-
ment Form (Figure 8-1). The sediment in each
tube is retained and stored frozen until it .can
be shipped to the laboratory,(Section-3) to
determine the AFDM.

8.3  Equipment  and
Supplies
     Figure 8-3 is a checklist of equipment
and  supplies required to conduct sediment
sampling and to determine sediment commu-
nity respiration. This checklist is similar to.the
checklist presented in Appendix A, which is
used at the base location (Section 3)  to en-
sure that all of the required equipment is
brought to the river.-Use this checklist to en-
sure that equipment and supplies are orga-
nized and available at the river site in order to
conduct the activities efficiently.

-------
                                                                              Reviewed by (initial)
                         FIELD MEASUREMENT FORM - STREAMS/RIVERS
SITE NAME:   BEAVE"R    R»V£j?
                                                      DATE:  g   I 5  I  98  VISIT  DO Jfl 1  D2 D3
 SITEID:   ORRV
                                           TEAM ID (X):
                                                               D2  D3  D4   D5   D6   D7  D8
                                         WEATHER CONDITIONS (X)
                CLOUD COVER
                                             D 5-25%
                                                           D 25-50%  .
                                                                             50-75%
                                                                                             >75%
               PRECIPITATION
                                 . NONE
                                             D LIGHT
                                                           D MODERATE
                                     D HEAVY
   PREVIOUS PRECIPITATION (24 H)
                                  NONE
                                                LIGHT
                                                            n MODERATE     Q HEAVY
          AIR TEMPERATURE XX
                                    °C
                  IN SITU MEASUREMENTS
                                                             STATION ID:
                                                                          K
                                                                                 Assume X-site unless marked
           QCCS COND U.S/CM XXXX
                                  75-
                                                       Ar
    STREAM/RIVER COND U.S/CM XXXX
                                                             TRAK/5ECT   *£"
        STREAM/RIVER DO MG/LXX.X
        STREAM/RIVER TEMP °C XX.X
                                IT.
                  Ar  TRANSECT
               •FISH TISSUE SAMPLES - SECONDARY SAMPLE (where available; 5 individuals)
       ,
   (MOIL)3
   xxx
                INITIAL
               INCUBATION
               TEMP. I'd
                 XX.X
                               INCUBATION TIME
                                (24-HR TIME)
                              START
                              (KH:MM)
            DURATION OF
            INCUBATION
             (HH:MM)
                            lg.'3Q ZZ
                                                       oo
     SAMPLE ID
     (BARCODE)
                   FINAL O,
                    (MG/LT
                    XXJ<
  243663
                   7,5
INITIAL  P.O.   AT   1000'ELEVATION
                    7.2
                                     FINAL    0.0.   AT  2200'  -  METER  CALIBRATED
   243665
                    r.i
  FOR EACH  ELEVATION
   2^3667
                    7.0
  CO//TROL
                                       OXYGEN METER CALIBRATION INFORMATION
 MEMBRANE CHECK
                                            ELECTRONIC ZERO
 CALIBRATION CHAMBER TEMPERATURE:
                                                     SATURATED O2 @ @ TEMP.:
 STATION ELEVATION (FROMTOPO. MAP OR ALTIMETER):
                                                     ELEVATION CORRECTION FACTOR:
 Th» caSbtatlcxi value Is obtained by multiplying the saturated DO concentration times an
 dotation axrect'on laaor (obtained from the tables on the back ol the YSI meter). Adjust the
 meter reading to the calibration value.
                                                     CALIBRATION VALUE:
 Flag codes: K - no measurement or observation made; U = suspect measurement or observation; Q = unacceptable QC check associated with measurement; F1, F2, etc. =
 miscellaneous (lags assigned by each field crew. Explain all flags in comments section.
 Rev. 05/29/98 (strvlldm.98)
                                                                  FIELD MEASUREMENT FORM - STREAMS/RIVERS - 1
Figure 8-1.   Field Measurement Form (page 1), showing data for sediment metabolism samples.

-------
                           SEDIMENT METABOLISM
                           SITE ID:
                               DATE: j I S 198
                           SAMPLE TYPE: (m) R2 R3 R4 R5
                                   229000
SEDIMENT METABOLISM
SITE ID: ORRV_9 5.-_2._9_5.

    DATE: JJ_/_S_/98
SAMPLE TYPE: R1 (p3 R3 R4 R5
                                                                  229001
                           SEDIMENT METABOLISM
                           SITE ID: ORRV _i JL-.13_ 3_
                              DATE: g / £~I98
                           SAMPLE TYPE: R1  R2
-------
Jl    -

-------
                                 Section  9
               Benthic  Macroinverfebrates
              Donald J. Klemm1, James M. Lazorchak1, and David V. Peck2
     Benthic macroinvertebrates inhabit the sedi-
ment or live on the bottom substrates of lakes,
streams, andrivers. Themacroinvertebrate assem-
blages in rivers reflect the overall biological integ-
rity of the benthic community such thatmonitoring
these assemblages is useful in assessing the status
of the water body and monitoring trends. Benthic
communities respond differently to a wide array of
stressors. As aresult of this, it is often possible to
determine the type of stress that has affected a
benthic macroinvertebrate community (Plafkin et
aL, 1989; Klemm etal., 1990; BarbouretaL, 1999
). Because many macroinvertebrates have relatively
long life cycles of ayear or more and are relatively
immobile, macroinvertebrate community structure
isafunction of past environmental conditions.

     EMAP scientists are currently evaluating
two different approaches to developing ecologi-
cal indicators based on benthic invertebrate as-
 'U.S. EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory, Eco-
 logical Exposure Research Division, Ecosystems Research
 Branch, 26 W. Martin Luther King Dr., Cincinnati, OH
 45268.
 2U.S. EPA, National Health and Environmental Effects Re-
 search Laboratory, Western Ecology Division, Regional Ecol-
 ogy Branch, Corvallis, OR 97333.
semblages. The first is a multimetric approach,
where different structural and functional at-
tributes of the assemblage are characterized as
"metrics". Individual metrics that respond to dif-
ferent types of stressors are scored against ex-
pectations under conditions of minimal human
disturbance. The individual metric scores are
then summed into an overall index value that is
used to judge the overall level of impairment of
an individual stream reach. Examples of
multimetric indices based on benthic invertebrate
assemblages include Kerans and Karr (1994),
Fore etal. (1996), Barbour etal. (1995; 1996),
and Karr and Chu (1999).

     The second approach being investigated
is to develop indicators of condition based on
multivariate analysis of benthic assemblages and
associated abiotic variables. Examples of this
type of approach as applied to benthic inverte-
brate assemblages include RIVPACS (Wright
 1995), and BEAST (Reynoldson et aL, 1995).
Rosenberg and Resh (1993) present various
approaches to biological monitoring .using
benthic invertebrates, and Norris (1995) briefly
 summarizes and discusses approaches to ana-

-------
 lyzing benthic macroinvertebrate community
 data.
     Field procedures for collecting and pro-
 cessing benthic invertebrate samples from non-
 wadeable streams are presented in Section 9.1.
 These procedures are based upon draft proce-
 dures developed for the Mid-Atlantic Integrated
 Assessment (MAIA) study conducted in the
 eastern U.S. Section 9.2 contains an equipment
 and supply checklist for benthic invertebrate
 sampling.

 9.1   Sampling Procedures
 for Non-wadeable Streams
     The length of river reach established for
 larger non-wadeable streams and rivers is much
 larger than for wadeable streams, making a vi-
sual estimate of the number of riffle and pool
macrohabitat units impossible. In addition, mid
channel depths of larger streams and rivers will
make it impractical to collect kick net samples
from mid-river habitats. In non-wadeable
streams and rivers, samples are collected at each
of eleven transects established for physical habi-
tat characterization. At each transect, two kick
net samples are obtained from shallow area (<
1m) near the bank of the river. Kick net samples
collected from each transect are composited into
a single sample for the river; samples collected
from different macrohabitat types  are not
composited separately. Akick net modified for
use by one person is shown in Figure 9-1. In
addition to the mesh size used in the two EMAP
studies other mesh sizes such as 250 - 800 m
can be used depending upon the objectives of
               1.5 m long, 2-piece detachable handle
                         Mesh = 595/600
               Sewed End
                                                             30cm
                                                  Canvas Bottom Panel
Figure9-1.   Modified kick net. (Not drawn to scale.).

-------
the program and potential for clogging. For deep
rivers that are extremely difficult or hazardous
to obtain benthic samples with a kick net, a
ponar or core grab sample could be used in-
stead.

     In addition, two daytime drift net samples
are collected from as near to the downstream
end of the defined reach as is practical. The drift
net assemblies are positioned when the crew
drops off a vehicle at the take-out point,  and
are retrieved when the crew reaches the sam-
pling point in the boat.

9.1.1   Sample
Collection Using Kick
Nets

9.1.1.1   Selection of
Sampling Points
     Samples are collected from non-wadeable
streams during a downstream traverse of the
sample reach. At each transect location, locate
a suitable sampling point on the same side of
the river as fish sampling is conducted (Section
10). Locate the sampling point in an area away
from the river margin, but at a depth less than or
equal to 1 m.

9.1.1.2   Sample Collection
     At each sampling point, obtain TWO kick
net samples using the procedures presented in
Table 9-1 (if the sampling point is located in a
riffle or glide macrohabitat) or Table 9-2 (if the
sampling point is located in a pool macrohabitat).
If there is insufficient flow to sample a transect
with the modified kick net following this proto-
col, spend about 60 seconds hand picking a
sample from approximately 0.25 m2 of substrate
at the station and combine it with samples from
other transects in the bucket. If there is too little
water to collect the sample with the kick net,
randomly pick up 10 rocks, and pick and wash
the organisms off of them into the bucket. Keep
a note of this on the field sheets and in all data-
bases generated from sites where more than one
transect has to be sampled in this manner. Re-
sults may show a bias due to the larger organ-
isms picked in this approach.

9.1.2   Sample

Processing:  Kick Net

Samples
    After all transects have been sampled, the
composite sample is processed as described in
Table 9-3. Sample labels to put on and in the
jar are shown in Figures 9-2 and 9.5, respec-
tively, and the sample collection form is shown
in Figure 9-4. Ensure the sample is preserved
and that the jar is completely sealed. Place the
sealed sample jar upright in a cooler or plastic
bucket for transport. Blank labels for use inside
of sample jars are presented in Figure 9-5. These
can be copied onto waterproof paper.

9.1.3   Description  of
Drift Nets  and Habitat
Sampled
    Drift nets are stationary nets designed to
sample organisms from flowing waters such as
streams and rivers. The drift net sampler is de-
signed to obtain qualitative and quantitative
samples of macroinvertebrates which either ac-
tively or passively enter the water column from
all types of substrates in flowing water with a
velocity of not less than 0.05 m/s. They can be
used to capture organisms at and below the sur-
face of the water. Drift nets can be used indi-
vidually or in groups with nets strung out side
by side or arranged vertically.

-------
Table 9-1.  Collecting Kick Net Samples From Non-wadeable Streams: Riffle/Run Macrohabitats.

 1.  Attach the four foot handle to the kick net. Care should be exercised to be sure the handle is on tight or
    the net might become twisted hi strong current or while dragging it through the water causing the loss
    of part of the sample.
2.  Position the sampler quickly and securely on the river bottom with the net opening upstream so as to
    eliminate gaps under the frame. Reposition the sampling point to avoid large rocks that prevent the
    sampler from seating properly.
3.  The sampling area (or quadrate) has a width and length equal to the width of the net frame (0.5 m) or a
    total area-0.25m2.
4.  Hold the sampler in position on the substrate and check the quadrat directly in front of the net for heavy
    organisms, such as mussels and snails. Place these organisms into the net.
5.  Continue to hold the sampler securely while vigorously kicking the substrate within the quadrat for 20
    seconds (use  stopwatch).
 6.  After 20 seconds, hold the net in place with the knees. Pick up any loose rocks in the quadrat and scrub
    off organisms in front of the net. Place any additional mussels and snails found in the quadrat in the net.
 7.  Remove the net from the water with a quick upstream motion to wash the organisms to the bottom of the
    net. Immerse the net several times to remove fine sediments and to concentrate organisms at the end of
    the net. Avoid having any water or additional material enter the mouth of the net during this operation.
 8.  Transfer the contents of the net into a plastic bucket half filled with water by inverting the net into the
    bucket.
 9.  Inspect the net for clinging organisms. Use forceps and remove any organisms found and place them
    into the bucket.
 10. Carefully inspect large objects (rocks, sticks, leaves, etc.) in the bucket. Wash off any organisms, then
    discard the objects. Remove as much detritus, sediment, and debris as possible without losing any
    organisms.
 11. See Table 9.3 for processing kick net samples.
     The drift net consists of a bag of nylon or
nylon monofilament frame. The standard drift
net is approximately 1 m (39.3") long and has a
closed end. The drift net open end is 30.48 cm
(12") x 45.72 cm (18"). The net frame is made
of stainless steel rods or P VC pipe. The frame
of the drift net is anchored into the river bed by
a pair of steel rods, 15.46 cm (18") long or can
be attached to a "floating drift assembly" device
(Figure 9-3), Wildlife Supply Co., 1999-2000.
Drift net frames can also be fitted anteriorly with
a mouth reducing rectangular plexiglass enclo-
sure (Rutter and Ettinger, 1977;Wefring, 1976)
to increase filtration efficiency. For EMAP,
MAIA sampling in Regions 2,3, and 4 rivers, a
drift net with 600 m mesh openings has been
used in conjunction with the floating drift assem-
bly device (other mesh sizes such as 250 - 800
m can be used depending upon the objectives
of the program and potential for clogging).

     The drift collection usually represents a
wide spectrum of the habitats found in a river.
Drift nets are effective for the collection of emi-
grating and dislodged benthic macroin-verte-
brates drifting in the water column of flowing
streams and rivers. Sampling efficiency of this
gear is a function of current velocity and sam-
pling period. Data collected can be used to es-
timate macroinvertebrate drift densities and rates
(individuals per unit volume of water per unit
time passing through the net). However, this re-
quires an estimate of the volume of water pass-
ing through the sampling nets. This is accom-
plished by averaging repeated measures of the
water velocity at the mouth of the drift net and
recording the total time the drift net is set in the



-------
I Table9-2.  CollectingKickNetSamplesFromNon-wadeableStream:PooI\GlideMacrohabitats.
      Attach the four foot handle to the kick net. Care should be exercised to be sure the handle is on tight or
      the net might become twisted in strong current or while dragging it through the water causing the loss
    ~;jaf part of the sample.
    _ The sampling area (or quadrate) has a width and length equal to the width of the frame (0.5 m) or a total
    " area=0.25m 2.
      Inspect the river bottom within the  quadrat for any heavy organisms, such as mussels and snails.
      Remove and place these organisms into the net.
      Disturb the substrate within the quadrat by kicking vigorously with the feet. Drag the net repeatedly
      and continuously through the disturbed area just above the bottom whole continuing to kick for 20
      seconds (use a stopwatch).  Keep moving the net so that the organisms trapped in the net will not
      escape.
    _ Remove the net from the water with a quick upstream motion to wash the organisms to the bottom of the
    ~ net. Immerse the net several times to remove fine sediments and to concentrate organisms at the end of
     - the net. Avoid having any water or additional material enter the mouth of the net during this operation.
      Hold the net so that the mouth is out of the water and the net is partially submerged. Pick up any loose
    "rocks hi the quadrat and rub or brush any organisms found on them into the net. Also recheck the
      quadrat for any additional snails or clams and place them in the net.
      Transfer the contents of the net into a bucket half filled with water by inverting the net into the bucket.
      Inspect the net for clinging organisms. Use forceps and remove any organisms found and place them in
    -- the bucket
      Carefully inspect large objects (rocks, sticks, leaves, etc.) in the bucket. Wash any organisms found
    — into the bucket, then discard the objects. Remove as much detritus, sediment, and debris as possible
    _._ without losing any organisms.
    .  See Table 9.3 for processing kick net samples.
 water column. Repeated measures of the water
 velocity are most representative of the sample
 period if they are taken when the nets are first
 set and just prior to removal of the net from the
 system.

      Limitations and hazards of daytime driftnet
 sampling include:

    •  Unknown where organisms come
       from; terrestrial species may make up
       part of sample in summer and periods
       of wind and rain. It is not the ideal time
       of day for sampling drifting benthic
       macroinvertebrates.

    . •  Installing and retrieving drifts from
       areas of swift current can be hazardous.
       Placing nets in highly visible areas may
       result in tampering or theft. Boats and
       skiers may damage drift net assemblies.
9.1.3.1   Drift Net Sampling

Procedures

     ForEMAP, MAIApilot studies of Regions
2,3, and 4 rivers, install two drift nets at transect
K (See Table 9-4), one about 25 cm from the
bottom substrate and one about 10 cm below
the surface in water not exceeding 3 m in depth,
using cable and anchor attached to a "floating
drift assembly" device. The installation proce-
dure for drift nets is presented in Table 9-4. In-
stall the net in an area of river that is receiving
part of the main channel flow, but that can be
safely accessed by wading. A location that you
would consider to provide a representative
water chemistry sample is probably also suit-
able for positioning a drift net. Do not use drift
nets if the current velocity at the sampling point
is less than 0.05 m/s or more than same rate.

-------
 Table9-3.  ProcessingKickNetSamples: Non-wadeableStreams.
 1.  Fill out a sample label for the composite samples. Attach the label to a 500-mL (or 1 -L) plastic jar. If the
    sample contains alarge volume of material, complete a sample label for additional containers and attach
    them. Make sure the barcode numbers on each label are identical.
 2.  Hand-pick large organisms from the bucket containing the composite sample and place them into the
    appropriately labeled jar.
 3.  Hand-pick large rocks and sticks remaining in the bucket. Use 'a small brush to scrub debris from them
    back into the bucket. Discard the rock or stick.
 4.  Empty the contents of the bucket into a sieve (600 m) mesh, and then transfer into the labeled jar. NOTE:
    Do not fill the jar more than ° full of material. If necessary, use a larger jar and/or distribute the sample
    among two or more labeled jars. Rinse residue from the bucket into the jar using a wash bottle and a small
    volume of water.
 5.  Add 95% ethanol to each labeled jar so that the final concentration of ethanol is at least 70%. If there is
    a small amount of water in the sample, it may not be necessary to fill the jar entirely full to reach a 70%
    concentration. It is  very important that sufficient ethanol be used to reach a 70%  concentration.
    Otherwise, the organisms will not be properly preserved.
 6.  Place the waterproof label with the following information inside each jar:
        •  Stream Number                              •  Date of collection
        •  Type of sampler and mesh size used            •  Collectors initials
        •  Habitat type (riffle/run, pool/glide)              •  Number of transects composited
        •  Name of stream
 7.  Rinse the bucket well to eliminate any residue.
 8.  Complete the Sample Collection Form and on the jars (1 of 2,2 of 2, etc). Record the barcode number of
    the composite sample, and the habitat type (shore). If more than one container was required for a
    sample, record the number of containers  on the collection form. Replace the lid on the jar. Seal the
    container lid(s) with plastic or electrician's tape. Also note any peculiarities associated with a particular
    samples by using a flag code and/or a written comment on the collection form.
                COMPOSITE BENTHOS
               SITE ID: ORRV_?; Z_-4_3L
                    DATE: JL/_j5L/98_
                   HABITAT:   Shore  (Drift"
                          229001
 COMPOSITE BENTHOS
SITE ID: ORRV .^ _S-_3.£?_i.
     DATE:
    HABITAT:
                    Drift
                                                                229000
                                  COMPOSITE BENTHOS

                                  SITE ID: ORRVJ? JL--3.33.
                                       DATE: g/S'/QS

                                      HABITAT: (Shore)  Drift

                                  BARCODE:  22100Q
Figure 9-2.   Completed labels for benthic macroinvertebrate samples. The bottom label is used if
more than one jar is required for a composite sample.


-------
        Net
             Shallow Set
                                 Pentagonal Floating PVC Frame
- Chain

 Flow
                                            U-Shaped
                                            PVC Pipe
                                            Net
                                                      Deep Set
Figure 9-3.  Shallow and deep set drift net assemblies. (Not drawn to scale).
Measure the current velocity at the entrance to
each net at the time the net is installed and again
when it is retrieved. Velocity is determined by
timing a neutrally buoyant object over a known
distance or using a flow meter.

9.1.3.2  Processing and

Preservation of Drift Samples

     After retrieving the drift nets from the
stream or river, process the sample as described
in Table 9-5. Sample labels are shown in Figure
9-2, and the sample collection form is shown in
Figure 9-4. Note that the material from the two
nets is combined to yield a single composite
sample of drift for the stream or river. Blank
            labels for use inside of sample jars are presented
            in Figure 9-5. These can be copied onto water-
            proof paper.

            9.1.3.3   Maintenance of the
            Drift Nets

                 After the drift sample has been processed
            and preserved, thoroughly wash the drift nets
            with water from the stream or river to remove
            all debris, etc.

            9.2  Equipment  Checklist

                 A list of all equipment and supplies required
            to conduct benthic invertebrate sampling is pre-
            sented in Figure 9-6.

-------
                                                                            Reviewed by (initial)
                              SAMPLE COLLECTION FORM - RIVERS
 SITE NAME:  BEAVE"R
                                                   DATE:
                                                         / 5   1 98  VISIT  DO gl 1 D2  D3
SITE ID:   ORRV  ^ £ - *? *?  9
                                           TEAM ID (X):
                                                       D2  D3   D4  D5   D6  D7   D8
                                    COMPOSITE BENTHOS SAMPLES
  BANK SAMPLED (LOOKING DOWNSTREAM):   §3 LEFT     Q ™GHT
           SAMPLED
          (BARCODE)
                              HABITAT
                            (CIRCLE ONE)
                                    NO.
                                  OF JARS
FLAG
                                                        S = SHORE
                                                                     M = MID-CHANNEL
                                                                                       D « DRIFT
                                                                        COMMENTS
2436 IZ
                                 M
                                                                            £D AT LAUhlCft
      24-36
                                                     NO SHORE KICK AT  TffAMSECTS
                                                                  =>7DO  DEEP
     STATION (CIRCLE IF DONE)
          SHORE KICK
         MID-CHANNEL
                        s

                        M
                                                                    s
                                                                    M
                                                                                             S

                                                                                             M
 DRIFT
  NET
                           TRANSECT
                                                              TIME (24-HR CLOCK)
                                                          START
                                                                                     • VELOCITY
                                                                                     •  (FT/SEC)
                                                                                       XX.XX
      DB-DC DP DE  DF  DG DH Pi DJ DK   pCf ;
                                                                       )
-------
      BENTHOS IDENTEEICATION
      Site Number	
      Stream	
      Collection Date.
      Sampler	
      Habitat Type
      Collector(s) _
      Number of Transects
BENTHOS IDENTIFICATION
Site Number	
Stream	
Collection Date.
Sampler	
Habitat Type
Collector(s) _
Number of Transects
      BENTHOS IDENTIFICATION
      Site Number	
      Stream	
       Collection Date.
       Sampler	
       Habitat Type
       Collector(s) _
       Number of Transects
BENTHOSIDENTIFICATION
Site Number	
Stream	
Collection Date
Sampler	
Habitat Type
Collector(s)  '
Number of Transects
Figure 9-5.   Blank labels for benthic invertebrate samples.

-------
Table9-4.  CollectionProceduresforDriftNetSamples: Non-wadeableStreams.

NOTE: Do not use drift nets for large rivers with currents less than 0.05 m/s.

Installation and Retrieval of Drift Nets:

1.   Ideally, the net should be installed at the downriver end of the designated sampling reach (transect K in
    non-wadeable streams). In practice, the net is installed at either the takeout point (1 st choice) or put-in
    point, whichever is located closer to the designated sampling reach. Mark the nearest transect on the
    Sample Collection Form and note if the drift net location is outside of the designated sampling reach in
    the Comments section of the collection form.
2   Locate the drift net assembly in an area receiving the main flow of the river (i.e., avoid backwaters, river
    margins, eddies, etc.)
3.   Anchor the net assembly using anchors and cables.
4.   RecordtheSTARTTIMEofsamplingontheSampleCollectionForm.
5.   Measure the current velocity at the entrance of the net, using the neutrally buoyant object technique (or
    a flow meter) as follows:
        A. Measure out a straight segment of the river reach just upstream of the drift net location in which
           an object can float relatively freely and passes through within about 10 to 30 seconds.
        B. Select an object that is neutrally buoyant, like a small rubber ball or an orange; it must float, but
           very low in the water. The object should be small enough that it does not "run aground" or drag
           bottom.
        C Time the passage of the object through the defined river segment 3 times. Record the length of
           the segment and each transit time in the Comments section of the Sample Collection Form.
6.   The net assembly should be left in the river for at least 3 hours or as long as possible at the site. Upon
    return to the net location after floating the designated sampling reach, retrieve the net assembly from the
    water, taking  care not to disturb the bottom upstream of the net.
7.   Record the END TIME on the Sample Collection Form.
8.   Determine the current velocity again as described in Step 5 above. Record the  three "final" velocity
    estimates in the Comments section of the collection form. Calculate the average velocity from the initial
    and final values (6 measurements). Record the average velocity in the "Velocity" field of the Sample
    Collection form. Exclude any gross outlier values from the computation of the average velocity.
9.   Note in the comments section  if the net is badly clogged, which may occur at locations with high
    discharge and/or where the float time of the sampling reach is long.


-------
|i Table 9-5.  Procedures for Processing Drift Net Samples: Npn-wadeable Streams.

(;: 1.   Fill out a sample label for the composite drift sample. Attach the label to a 500-mL or 1 -L plastic jar. If the  ;
i-    sample contains a large volume of material, complete a sample label for additional containers and attach  \
t _  it to a second jar. Make sure the barcode numbers on each label agree.                              ]
}|:2.   Concentrate the material in each net in one corner by swishing up and down in the stream or river. Wash  ;
IL    the material into a bucket half-filled with  water. Use a wash bottle and/or forceps to remove as much
|E    material as possible from the net.                                                       • .  -     i
|- 3.   Repeat Step 1 for the second drift net. The contents of both nets are combined into a single bucket.    i
p,4.   After the two net samples are combined into a single bucket, pour the composite sample into a sieving  ;
1%1  bucket (595 micron mesh).
US   Hand-pick large organisms from the sieve  bucket containing the composite sample and place them into  '
C .    the appropriately labeled jar.                                                                   !
p,6   Hand-pick large rocks and sticks remaining in the bucket. Use a small brush to scrub debris from them  '.
]g;    back into the bucket. Discard the rock or stick.            ,                                       j
p7.   Lightly "tapping" the bottom of the sieve bucket on the surface of the stream or river helps to remove  ;
|~    fine material. Remove as much material as possible using the sieve bucket.
I- 8.   Empty the contents of the bucket into the labeled jar. If necessary, distribute the sample among two or
g^r:  more labeled jars. Rinse residue from the bucket into the jar using a wash bottle and a small volume of
f--~~  water.     '  .   '-    •'"'".'•       -'•'/•   "        .-.....•.   ..  ., •  :. .:.   ..  .   ......  _, •   ,
jr::- —   - .      -           .           ' -      •..-.• (.,-.         .   . •  •••-.'---'  '•'...- .  ..  '  .   : •   .-•.--..-  1
p9.   Add 95% ethanol to each labeled jar so that the final concentration of ethanol is at least 70%. If there is  ^
jEc:- a small amount of water in the sample, it may not be necessary to fill the jar entirely full to reach a 70%
|^    concentration.  It is very important  that  sufficient ethanol be used to reach a 70% concentration.
      Otherwise, the organisms will not be properly preserved.
      Place a waterproof label with the following information inside each jar:
lO.
                                                  Date of collection
                                                  Collectors initials
                                                  Number of transects composited
            Stream Number
          • Type of sampler and mesh size used
          • Habitat type (drift net)
          • Name of stream
      Rinse the bucket well to eliminate any residue.
       Complete the Sample Collection Form. Record the barcode number of the composite sample, and the
      habitat type (drift).  If more than one container was required for a sample, record the number of
      containers on the collection form and on the jars. Replace the lid on the jar, and seal the container lid(s)
      with plastic or electrician's tape. Also note any peculiari ties associated with a particular samples by
      using a flag code and/or a written comment on the collection form.
                                                               '   •"               "

-------
Qty.
Equipment and Supplies for Benthic Macroinvertebrates

                    Item
1
1
1
2
1
2pr.
1
1
1
12
2
Igal
2pr.
1
6
6
2
1

Ipkg.
4rolls
1
1
1
Ipkg.
1 copy
1 set
Modified kick net with 595 m mesh openings and closed bag (Wildco #425-150-595)
Handle for Kick Net Sampler, four foot length
Floating drift net assembly (PVC frame, chains, snap-clips, and carabineers)
Drift nets, 595 m mesh, closed end
Sieve-bottomed bucket, 595- m mesh openings (optional)
Watchmakers' forceps
Wash bottle, 1-L capacity
Small spatula, spoon, or scoop to transfer sample
Funnel, with large bore spout
Sample jars, plastic with screw caps, 500 mL and 1 L capacity, suitable for use with
ethanol
Buckets, plastic, eight to ten quart capacity
95% ethanol, in a proper container
Rubber gloves, heavy rubber
Coolef (with suitable absorbent material) for transporting ethanol and samples
Sample labels, pre-numberedbarcoded, stick-on type
Sample labels, blank, stick-on type (for additional containers)
Sample Collection Form for site
Field check list sheet
Soft (#2) lead pencils
Clear waterproof tape strips
Plastic electrical tape
Knife, pocket, with at least two blades
Stopwatch
Pocket-sized field notebook (optional)
Kim wipes in small self-sealing plastic bag
Field operations and methods manual
Laminated sheets of procedure tables and/or quick reference guides for benthic
macroinvertebrates



























Figure 9-6.   Equipment and supply checklist for benthic macroinvertebrates.
 9.3   Literature Cited
Allan  J.D.  and  E. Russek.  1985.  The
    quantification of stream drift. Can J. Fish.
    Aquat. Sci. 42(2)210-215.

ASTM.I996a. Standard practice for collecting
    benthic macroinvertebrates with driftnets.
    ASTM Designation: D 455-85. Annual
                          Books of ASTM Standards. Pesticides;
                          Resource Recovery;  Hazardous  Sub-
                          stances and Oil Spill Responses; Waste
                          Disposal; Biological Effects. Vol.1104,
                          ASTM,  100  Barr  Harbor Drive, West
                          Conshohocken, PA. pp.89-91.

                       ASTM. 1996b. Standard guide for selecting
                          stream-net sampling devices for collecting

-------
   benthic macroinverte-brates. ASTM Des-
   ignation: D 4556-85. Annual Books of
   ASTM Standards. Pesticides; Resource
   Recovery; Hazardous Substances and Oil
   Spill Responses; Waste Disposal; Biologi-
   cal Effects. Vol.1104, ASTM, 100 Barr
   Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA.
   pp.78-88.

Barbour, M.T., J.B. Stribling, and J.R. Karr.
   1995.  The multimetric  approach  for
   establishing biocriteria and measuring
   biological condition. Pages 69-80 In: W.S.
   Davis  and  T.P. Simon  (eds.) Biological
   assessment and criteria: tools for water
   resource planning and decision-making.
   Lewis Publishers, Chelsea, MI

Barbour, M.T., J. Gerritsen, G.E. Griffith, R.
   Frydenborg, E. McCarron, J.S. White, and
   M.L. Bastian. 1996. A framework for
   biological criteria for Florida streams using
   benthic macroinvertebrates. Journal of the
   North  American benthological Society
   15(2): 185-211.

Barbour, M.T., J. Gerritsen, B.D. Snyder, and
   J.B. Stribling. 1999. Rapid bioassessment
   protocols for use in wadeable streams and
   rivers: periphyton, benthic macroinverte-
   brate, and fish. EPA/841/B-99/002. U.S.
   Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
   Water, Washington, D.C.

Fore, L.S., J.R. Karr, and  R.W. Wisseman.
    1996. Assessingn invertebrate responses to
   human activities, evaluating alternative
   approaches. Journal of the North American
   Benthological Society 15(2):212-231.

Karr, J.R. andE.W. Chu. 1999. Restoring life in
   running waters. Island Press, Washington,
   D.C., 206 pp.

 Kerans, B.L. and J.R. Karr. 1994. A benthic
   index of biotic integrity (B-IBI) for rivers of
   the Tennessee Valley. Ecological Applica-
   tions 4:768-785.

Klemm, D.J., P.A. Lewis, F. Fulk, J.M.
   Lazorchak. 1990. Macroinvertebrate field
   and laboratory methods for evaluating the
   biological integrity of surface waters. EPA/
   600/4-90/030. U.S. Environmental Pro-
   tection Agency, Cincinnati, OH 45268.

Norris, R.H. 1995. Biological Monitoring: the
   dilemma of data analysis. Journal of the
   North  American Benthological Society
   14:440-450

Oregon Department of Environmental Quality.
   1997. Biological Assessment of Wadeable
   Streams of the Upper Deschutes River
   Basin:  Quality AssuranceProjectPlan

Plafkin, J.L., M.T. Barbour, K.D. Porter, S.K.
   Gross, and R.M. Hughes. 1989. Rapid
   Bioassessment Protocols for  Use  in
   Streams  and  Rivers: Benthic  Macro-
   invertebrates, and Fish. EPA/440/4-89/
   001. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
   Washington, D.C.

Reynoldson, T.B., R.C. Bailey, K.E. Day, and
   R.H. Norris. 1995. Biological guidelines for
   freshwater sediment based on  Benthic
   Assessment SedimenT (the BEAST) using
   a  multivariate approach for predicting
   biological state.  Australian Journal of
   Ecology 20:198-219.

Rosenberg,  D.M.  and V.H. Resh.  1993.
   Freshwater biomonitoring and benthic
   macroinvertebrates. Chapman and Hall,
   New York.

Rutter,  R.P.M. and Ettinger,  W.S.  1977.
   Method for sampling invertebrate drift from
   a  small boat. Progressive Fish-Culturist
   39(l):49-52.

Washington Department of Ecology. 1997.
   Biological Assessment ofWadeable Streams

-------
   of the  Chehalis  River Basin: Quality
   Assurance Project Plan.

Wefring, D.R.  1976.  A  method for the
   collection of invertebrate drift from large
   rivers.  M.A. Thesis,  St. Cloud State
   University, St. Cloud, MN.

Wildlife Supply Company. 1999.  Drift Net
   Floating Assemblies. 301 CassSt,Saginaw,
   MI, Page 7. (E-Mail: goto@wildco.com;
   WebSite: http://www.wildco.com), (phone:
   800-799-8301, FAX: 800-799-8115).

Wright, J.F. 1995. Development and use of a
   system for predicting the macroinvertebrate
   fauna in flowing waters. Australian Journal of
   Ecology 20:181-197.
  9-11:

-------
                               Section 10
                      Aquatic  Vertebrates
                     Frank H. McCormick1 and Robert M. Hughes2
     Vertebrate sampling is intended to collect
all but the rarest fish and aquatic amphibian spe-
cies in a reach and their abundances in the col-
lection should be relative to their proportionate
abundance in the water body. Data on species
richness, species guilds, abundance, size and
anomalies are used to assess ecosystem condi-
tion. In rivers, vertebrates are collected first.
Boat electrofishing equipment is used as the prin-
cipal sampling gear (Section 10.1.1), and only
the boat personnel are involved in collecting
aquatic vertebrates. In addition to gathering data
on the assemblage, fish specimens are retained
for analysis of tissue contaminants (Section 11).

10.1  Sample  Collection
     Depending on the survey region, rivers are
sampled along one bank for a distance equal to
either 40 or 100 times the wetted width  in the
'U.S. EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory,
Ecological Exposure Research Division, 26 W. Martin
Luther King Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45268.
2Dynamac Internationa! Corp., 200 SW 35th St.,
Corvallis, OR 97333.
vicinity of the point of entry. The mean channel
width is measured with a laser range finder and
estimated from maps and at the top of the reach.
In the relatively fast, cold, oligotrpphic, or spe-
cies-depauperate rivers of some regions, lower
total fish catches and efficiency of capture (com-
pared with those in relatively slow,  warm,
eutrophic, or species-rich rivers) necessitate a
greater sampling reach length. To capture a suf-
ficient number offish in rivers of some regions,
sample reaches 100 Channel-Widths long may
be specified for regional surveys, based largely
upon fish capture requirements. River reaches
40 channel widths long are specified in the Mid-
Atlantic region, for example, whereas 100 chan-
nel-width long reaches are specified in Pacific
Northwest rivers.

10.1.1   Electrofishing
    Because vertebrates are collected using
electrofishing units, safety procedures must be
followed at all times (refer to Section 2). Pri-
mary responsibility for safety while electrofishing
rests with the crew leader. Electrofishing units
have a high voltage output and may deliver a
fatal electrical shock. While electrofishing, avoid

-------
contact with the water unless sufficiently insu-
lated against electrical shock and, do not touch
objects outside the boat. Use watertight rubber
linesman's gloves. If gloves develop a leak or
become wet inside, use another pair or stop fish-
ing until they are repaired and thoroughly dry.
Avoid contact with the anode and cathode at all
times due to the potential shock hazard. At no
time while the electrofisher is on should a team
member reach into the water for any reason. If
it is necessary for a team member to reach into
the water to pick up a fish or something that has
been dropped, do so only after the electrical
current has been turned off. Do not electrofish
when navigating major rapids and wait for the
second boat to clear them. Do not resume
electrofishing until allnontarget individuals are
clear of the electroshock hazard or obstacle.
The boat units have three kill switches. Insure
that these workbefore fishing. Do not make any
modifications to the electrofishing unit that in-
terrupt the current or that would make it impos-
sible to turn off the electricity.

     Crew members must complete CPR and
first aid courses. They should be strong swim-
mers and, as appropriate, complete a white
water rescue course. Wear a life jacket when in
 a boat and avoid operating electrofishing equip-
ment within 20 feet of nontarget organisms. Dis-
 continue activity during thunderstorms, heavy
 rain or if the top or inside of the boat is wet.
 Crew members should keep each other in con-
 stantview or communication while electrofishing.
 For each site, know the location of the nearest
 hospital with a defibrillation unit. Although the
 crew leader has authority, each crew member
 has the responsibility to question and modify an
 operation or decline participation if it is unsafe.
 Use hand signals to communicate direction and
 power on or off because of generator noise, and
 avoid colliding with obstacles overhead and in
the water. Rest if the team becomes fatigued,
and drink lots of water.

     Gasoline is extremely volatile and flam-
mable. Its vapors readily ignite on contact with
heat, spark or flame. Never attempt to refill the
generator while it is running. Always allow the
generator to cool before refilling. Keep
gasoline out of direct sunlight to reduce volatil-
ization and vapor release. Always wear gloves
and safety glasses when handling gasoline. Keep
gasoline only in approved plastic containers and
store in a tightly closed container.

     Boat electrofishing sampling procedures
are presented in Table 10-1. Record informa-
tion on the Vertebrate Collection Form as shown
in Figure 10-1. If the river cannot be sampled
by electrofishing, complete the "NOT FISHED"
field on the form. Select the initial voltage based
on the measured conductivity of the river (see
Section 5). Select the initial frequency based on
the expected size offish. If fishing success is
poor, increase the pulse width first and then the
voltage. Increase the frequency last to minimize
mortality or injury to large fish.

     The electrofishing boat is a 14 -16 ft. in-
flatable raft or John boat modified for two per-
 sons and all fishing equipment Boat configura-
tion consists of a frame mounted generator and
 electrofishing control box, port and starboard
 cathodes, and two anodes extending out over
 the bow. Alternatively, the John boat itself may
 be used as the cathode. The boat is maneuvered
 by one operator seated near the stern, and the
 vertebrates are collected and identified by one
 netter operating from the bow. Prior to fishing,
 determine that the netter is wearing gloves and
 both team members are clear of all electrodes.
 Wear polarized sunglasses to aid vision. Start
 the electrofisher, set the timer to zero, and de-
 press the foot pedal to begin fishing. Starting at
 the top of the reach and along the designated


-------
I Table 10-1. Procedure to Collect Aquatic Vertebrates by Boat Electrofishing.
|p Onshore at launch site

t     a. Check generator oil and fill tank with gas (wipe up any spillage).
f      b. Clip cathodes to sides of frame & connect their cables to the cathode outlet (if the fishing site is
ig        distant, keep electrodes in boat).
      c. Connect anode cables to outlets (if the fishing site is distant, keep anodes on poles in the boat).
      d. Connect generator and pulsator.
      e. Confirm that all gear for the day and a spare vehicle key are in the boat.
      f. Put on a life jacket and gloves.
      g. Go to step 2 & 3 below to assess electrofisher performance.
fn.
 "
*_..
s"
r.2.
£[:_-
ir
jfi
pr-
Complete the header information on a copy of the Vertebrate Collection Form. Indicate the transect
being sampled in the "TRANSECT" field on the form.
Select river bank for fishing (left for odd numbered sites, right for even) unless immediate hazards or
obstructions preclude this. Stay along the selected bank throughout the day's fishing to the degree it is
safely navigable; do not switch back and forth between banks unless the river aspect is unchanging
and  the  selected  side  is not representative (e.g., very sunny and shallow) of both. Using the
rangefinder, determine a downstream point that is 10 mean channel widths distant (this is the profile
length). Record this distance on the field sheet.
Check all electrical connections and potential conductors and place  the anodes and cathodes in the
water. Fill livewell and put on linesman gloves. Verify that all electrical switches are off, that all non-
target organisms are clear of the water or two boat lengths away, and  that boat surfaces are dry.
Start generator, switch to pulsed DC, a frequency of 30 pps, low range and 40%. Increase % (voltage) as
needed to roll fish. If success is poor, reduce %, switch to high range, and again increase % as needed.
If effectiveness is still low, switch to 60 pps and repeat the process. If the current (amperage needle) is
reduced, switch back to low range to avoid overloading the generator. Switching should occur when
power is off. Netter activates safety switches and insures that when either is employed current ceases.
Verify that fish are rolled and relaxed but not rigid. Record settings on field sheet in comments section
and start cleared clocks.
With system activated and safety switches on, begin fishing downstream near shore. Maneuver the
boat or anode to cover a swath two-three meters wide, at an oars length from shore, near cover, and at
depths less  than three meters wherever possible. Do not place the  boat in danger in order to fish
particular habitats; cut the generator and stow the gear before negotiating hazards.
Place fish directly in livewell as soon as possible; do not hold them in the electrical field. Pay special
attention to netting small and benthic fishes as well as fishes that respond differently to the current-not
just the big fish that move to the surface. Try to net all fish seen, but in productive systems this will be
impossible. Do not chase individual fish with the boat or lean far out from the boat to net them. If benthic
fish are  being missed, pivot the  boat occasionally or hold the net behind the anode and  along the
bottom so some are collected.
Cease sampling at the end of the profile. Process the fish quickly and carefully, returning them to the
water unless they are vouchered. Be sure that the data sheet is completed accurately and completely,
and that voucher specimens are taken. Record the "Total Shock Time," "TOTAL FISHING TIME," and
"SHOCK DISTANCE" on the Vertebrate Collection Form. If no aquatic vertebrates were  collected,
complete the "NONE COLLECTED" field on the Vertebrate Collection Form.
Complete field collections and field sheets for other indicators taken at the end of the profile. Return to
step 1  for each of the subsequent 9 profiles, but begin downstream from where fish were released.
  shoreline, fish in a downriver direction. Adjust
  voltage and output according to sampling ef-
  fectiveness and incidental mortality to specimens.
                                                   The netter uses an insulated dip net to re-
                                              trieve stunned individuals, which are then de-
                                              posited into a livewell for later processing (Sec-
                                              tion 10.2). Change the water in the livewell

-------

"o
CD
§?
Q_

CO
UJ
E
55
DC
DC
£
z
o
fc
LU


LU
l-
VERTEBRA






co
n
CM
n
o
n
i-
cn
$
<*
LU
°










LU
&.
III
Ul
CO
LU
i
^
III
oo
co
n
n
CO
n
10
n
n
CO
n
CM
n
i.
9
s









crl
i
ORRV _3.

Q
LU
K-
00
!
_j
n
n
5
±
n
6
2
LJ
LL
LU
n
LU
Q
D
Q
6
n
o
CO
n
m
^
fci
X.
i-
o
LU
CO



Lu
"
a
J
>-
Q

8
LU
1
Q
g
0

CO
1
E
|
NGTIME
X
co
LL
-i
g
t»

CO
c

fi
LU
i-
1
^
8

CO
i
g


Q
LU
1—
NONE COLLEC
D



Q
LU
X
CO
LL
H
o

n





O
to
N

(BARCODE)
Q
LU
Q.
s§








CO
LU
2
o
in
0-
CO












S
NUMBER OF
MORTALITIES
CO
LU
_J
Z
"E
T
Z

|

L NUMBER
<
^
h-



H
Z
8
UJ
d
o
o
i
z
^

COUNT

^
_i
P=






COMMON NAME


5PECIES CODE "


o
f
CC
0
—.
a:
o
r>
Q

• —
t-



=z
•£
I*1"


££^
LL-
ir
S
t

-j
_i
s
fi^




O
0
o
cr
^
•^
O
s9



~~
^





1
1

NcoAiy/c/
o




0
O
Q
c\{
*^o
0
ro>
=*-
d-




*





Q
o
t

a
N
N
fc
o




D
—
-J
^
N-)
^
CNl
*



^_
~



S"
1&
in
UJ
— V
g
-J

ArOMACR
L)




o
o
Q

^_
to
—
—




—



*2
\-^
8
5
^

LU
0
H
D-




















































































~1







s
o













m
U-

1
^
•F
§
1
K

LLJ
yj
u
d

&
£
Co
^X
U]
T

1
§
8
s
^c
i
z.




V)
in
t
n
E
^/
LfJ
^^
1
g
^J
1—
^
in
_J
y=
^?
*s?
Q
Q
m
-*
•z
•q:





















i
1
— i
»*





>.
i
§
t
s
^
&
Vij
w
^)
1

Ui
F
o:
^>>
°
<»

i
fc
~i
P
a
I
iu


^
Figure 10-1.   Vertebrate Collection Form.

-------
periodically to minimize mortality prior to pro-
cessing. If individuals show signs of stress (loss
of righting response, gaping, gulping air, exces-
sive mucus), stop and process them. This should
only be necessary on very warm days, in long
reaches, or if very large numbers of individuals
are collected. Electrofishmg may also need to
cease at times to immediately process and re-
lease specimens (e.g., listed species or large
game fish or if fish appear to be stressed due to
temperature and/or low DO) as they are netted
(see Section 10.2). If periodic processing is re-
quired, be sure to release individuals upriver and
away from the shoreline to reduce the likelihood
of collecting them again.

    At the completion of electrofishing each
profile, record the total operating time (shock
time) and total fishing time shown on the
electrofisher timer and the distance sampled by
electrofishing on the Vertebrate Collection Form
(Figure 10-2). If no aquatic vertebrates were
collected, indicate this on the form as shown in
Figure 10-2. During this project, specimens
should be processed after completion of every
transect when possible to provide data on catch
per unit effort.

10.2  Sample
Processing
    Sample processing involves tallying and
identifying fish, examining individual specimens
for external anomalies, obtaining length measure-
ments  from selected specimens, preparing
voucher specimens for taxonomic confirmation
and archival at a museum, and selecting speci-
mens to prepare samples for fish tissue contami-
nants (see Section 11). Process collections as
quickly as possible to minimize stress to live
specimens. The netter is responsible for identi-
fying, measuring, and examining aquatic verte-
brates contained in the livewell. At the end of
each profile, the netter processes fish from the
livewell while the operator records information
on the field data forms.

 10.2.1   Taxonomic

Identification and  Tally
    Table 10-2 presents the procedure for
identifying and tallying aquatic vertebrates.
Record identification and tally data for each
species on the Vertebrate Collection Form as
shown in Figure 10-1. Also record comments
and data for additional species on the Verte-
brate Collection Form. The team is to be pro-
vided with a list of standardized names (re-
quired) and species codes (optional) for aquatic
vertebrate species that are expected to be col-
lected (see Appendix C for an example).

    Taxonomic identification should be per-
formed only by trained ichthyologists familiar
with the fish species and other aquatic verte-
brate taxa of the region. Use taxonomic refer-
ence books and other materials that contain
species descriptions, ranges, and identification
keys to make species identifications in the field.
Where there are many individuals of easily iden1
tified species, processing may be facilitated by
keeping a tally count of the number of individu-
als of each species as it is taken from the livewell
and totaling the tally once processing is com-
plete.

    To minimize handling, process threatened
and endangered species first, and immediately
return all individuals to the river. If conditions
permit and stress to individuals will be minimal,
photograph such fish for voucher purposes
(Section 10.2.3). Photographs offish, fish too
large to voucher, fish anomalies, and the sites
themselves are very informative to those of us
who cannot be in the field. Be sure to photo-
graph the site number so we can link photos
and places. Indicate if photographed with an "F"
series flag for the species on page 1 of the Ver-

-------
Figure 10-2.   Fish length measurements (modified from Lagler, 1956).
I Table 10-2. Procedure To Identify, Tally, And Examine Aquatic Vertebrates.

  1.   Complete the header information on the form, then record the common name (from a standardized list)
i      andspeciescodeonthefirstblanklineinthe"SPECIMENS"sectionoftheVertebrateCollectionForm.
      If a species cannot be positively identified, assign it an' 'unknown'' species code from the list provided.
: 2.   Examine each fish individually; small-sized fish species may be handled in small manageable groups to
      speed processing.
1 3.   To minimize handling, threatened and endangered species should be identified, counted, and returned
!      immediately to the stream. If conditions permit and stress to individuals will be minimal, photograph fish
:      for voucher purposes. Indicate if photographed on data  sheet with flags and comments. If protected
      fish have died, they should be vouchered in formalin. At the earliest possible time, the appropriate state
      officials should be notified.   ;
^ 4   Sport fish and very large specimens should be identified, measured for total length to the nearest mm,
      examined for external anomalies, and released. Record all information on the vertebrate collection form.
«     Keep voucher specimens (up to 5) of smaller individuals of each species. If no smaller individuals are
      collected, photograph  each species and indicate so on the data form. Large, questionable species
      should be placed on ice and then frozen.
  5.   Identify all other species in the livewell.
  6.   Tally the number of individuals collected (use the "Tally" box on the Vertebrate Collection Form if
      necessary) and record the total number in the "Count" field on the form.
  7.   Measure the total length of the largest and smallest individual to provide a size range for the species.
      Record these values in the' 'Length'' area of the Vertebrate Collection Form.
  8.   Measure the total length of each individual (up to  30) and record the lengths in the boxes on the
      Vertebrate Length Recording Form (2 lines of boxes per species). For smaller species, measure and
      record lengths of a random set (up to 30) of the individuals collected.
  9.   Examine each individual for external anomalies and note the types of anomalies observed. After all of
      the individuals of a species have been processed, record the anomaly code and the total number of
      individuals affected in the "Anomalies" area of the Vertebrate Collection Form.
  10.  If  individuals have died due to the effects of electrofishing or handling, record the total number of
      mortalities on the Vertebrate Collection Form.
  11.  Follow the  appropriate procedure to prepare voucher specimens and/or to select specimens for tissue
      samples. Release all remaining individuals into the river.
  12.  Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for all other profiles.

-------
tebrate Collection Form (Figure 10-1) and
record a notation in the comments section. If
protected fish have died, they should be pre-
pared as voucher specimens and preserved in
formalin. Notify the appropriate state officials
as soon as possible.

     If a species cannot be confidently identi-
fied in the field (e.g., small individuals or sus-
pected hybrids), record it as an "unknown" spe-
cies on the Vertebrate Collection Form, using
one of the names (and code) provided for un-
knowns from the standardized list (see Figure
10-1 for an example). If possible, flag unknown
species with an "F" series flag and provide your
best guess at an identification in the comments
section of the form.

10,2.2   External

Examination  and

Length Measurements
     During the tallying procedure for each spe-
cies (Table 10-2), examine each individual for
the presence of external anomalies. External
anomalies may resultfrom sublethalenvironmen-
tal  or behavioral stress, diseases, and toxic
chemicals. Readily identified external anomalies,
include deformities, eroded fins, lesions, tumors,
diseases and parasites. Codes for different types
of anomalies are presented in Table 10-3.
Record the types of anomalies observed and
the number of individuals affected on the Verte-
brate Collection Form as shown in Figure 10-
1.

     Blackening and exopthalmia may occa-
sionally resultfrom electrofishing. Injuries due
to sampling are not included in the tally of ex-
ternal anomalies, but should be noted in the com-
ments section of the Vertebrate Collection Form
(Figure 10-1). Care should be taken in the early
stages of electrofishing to use the most effective
combination of voltage and pulse width while
minimizing injury to fish. Blackening from
electrofishing usually follows the myomeres or
looks like a bruise. If fish die due to the effects
of sampling or processing, record the number
for each species on the Vertebrate Collection
Form (Figure 10-1).

     For each species, use a measuring board
or ruler to determine the total length (Figure 10-
2) of the largest and smallest individuals (this is
a check on your measurements of total lengths
recorded on the Vertebrate Length Recording
Form [Figure 10-3]). Use of "tick marks" on
the length form will aid you in determining maxi-
mum and minimum lengths for a profile. Mea-
sure individuals on the right side, and slide fish
to touch the "Bump Board" on the measuring
board. Measure total length to the nearest milli-
meter (mm) and record these values on the Ver-
tebrate Collection Form as shown in Figure 10-
1. Measure the  total lengths of up to 30
individuals and record these values on the Ver-
tebrate Length Recording Form as shown in
Figure 10-3.

10.2.3  Preparing
Voucher Specimens
     With the exception of very large individu-
als and protected species, collect vouchers of
all species allowed by collecting permits to pro-
vide a permanent, archived, historical record of
fish collections. Prepare the voucher sample for
a site according to the procedure presented in
Table 10-4. Retain additional specimens of the
appropriate species for the fish tissue contami-
nants sample (Section 11). For each species,
voucher specimens take priority over specimens
for the tissue contaminants sample.

     Voucher specimens for each species are
counted and placed into individual nylon mesh
bags (1 bag per species). Nylon stockings or

-------
                Table 10^3. External Anomaly Categories and Codes.

                Categories                    Code
                     Definition
                Absent                        AB
                Blisters                        BL
                Blackening                     BK
                Extensive black spot disease      BS
                Cysts                         CY
                Copepod                      CO
                Deformities                    DE

                Eroded fins                    EF

                Eroded gills                    B3
                Fungus                        FU

                Fin anomalies                   FA
                Grubs                         WG
                Hemorrhaging                  HM
                Ich                           K
                Lesions                        IE

                Lice                           U
                Mucus                        MU
                None                         NO
                Other                         OT
                Scale anomalies                 SA
                Shortened operculum           • SO
                Tumors                        TU
                Leeches                       WL

                Exophthalmia                   EX
Absent eye, fin, tail.
In mouth, just under skin.
Tail or whole body with darkened pigmentation.
Small black cysts (dots) all over the fins and body.
Fluid-filled swellings; may be either small or large dots.
A parasitic infection characterized by a worm-like copepod
embedded in the flesh of the fish; body extends out and
leaves a sore/discoloration at base, may be in mouth gills,
fins, or anywhere on body.
Skeletal anomalies of the head, spine, and body shape;
amphibians may have extra tails, limbs, toes.
Appear as reductions or substantial fraying of fin surface
area.
Gill filaments eroded from tip.
May appear as filamentous or "fuzzy" growth on the fins,
eyes, or body.
Abnormal thickenings or irregularities of rays
White or yellow worms embedded in muscle or fins.
Red spots on mouth, body, fins, fin bases, eyes, and gills.
White spots on the fins, skin or gills.
Open  sores or exposed tissue; raised, granular, or warty
outgrowths.
Scale-like, mobile arthropods.
Thick and excessive on skin or gill, or as long cast from vent.
No anomalies present.
Anomalies or parasites not specified (Please comment).
Missing patches, abnormal thickenings, granular skin
Leaves a portion of the gill chamber uncovered
Areas of irregular cell growth which are firm and cannot be
easily broken open when pinched. (Masses caused by
parasites can usually be opened easily.)
Annelid worms which have anterior and posterior suckers.
They may attach anywhere on the body.
Bulging of the eye.
               parity hose may substitute for nylon bags. Each
               bag contains a numbered tag (Figure 10-4).
               Record the tag number and the number of indi-
               viduals vouchered for each species on the Ver-
               tebrate Collection Form as shown in Figure 10-
               1. Single specimens of easily identified and
               distinct species (e.g., sandroller, smallmouth
               bass) may be placed directly in the jar.
             The preceding steps are critical to en-
        able us to link a species' field and lab identi-
        fications with the number of individuals so
        named. If done correctly, we can estimate the
        number of individuals collected from the pro-
        portions in the bag, even if a presumed single
        species turns out to be 2 or 3 species (this is
        one reason we voucher as many specimens
        of a species as possible). It is useful to pre-
_


-------
Page
EAMS/RIVERS
VERTEBRATE COLLECTION FORM - S
          co
          UJ
          CD


          ill

          <

          LU

          co
          f*
co
DOE

                           en
                           3
                           m




                              to



                                    in
                                    CM
CAfOAAAcR
                                       ro
                                        R
                                        m
                                        m
                                          ex
                                           10
                                          a
                                           m
                                          CN
                                         31
                                          _
                                         -z.
                                          T
                            _J
                            _i
                                              en
                                              in
                                              CM
                                                in
                                                 rrt
                                                    in
                                                    ft!
                                                     5
                                                    \D
                                                    vD
COTTZZZZ
                                                          bo

                                                          CM
                                                             o
                                                             s.
                                                             g
                                                s
                                                                          I
                                                             
-------
'. Table 10-4. Guidelines and Procedures for Preparing Aquatic Vertebrate Voucher Specimens.

 Determine the voucher category of a species and the number of specimens to include in the voucher
 sample based on the following guidelines. NOTE: Category 3 species should be processed first.

     A  Category 1 — Large easily identified species OR adults may be difficult to identify OR the
     species is uncommon in that region. Examples include:
         Centrarchids
         Salmonids
Catostomids
Cyprinids
Ictalurids
         1.   Preserve 1-2 small (<150 mm total length) adult individuals per site plus 2-5 juveniles. If only
             large adults are collected, reserve smallest individuals until voucher procedure is complete
             and preserve ONLY if space is available.

             • NOTE: Individuals with a total length > 160 mm should be slit on the lower abdomen of
               the RIGHT side before placing them into the container.

         2.   Photograph if considered too large for the jar and place in bag on ice for freezing (Do not
             retain large gamefish). All photographs should include (1) a card with the stream ID, date,
             species code, and common name, and (2) a ruler or some other object of known length to
             provide some indication of the size of the specimen.

         3.   Retain additional individuals for the tissue contaminant sample.

     B.  Category 2—Small to moderate-sized fish OR difficult to identify species. Examples include:

         Lampreys           Minnows           Sculpins          Sticklebacks
         Sunfish

         1.   Preserve up to 20 adults and juveniles (ideally several per profile). If fewer than 20
             individuals are collected, voucher all of them. Voucher samples take priority over tissue
             contaminant sample.

         2.   Retain additional individuals for tissue contaminants sample.

     C  Category 3 — Species of "special concern." These are state or federally listed species.

         1.   Photograph as in Step 1.A.2 and then release immediately.

         2.   If specimens have died, proceed to Step 2 and include them as part of the voucher sample.
             Flag the species with an "F" series flag on the Vertebrate Collection Form and note it is a listed
             species in the comments section of the form. Notify the appropriate state officials as soon as
             possible.                                                                           :

         3.   Place the voucher specimens in a bucket with two carbon dioxide tablets (e.g., Alka Seltzer®),
             and a small volume of water. When specimens are anaesthetized, transfer them to a nylon
             mesh bag. Record the number of individuals included in the voucher sample in the
             "Vouchered Count" field for the species on the Vertebrate Collection Form.

         4.   Select a "FISH-BAG" tag that has the same ID number (barcode) as the voucher sample jar
             (Step 3). Record the tag number.in the "Tag No." field on the corresponding line for the
             species on the Vertebrate Collection Form. Place the tag into the mesh bag and seal.

                                                                                     (continued)

-------
 Table 10-4. Continued.
         5.  Immediately place the bag into a container (° or 1 gal plastic jar) large enough to hold all
            voucher specimens and half-filled with 10% formalin. Use additional jars if necessary to
            avoid tight packing and bending of voucher specimens.

         6.  Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for all species collected.

         7.  Prepare two' 'FISH-JAR'' labels (each having the same ID number [barcode]) by filling in the
            stream ID and the date of collection. Place one label into the sample jar. Cap tightly and seal
            with plastic electrical tape.

         8.  Attach the second label to the outside of the sample container by covering it with a strip of
            clear tape. Record the voucher sample ID number (barcode) on page 1 of the Vertebrate
            Collection Form. Record general comments (perceived fishing efficiency, missed fish, gear
            operation, suggestions) in blank lines of form. NOTE: If more than one jar is required, use
            labels that have the same ID number printed on them and flag.

         9.  Place the preserved sample in a suitable container with absorbent material. Store the
            container in a well-ventilated area during transport. Follow  all rules and regulations
            pertaining to the transport and shipment of samples containing 10% formalin.
               FISH - JAR
    SITE ID: ORRV_9  _£.-
             DATE:   % I  vJ/98
                      229001
                  FISH - BAG
                  III Illi llll
                  229001
Figure 10-4.   Completed voucher sample label and specimen bag tag for aquatic vertebrates.
serve vouchers of sculpins, lampreys and
other difficult species from throughout the
reach.

     Place specimen bags together into a large
plastic sample container. Preserve voucher
specimens with a 10% formalin solution. See
Section 3 for instructions for preparing a buff-
ered formalin solution. Larger voucher speci-
mens (total length > 160 mm) should be slit on
the lower abdomen of the RIGHT side to allow
for complete fixation of internal tissues and or-
gans. If a fish is too large for ajar, photograph
and place in bag on ice. Flag on recording sheet;
freeze at lab separately from tissue. Start with a
concentrated solution of formaldehyde and di-
lute to the final volume with water. The final vol-
ume of 10% formalin in the sample container
should equal the total volume of specimens. Use

-------
additional containers if necessary and avoid tight
packing of specimen bags.

     Delays in carrying out the anaesthetiza-
tion and preservation procedures, overpack-
ing a. sample container, or an inadequate vol-
ume of preservative will produce unidentifiable
specimens.

    Formaldehyde (37%) and formalin (10%
formaldehyde by volume) are extremely caustic
agents and may cause severe irritation on con-
tact of vapors or solution with skin, eyes or
mucus membranes. It is a potential carcinogen.
Contact with vapors or solution should be
avoided. Wear gloves and safety glasses and
always work in a well-ventilated area. In case
of contact with skin or eyes, rinse immediately
with large quantities of water. Store stock solu-
tion in sealed containers in safety cabinet or
cooler lined with vermiculite. If possible, trans-
port outside of the passenger compartment of a
vehicle.

     A set of two sample labels is completed
for each sample container as shown in Figure
10-4. Place one label inside each sample con-
tainer, and attach the second label to the out-
side of the jar with clear tape. Record the sample
ID number on the Vertebrate Collection Form
as shown in Figure 10-1. Carefully complete
the collection form at each transect. Tag num-
bers must be linked to each species, and each
bag of species. Be careful with fish names and
their spellings (computers see errors as differ-
ent species). Some museums may also require
that a separate collection card be completed and
inserted into each jar of voucher specimens.


10.3  Equipment  and

Supplies

    Figure 10-5isachecklistof equipmentand
supplies required to conduct protocols described
in this section. This checklist may differ from
the checklists presented in Appendix A, which
are used at a base site to ensure that all equip-
ment and supplies are brought to the stream site.
Field teams are required to use the checklist
presented in this section to ensure that equip-
ment and supplies are organized and available
to conduct the protocols efficiently.

-------
Equipment and Supplies for Aquatic Vertebrates
Qty. Item
1
3
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
many
1
Iroll
2
1
1
3
1 .
1
15-20
1
2ea.
2L
1
Ipr
Ipr
1
1 ea
2

4
1
Ipr
Iroll
Ipkg.


10+extras
1+ extras
1
1 set
1 4 ft. boat with frame mounted electrof ishing gear (anodes, cathodes, control box)
Oars (1 as extra)
Dip nets, long handled
Dip net, short handled
Generator and filled gas can; jrag
Fire extinguisher .
Anodes and cathodes (Spare)
Livewell cooler
Measuring board and ruler
Pesola scales for weighing primary tissue samples
Buckets (5 gallon)
Seat cooler with ice
Air pump, hose and fitting
Personal floatation devices
Boat straps and ropes
Tool box (Leatherman, duct tape, spare oarlock, straps, electrical tape, fuses, zipties)
Aluminum foil
Dry bags
Boat repair kit
First aid kit
Taxonomic reference books and keys for fishes of the region
List of vertebrate species common names (and species codes, if required)
List of external anomaly codes
Small nylon mesh bags for holding voucher specimens (bags can also be
constructed from sections of nylon stockings or panty hose)
Small fillet knife or scalpel for preparing larger voucher specimens for preservation
1/2- or 1 -gallon screw-top plastic jars for voucher sample
10% (buffered) formalin solution
Cooler to hold formalin solution and preserved voucher sample jars
Safety glasses
Chemical-resistant gloves
Topographic map(s)
Laser rangefinder, stopwatch, camera and film, whistles
Pruning saw and sheath
Rubber Linesman gloves, clipboards, polarized glasses, ziplock bags
Carbon dioxide tablets (Alka-Seltzer® or equivalent)
Sheet of pre-printed jar labels (4) and voucher bag tags (36), all with same preprinted
sample ID number (barcode)
Scissors for cutting labels
Plastic electrical tape
Clear tape strips
Soft lead pencils for recording data and completing tags
Fine-tipped indelible markers for completing sample labels
Vertebrate Collection Form
Vertebrate Length Recording Form
Field operations manual
Laminated sheets of aquatic vertebrate procedure tables and/or quick reference guides













































Figure 10-5.   Equipment and Supplies for Aquatic Vertebrates.

-------
 10.4  Literature Cited
Lagler, K.R.  1956.  Freshwater  Fishery
   Biology. 2nd. Edition. William C. Brown
   Co., Dubuque, Iowa.

McCormick, F.H. 1993. Fish. pp. 29-36 IN:
   R.M. Hughes (ed.). Stream Indicator
   Workshop. EPA/600/R-93/138. U.S. En-
   vironmental Protection Agency, Corvallis,
   Oregon.

        ill	

-------
                                  Section  11
                 Fish  Tissue Contaminants
         James M. Lazorchak1, Frank H. McCormick1, Robert M. Hughes2, and
                                Spence A. Peterson3
     In addition to gathering data on the
aquatic vertebrate assemblage (Section 10),
fish are retained for analysis of tissue contami-
nants. In general, the focus is on fish species
that commonly and occur throughout the re-
gion of interest, and that are sufficiently abun-
dant within a sampling reach. The fish tissue
contaminants indicator, which measures bio-
accumulation of persistent toxics, is used to
estimate regional risks of consumption to fish
predators, either wildlife or human. Various
studies that have been done on fish tissue con-
taminants have focused on different parts of
the fish: whole fish, fillets, livers. EMAP-SW
will focus on whole fish because of its em-
phasis on the ecological health of the whole
'U.S. EPA, Natioinal Exposure Research Laboratory, Eco-
logical Exposure Research Division, 26 W. Martin Luther
King Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45268.
2Dynamac International Corp., 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis,
OR 97333.
3U.S. EPA, National Health and Environmental Effects Labo-
ratory, Western Ecology Division, 200 S W 35th St., Corvallis,
OR 97333.
stream (as opposed to a focus on human health
concerns). Whole fish are a good ecological
indicator and a better indicator of risk to pis-
civorous wildlife than fillets. It is hoped to
also be able to say something about risks to
human health by analyzing whole fish. Whole
fish also present fewer logistical problems for
field crews (no gutting required in the field)
and the analytical lab (no filleting necessary).

     For the fish contaminants indicator in
EMAP-SW STREAMS,  an attempt  was
made to collect two fish samples at as many
sites as possible. One sample, of Primary Tar-
get Species, was stream fish whose adults are
small (in Mid-Atlantic streams examples are:
dace, chub, sculpins, stqnerollers, shiners, and
darters). The second sample, where available,
of a Secondary Target Species, was a spe-
cies whose adults are of larger size (In Mid-
Atlantic streams examples are: bass, trout, sun-
fish, suckers, carp). In addition to being more
ubiquitous than the larger fish (and therefore
more likely to be present in sufficient num-
bers to composite), small fish have other ad-

-------
vantages over large fish. Most importantly, it
may be possible to get a more representative
sample of the contaminant load in that stream
section (although it would be at a lower ex-
pected level  of bioaccumulation) by
compositing say, in the range of 20 to 200
small fish individuals than by compositing 3
to 5 large fish. Small fish may be a more ap-
propriate indicator for assessing ecological
risk, as they might be expected to be prey for
a larger number of fish-eating animals (the
majority of which will be piscivorous birds
and small mammals). The major advantage
that larger fish could potentially offer, whether
predators (piscivores) or bottom feeders, is a
higher level of bioaccumulation and thus
greater sensitivity to detect contaminants. The
relative bioaccumulation of contaminants by
large and small stream fish is not known, thus
the reason for having Primary and Second-
ary Target Species in this study.

    In trying to answer these questions, the
field crews' efforts to apply the protocol for
sampling, handling and shipping in a consis-
tent manner are critical. The diligence of
the field crews in following the protocols is
especially important in a status and trends
study such as EMAP-SW where it is critical
to get a standard sample from each site so
that there is confidence that differences seen
over time and between sites represents varia-
tions in the ecosystems and not differences in
sampling and handling between the crews.
Suggestions from field crew members on how
the protocol can be improved are welcomed
and will be incorporated to improve them, but
protocols should be followed as written until
official changes are made.

 11.1  Selecting  Fish

Tissue Specimens
    If possible, obtain one sample each, of
the desired weight or number (see below)
of similarly sized* individuals, from the Pri-
mary and Secondary target species lists (2
composite samples total).  To judge if  the
proper amount of a target species is present
in the fish catch, weight will be used for pri-
mary target species and number of individu-
als of sufficient size will be used for second-
ary target species.
I. Primary Target Species

Small adult fish
(in priority order)
  Weight
l)BlacknoseDace
2) Another Dace species
3) Creek Chub or Fallfish
4) Slimy Sculpin/Mottled
  Sculpin
5) Stoneroller
6) A Darter species
7) A Shiner species
50** - 400 g
50** - 400 g
50** - 400 g
50** - 400 g

50** - 400 g
50** - 400 g
50** - 400 g
     A) Choose the highest priority target
species from the above list, that has at least
enough individuals to attain the minimum
weight (50 g). Get as much weight offish as
possible within the desired weight range (50-
400 g).

     B) If less than the desired weight of any
primary target species is collected, send indi-
viduals of a small nontarget species if 50 g or
more are available.

     * - The general rule-of-thumb for simi-
lar size is that the smallest individual in the
sample should be at least 75% of the length
of the largest individual. This rule applies to
both primary and secondary target species.
Crews just need to keep this criterion in mind
while selecting the  final sample. Any obvi-
ously small or large individuals should not be
kept if there is a sufficient sample to return

-------
without them. If there is a conflict between
criteria, getting a sufficient sample is a higher
priority than getting similar-sized individuals.

    ** - This weight represents the mini-
mum amount of tissue needed for laboratory
analysis.  Crews should not settle for the
minimum amount (weight) if more fish are
present, but instead send as many fish as pos-
sible up to the 400 g weight goal.

II. Secondary Target Species

    Collect and save a sample of secondary
target species if such a sample of desired num-
ber of individuals of desired size is available.
Collect similar sized individuals if enough
are present.
Larger adult fish
(in priority order)
Desired   Desired
  Size     Number
1) A Bass species
2) A Trout species*
3) A Sunfish species
4) Catfish
5) White sucker
6) Hogsucker
7) Carp
120mm
120mm
120mm
120mm
120mm
120mm
120mm
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
    * - Collect only those trout that appear
not to be recently stocked.

    A) If fewer than the desired number
of secondary target species individuals of de-
sired size are collected, add smaller individu-
als of the same species, if available, to achieve
the desired number (5).

    B) If fewer than 5 fish of any size are
available, you may send as few as 3 fish that
are at least at  or near the minimum desired
size (120 mm).

    C) If an acceptable secondary target spe-
cies sample (by the above criteria) is not avail-
able send only the primary target species
sample. If neither a primary or secondary spe-
cies sample that meets these criteria is avail-
able, use your best judgement in sending some
type offish sample.

11.2  Preparing

Composite Samples for

Primary and Secondary

Target Species
    To determine the proper quantity for
each composite sample, weight is used for the
primary target species and the number of in-
dividuals of sufficient size is used for the sec-
ondary target species. Prepare each compos-
ite sample using similar sized individuals if
possible, but getting a sufficient sample is a
higher priority than getting similar-sized in-
dividuals.

     Prepare a primary sample as described
in Table 11-1. Choose a species that has at
least enough individuals to attain the mini-
mum  weight (50 g). Send as many fish as
possible up to the 400 g weight goal. If there
is no single species with enough individuals
available, prepare the sample using individu-
als of multiple species.

    Prepare a secondary sample as described
in Table 11-1. Choose a species that has 5
similar-sized individuals (minimum total
length =120 mm) available. If fewer than 5
fish of any size for any secondary species are
available, prepare the composite sample us-
ing as few as 3 fish that are at least at or near
the minimum desired size.

    If neither a primary nor secondary
sample is available, use your best judgement
to obtain some type offish tissue sample from
the available species collected. Use the pro-
cedure for either primary or secondary spe-

-------
  Table 11-1. Procedure to Prepare Fish Tissue Samples.
  Note: If neither a primary nor secondary species sample is available, use your best judgement in sending
  some type of composite fish tissue sample.

  Primary Sample (PI

  After all voucher specimens have been prepared, choose a primary species that has enough similarly sized
  individuals to weigh to 400 g (smallest to largest should not differ by more than 25% in length).

  Secondary Sample (S)

:  After all voucher specimens have been prepared, select a large secondary species that has at least 5
._  individuals 120 mm. Include similar sized individuals if available (smallest to largest should not differ by more
  than 25% in length).

:  1.    Place the fish into a bucket with two carbon dioxide tablets (e.g.," Alka Seltzer®") and a small volume
        of water. After they have been anaesthetized, use clean hands to transfer them to aluminum foil.
  2.    Prepare a clean work surface to prepare the primary composite sample. Keep hands, work surfaces, and
        wrapping materials clean and free of potential contaminants (mud, fuel, formalin, sun screen, insect
        repellant, etc.)
;;  3-P.  For primary samples, record the common name (from a standardized list) of the species, its species
        code (if required), and the number of individuals in the .sample in the appropriate fields on line "P1" of
        the Sample CollectionForm (Figure 11-1).
•  3-S.  Measure the total length (TL) of each secondary individual. Record the common name (from a
        standardized list) of the secondary target species, its species code (if required), and the total length for
        each individual on lines S1 through S5 in the secondary sample section of the Sample Collection Form.
«  4.    If the individuals included in composite samples were collected from throughout the sampling reach,
        place an "X" in the "Yes" box in the sample section of the Sample Collection Form. If the individuals
;;        were only collected from a limited segment of the sampling reach, place an "X" in the "No" box and
        explain in the "Explain" field on the form.
  5-P.  Wrap all primary fish together in a single piece of aluminum foil, making sure the dull side of the
        aluminum foil is in contact with the fish. Place the sample in a self-sealing plastic bag.
  5-S.  Wrap each fish of the secondary sample separately in aluminum foil, with the dull side of the foil in
:        contact with the fish. Place ajll the wrapped individuals into a single self-sealing plastic bag.
,  6.    Expel excess air and seal the bag. Wrap clear tape around the bag to seal and make a surface for each
        sample label..
  7-P.  Prepare two Fish Tissue sample labels (each having the same sample ID number [Figure 11-2]) by filling
        in the stream ID and the date of collection. Circle "PRIMARY" on each label. Record the sample ID
        number (barcode) in the primary sample section of the Sample Collection Form.
,  7-S.  Prepare two Fish Tissue sample labels (each having the same sample ID number [Figure 11 -2]) by filling
:        in the stream ID and the date of collection. Circle" SECONDARY" on each label. Record the sample ID
        number (barcode) in the secondary sample section of the Sample Collection Form.
:  8,    Attach the  appropriate label to the tape surface of the bag. Cover the label with a strip of clear tape.
        Place the labeled bag into a second self-sealing plastic bag. Seal the bag and attach the second label
        to the outside of the appropriate bag. Cover the label with a strip of clear tape.
  9.    Place the double-bagged sample into a cooler containing bags of ice until shipment. Keep the sample
        frozen until shipment.



-------
eies, depending upon the species used and the
size range of individuals selected.

     Individuals comprising the primary com-
posite sample are wrapped together in alumi-
num foil and placed into a single plastic bag.
Each individual  comprising the secondary
composite sample is wrapped separately, but
all individuals are placed into a single plastic
bag. Each composite sample is labeled as
shown in Figure 11-1. Prepare two identical
labels for each composite sample. Double-bag
each sample, and place a label on each bag.
Record information about each composite
sample on page 2 of the Sample Collection
Form (Figure 11-2). Make sure the sample
ID numbers (barcodes) recorded on the col-
lection form match those on the sample la-
bels.

     Tissue samples are stored in a cooler with
several bags of ice. When using ice, double
bag the ice and tape the last bag shut to pre-
vent contamination of samples by melting ice.
Store tissue samples frozen until they can be
shipped (Section 3). Tissue samples can be
stored and shipped with other samples requir-
ing freezing (periphyton chlorophyll, periphy-
ton biomass, periphyton APA, and sediment
metabolism samples).

11.3  Equipment and

Supplies

     Figure 11-3 is a checklist of equipment
and supplies required to conduct protocols
described in this section. This checklist may
differ from the checklists presented in Appen-
dix A, which are used at a base site to ensure
that all equipment and supplies are brought
to and are available at the river site.  Field
teams are required to use the checklist pre-
sented in this section-to ensure that equipment
and supplies are organized and available to
conduct the protocols efficiently.
                                   FISH TISSUE

                              SITE ID: ORRV_ig.-7 9. 9.

                                  DATE: JT/,51/98
                                    /—*•	N
                              SAMPLE:(PRIMARY)SECONDARY
                                       229000
                                   FISH TISSUE

                              SITE ID: ORRV _3_ S.-3.3. _2

                                  DATE:  ST/>5/98
                              SAMPLE: PRIMARY (SECONDARY
                                       229000
Figure 11-1.   Completed sample labels for fish tissue contaminants.

-------
                                                                                         Reviewed by (initial)
SAMPLE COLLECTION FORM - RIVERS (continued)
SITE NAME: BEAVE"R RlV£/^ DATE: % >5 1 98 VISIT D0jg]l D2 D3
SITEID: , ORRV Jl JL-J?.3_2_ TEAM ID (X): JS1 D2 D3 D4 D5
D 6 D7 D8
CHEMISTRY AND MICROBIAL WATER SAMPLE (Chem: 4-L Cubitainer and 2 Syringes, Micro: Glass Bottle)
SAMPLE ID (BARCODE) TRANSECT FLAG COMMENTS
CHEMISTRY 2/r-3°'Z K
MICROBIAL .2^3)13 K
SEDIMENT TOXICITY SAMPLES
SAMPLE ID (BARCODE) FLAG

COMMENTS

FISH TISSUE SAMPLES - PRIMARY SAMPLE (min. 50g total wgt)
SAMPLE ID (BARCODE) ->-
LINE
PI

SPECIES CODE
CC7TT Z.5ZZ.2L

2*32.2.3
COMMON NAME NUMBER OF
UNICVOWN CDTTfA i

IS COMPOSITE SAMPLE COMPOSED OF INDIVIDUALS COLLECTED FROM THROUGHOUT REACH? (X) ->•

NOIVIDUALS FLAG
1

G YES JST NO
IFNO.EXPLAIN: COLLECTED AT OWE PROFILE
FISH TISSUE SAMPLES - SECONDARY SAMPLE (where available; 5 individuals)
SAMPLE ID (BARCODE) -*•
LINE
SI
S2
S3
84
Si
SPECIES CODE
PTYC-ORe 6-
PTYCORT&
PTYCOREG-
PTYCOREG-
PTYCOREG
243^2^
COMMON NAME TOTAL LE^
NORTHERN soi/Aynsw 22
NORTHERN; SQI/AWFISH 25
/\|ORTHEI?IV SQUAWFJSH 2t
A/ORTHERN SOUAWFISH 2C
NORTHERN 50L/A1A/FJSH 2
IS COMPOSITE SAMPLE COMPOSED OF INDIVIDUALS QOLLECTED FROM THROUGHOUT REACH? (X) ->•

JGTH (MM) FLAG
0
!0

?D
IS
^ YES 0 "°
IF NO, EXPLAIN:
LINE




COMMENT OR FLAG EXPLANATION FOR FISH TISSUE




 Flagaxfe*.' K-Sample not collected: U- Suspect sample: Fl,F2,etc.« misc. Hag assigned by field crew. Explain all Hags in Comments sections.



 Rev. 05/29/98 (_rvscmb.98)                                                           SAMPLE COLLECTION FORM - RIVERS - 2
Figure 11-2.   Sample Collection Form, showing information recorded for fish tissue samples.


-------
  Qty.
                        Equipment And Supplies For Fish Tissue Contaminants
Item
1
4
1 roll
1
Iroll
4
1
2 sets
Ipkg.


1
1 copy
1 set
Plastic bucket for anesthetization
Carbon dioxide tablets (Alka-Seltzer® or equivalent)
Clear tape for sealing tissue sample bags
Pesola® portable scale, precision ±5g
Aluminum foil
1 -gallon self-sealing plastic bags
Sample Collection Form
Fish tissue sample labels (each set with a different sample ID number [barcode])
Clear tape strips
Soft (#2) lead pencils to record data
Fine-point indelible markers to fill out labels
Cooler with ice (double-bagged and taped)
Field operations and methods manual
Laminated sheets of procedure tables and/or quick reference guides for fish tissue
contaminants














Figure 11-3.   Equipment and supplies checklist for fish tissue contaminants.

-------

-------
                                Section  12
             Visual  Stream  Assessments
                                Alan T. Herlihy1
    After all other samples and field data have
been collected, the field team makes a gen-
eral visual assessment of the river, and per-
forms a final check of the data forms and
samples before leaving the river site (see Sec-
tion 13). The objective of the visual river as-
sessment is to record field team observations
of catchment and stream characteristics that
are useful for data validation, future data in-
terpretation, ecological value assessment, de-
velopment of associations, and verification of
stressor data. The observations and impres-
sions of field teams are extremely valuable.

12.1  Visual Stream
Assessment
    The objective of the visual river assess-
ment is to record field crew observations of
catchment/river characteristics useful for fu-
ture data interpretation, ecological value as-
sessment, development of associations, and
'Dept. of Fisheries and Wildlife, Oregon State University,
c/o U.S. EPA, 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis, OR 97333.
verification of stressor data. Observations and
impressions of field crews are extremely valu-
able. Thus, it is important that these observa-
tions about river characteristics be recorded
for future data interpretation and validation.
The assessment form is designed as a tem-
plate for recording pertinent field observa-
tions. It is by no means comprehensive and
any additional  observations should be re-
corded in the Comments section of the form.

    Complete the assessment form after all
other sampling and measurement activities
have been completed. Take into account all
observations the sampling team has made
while at the site. The assessment includes the
following components: watershed activities
and observed disturbances, reach character-
istics, waterbody character, general assess-
ment,  and local anecdotal information. The
procedure for conducting the visual assess-
ment of the sampling reach is presented in
Table 12-1. Record data and observations for
each component of the assessment on the
Assessment Form as shown in Figures 12-1
and 12-2.

-------
 Table 12-1. Procedure for Conducting the Final Visual Assessment of a River.

 1.   After all other sampling and measurement activities are completed, fill out the header section of an
     Assessment Form. Use your perceptions obtained during the course of the day, while at the river or
     driving/walking through the catchment to complete the remainder of the form.
 2.   Watershed Activities and Disturbances Observed: Rate each type of activity or disturbance listed on
     the form as either "Not observed", "Low", "Medium",  or "High", and record the rating on the
     Assessment Form. Keep in mind that ratings will be somewhat subjective and that an extensive effort
     to quantify the presence and intensity of each type of stressor is not required. General categories of
     activities and types of disturbance are described below:
     •  Residential: The presence of any of the listed disturbances adjacent to or near the river.
     •  Recreational: The presence of organized public or private parks, campgrounds, beaches or other
       recreation areas around the river. If there are signs of informal areas of camping, swimming or
       boating around the river (e.g., swimming hole), record them as "primitive" parks, camping.
     •  Agriculture: The presence of cropland, pasture, orchards, poultry, and/or livestock.
     •  Industrial: Any industrial activity (e.g., canning, chemical, pulp), commercial activity (stores,
         businesses) or logging/mining activities around the river or in the catchment. Describe in more,
         detail in the comments section.
     •  Management: Any evidence of liming activity, water treatment, dredging or channelization, flow
       control structures, etc.
     Any oddities, or further elaboration should be recorded in the Comments section.
 3.   Reach Characteristics: For each type of riparian vegetation cover or land use category listed on the
     Assessment Form, estimate the proportion of the sampling reach immediately adjacent to the river that
     is affected. Place and "X" in the appropriate extent class box (Rare [<5%],Sparse [5 to 25%], Moderate
     [25 to 75%], and Extensive [> 75%]) on the form.
 4.   Classify the overall water clarity within the sampling reach as clear, murky, or highly turbid. Place an
     "X" in the appropriate box on the "Water Clarity" line of the Assessment Form. If you believe that
     water clarity has been influenced by a recent storm event, also place an "X" in the "Storm Influenced"
     box.
 5.   Water Body Character: Assign a rating of 1 (highly disturbed) to 5 (pristine) based on your general
     impression of the intensity of impact from human disturbance. Place  an "X" in the box next to the
;     assigned rating on the Assessment Form.
' 5.   Waterbody Character (cont.): Assign a rating to the river based on overall aesthetic quality, based on
     your opinion of how suitable the river water is for recreation and aesthetic enjoyment today. Place and
     "X" in the box next to the assigned rating on the Assessment Form.
       5. Beautiful, could not be any nicer.
       4. Very minor aesthetic problems; excellent for swimming, boating, enjoyment.
       3. Enjoyment impaired.
       2. Level of enjoyment substantially reduced.
       1. Enjoyment nearly impossible.
     Add any comments you feel might aid data interpretation in the  Comments Section.
 6.   General Assessment: record  comments on wildlife observed, perceived diversity  of terrestrial
     vegetation, and the estimated age class of forest (0 to 25 yr, 25 to 75 yr, or > 75 yr.) on the Assessment
     Form.
 7.   Local Anecdotal Information:  Record any information regarding the past or present characteristics or
     condition of the river provided by local residents.
     Each watershed activity or disturbance
is rated into one of four categories of abun-
dance or influence: not observed, low, me-
dium, or high. Leave the line blank for any
activity or disturbance type not observed. The
distinction between low, medium, and high
will be subjective. For example, if there are
2-3 houses on a river, the rating for "Houses"
would be low. If the river is in a suburban
housing development, rate it as high.  Simi-


-------
                                                                                           Reviewed by (initial) A/C4-
                                  ASSESSMENT FORUM - STREAMS/RIVERS
SITE NAME:
                                   RlV£/?
                                                            DATE:  g"   IS  I 98  VISIT   DO  JS1  D2 D3
   SITE ID:   ORRV
                                                 TEAM ID (X):
                                                                         D2   D3   Q4   D5   D6  D7   D8
  WATERSHED ACTIVITIES AND DISTURBANCES OBSERVED (INTENSITY: BLANK = NOT OBSERVED, L = LOW, M = MODERATE. H . HEAVY)
     RESIDENTIAL
                             RECREATIONAL
                                                     AGRICULTURAL
                                                                           INDUSTRIAL
                                                                                            STREAM MANAGEMENT
  LJM H  RESIDENCES
                      L M  H  PARKS. CAMPGROUNDS
                                                    L M H  CROPLAND
                                                                       L M H  INDUSTRIALPLANTS
                                                                                           L M H  LIMING
  L M H
         MAINTAINED LAWNS
                              PRIMITIVE PARKS. CAMPING
                                                    L M H
                                                                       L M H
                                                                              MINES/QUARRIES
                                                                                           L M H
                                                                                                  DRINKING WATERTREATMENT
  L M
         CONSTRUCTION
                              TRASH/LITTER
                                                           LIVESTOCK USE
                                                                       L M H
                                                                              OIL/GAS WELLS
                                                                                           L M(H)
                                                                                                  ANGLING PRESSURE
  L M
                      L M H
                              SURFACE FILMS. SCUMS. OR SLICKS
                                                    L M H
                                                                       L M H
                                                                              POWER PLANTS
                                                                                           L M H
  L M H
                                                    L M H
                                                                       L M H
                                                                                           L M H
                                                                                                  CHANNELIZATION
                                                    L M H
                                                           IRRIGATION PUMPS
                                                                       L M H
                                                                              EVIDENCE OF FIRE
                                                                                           1M H
                                                                                                  WATER LEVEL FLUCTUATIONS
         BRIDGE/CULVERTS
                                                                       L M H
                                                                                                  FISH STOCKING
                                       REACH CHARACTERISTICS (percent of reach)
                           FOREST

                            SHRUB

                            GRASS

                          WETLAND

                      BARE GROUND

                      MACROPHYTES
                                                   n
                                                      SPARSE (5 TO 25%)
                                                                    n
                                                                        MODERATE (25TO 75%)
                                         n
                                                                                             EXTENSIVE C>75%)
                                n
n
                                                    SPARSE (5 TO 25%)
                                                                        MODERATE (25 TO 75 75%)
                                n
n
                                                   SPARSE (5TO25%)
                                                                        MODERATE (25 TO 75%)
n
                                                                                             EXTENSIVE > 75%)
                                                n
                                                   SPARSE (5 TO 25%)
                    [3  m
                                                                        IODERATE(25T075%)
n
                                                                                             EXTENSIVE (> 75%)
                                \[
                                                   SPARSE (5 TO 25%)
                    n
                                                                        MODERATE (25 TO 75%)
                                                                                         n
                                                                                             EXTENSIVE (> 75%)
                                                      SPARSE (5 TO 25%)
                                                                           MODERATE (25 TO 75%)
                                                                                         n
                                                                                                EXTENSIVE (> 75%)
              AGRICULTURE - ROW CROP

               AGRICULTURE - GRAZING

                          LOGGING

     DEVELOPMENT (RESIDENTIAL & URBAN)
                                                D
                                                      SPARSE {5 TO 25%)
                    n
                                                                        MODERATE (25TO 75%)
n
                                                                                             EXTENSIVE (> 75%)
                                                n
                                                   SPARSE (5 TO 25%)
                                                                        MODERATE (25 TO 75%)
                                         n
                                                                                             EXTENSIVE (> 75%)
                                                n
                                                   SPARSE (5TO 25%)
                    n
                                                                        MODERATE (25 TO 75%)
n
                                                                                             EXTENSIVE (> 75%)
                                                      SPARSE (5 TO 25%)
                                                                           MODERATE (25 TO 75%)
                                                                                            n
                                                                                                EXTENSIVE (> 75%)
                     WATER CLARITY
                                                n
                                                                          HIGHLY TURBID
                                                                                            a
                                                                                               STORM INFLUENCED
                                           WATERBODY CHARACTER (X ONE) -
      PRISTINE
                                                                                                     HIGHLY DISTURBED
                                        |g|4
                                                                                       n
                                                                                                       UNAPPEALING
   aciNtHAL A&afcbbMfcN I (wilalite, vegetation diversity, forest age class (0-25 yrs, 25-75 yrs, >75)
    ROCKY   CANYON LANDS,   SAGE/G-RASS    COVER - OCCASIONAL  RlMRlAM TREE.
    NO  LWA  LIMITED   FfSH   COVER/   REGULATED   FLOW /WATER  LEVEL.
  LUUAL ANtODOTAL INFORMATION:
 Rev. 05/29/98 (strvasse.98)
                                                                                   ASSESSMENT FORM - STREAMS/RIVER - 1
Figure 12-1.   Assessment Form (page 1).

-------
                                                                      Reviewed by (initial)
                     ASSESSMENT FORUM - STREAMS/RIVERS (continued)
 SITE NAME:
                                                DATE:
                                                               798  VISIT  DO D1 D2 EH3
 SITE ID:   O R R V
TEAM ID (X):  D1   D2   D3  D4  D5  D6  D7  D8
Rev. 05/29/98 (strvasse.98)
                                                                 ASSESSMENT FORM - STREAMS/RIVER - 2
Figure 12-2.  Assessment Form (page 2).

-------
 larly, a small patch of clear cut logging on a
 hill overlooking the river would be rated as
 low. Logging activity right on the river shore,
 however, would be rated as high.

      When assessing reach characteristics,
 make your best estimate as to the percent of
 the sampling reach (100 or 40 channel widths)
 that had each type of listed riparian zone land
 use immediately adjacent to the river. Also rate
 the water clarity, including whether you be-
 lieve the clarity is influenced by recent storm
 events (see Section 4).

     Water body character is defined as "the
 physical habitat integrity of the water body,
 largely a function of riparian and littoral habitat
 structure, volume change, trash, turbidity,
 slicks, scums, color, and odor." Water body
 character is assessed using two attributes, the
 degree of human development, and aesthet-
 ics. Rate each of these attributes on a scale of
 1 to 5. For development, give the river a "5"
 rating if it is pristine, with no signs of any
 human development. A rating of "1" indicates
 a river which is totally developed (e.g., the
 entire river is lined with houses, or the ripar-
 ian zone has been removed). For aesthetics,
 base your decision on any faptor about the
 river that bothers you (e.g., trash, algal
 growth, weed abundance, overcrowding).

     The general assessment component in-
 cludes any observations that will help in data
 interpretation in the pertinent section. Gen-
 eral assessment comments can include com-
 ments on wildlife observed, diversity of ter-
 restrial vegetation, age class of forest, or any
 other observation. Comments from locals are
 often useful and should be recorded in the
 "Local Anecdotal Information" section. The
 back side of the form (Figure 12-2) is avail-
 able for general comments.

 12.2  Equipment  and
 Supplies
    Figure 12-3 is a checklist of the supplies
required to complete the rapid habitat and vi-
sual stream assessments. This checklist may
differ from the checklists presented in Appen-
dix A, which are used at abase site to ensure
that all equipment and supplies are brought
to and are available at the river site. Field
teams are required to use the checklist preT
sented in this section to ensure that equipment
and supplies are organized and available to
conduct the protocols efficiently.
Qty.
1
6
1
1 copy
1 set
Equipment and Supplies for Visual Stream Assessments
Item
Assessment Form for visual stream assessment
Soft (#2) lead pencils '
Covered clipboard or forms holder
Field operations and methods manual ~
Laminated sheets of procedure tables and/or quick reference guides for rapid
habitat and visual assessments





Figure 12-3.  Checklist of equipment and supplies required for visual assessments

-------

-------
                               Section 13
                      Final  Site Activities
                     James M. Lazorchak1 and Daniel K. Averill2
     After the boat crews have safely reached
the take-out location, team members begin fi-
nal site aptivities.,Composite samples for per-
iphyton (Section 7) and benthos (Section 9)
are processed. The incubation for sediment
metabolism (Section 8) is initiated, if not al-
ready started. Equipment and  supplies are
unloaded from rafts, vehicles are shuttled,
equipment and supplies are loaded in the ve-
hicles, rafts are loaded onto the trailer, and
data forms, labels, and samples are inspected.

     The team leader reviews all of the data
forms and sample labels for accuracy, com-
pleteness, and legibility. A second team mem-
ber inspects all sample containers and pack-
ages them in preparation for transport, storage,
or shipment. Refer to Section 3 for details on
preparing, delivering and/or shipping samples.

     When reviewing field data forms, ensure
that all required data forms for the river have
'U.S. EPA, National Exposure Research Laboratory, Eco-
logical Exposure Research Division, 26 W. Martin Luther
King Dr., Cincinnati, OH 45268.
2Dynamac International Corp., 200 SW 35th St., Corvallis,
OR 97333.
been completed. Confirm that the site identi-
fication code, the year, the visit number, and
the date of the visit are correct on all forms.
On each form, verify that all information has
been recorded accurately, the recorded infor-
mation is legible, and any flags are explained
in the comments section. Ensure that written
comments are legible and use no "shorthand"
or abbreviations. Make sure the header infor-
mation is completed on all pages of each form.
After reviewing each form, initial the upper
right corner of each page of the form. A check
by a team member that has not filled out the
sheets for a particular section might be the best
person to review the field data forms before
leaving the site.

     When inspecting samples,  ensure that
each sample  is labeled, all labels are com-
pletely filled in and legible, and each label is
covered with clear plastic tape. Compare
sample label information with the information
recorded on the corresponding field data forms
(e.g.,"the Sample Collection Form) to ensure
accuracy.

     Keep equipment and supplies organized
so they can be inventoried using the equip-

-------
ment and supply checklists presented in Ap-
pendix A. Clean up the take-out site and trans-
port all waste material out of the area.

     If samples are to be shipped by FEDEX,
check the 1 800 number for the nearest Motel
or location that samples can be left for pickup.
In most eastern states,  FEDEX will pick up
coolers at most motels and ship the following
morning. This can help reduce travel time to
the next sample site. FEDEX also will ship
on Saturdays for Sunday or Monday pickups
as of the year 2000. Check their 1 800 num-
ber for locations that will accept Saturday
drop off and Sunday delivery.
                                 iiiiiiiiM

-------
                      Appendix A
    Equipment and Supply  Checklists
Field Data Forms and Sample Labels	A-2
Office Supplies and Tools	A-3
Personal Equipment and Supplies	A-4
Chemicals	A-5
Packing and Shipping Supplies...	,	A-5
Site Verification and Sampling Reach Layout,.-	; A-6
Water Chemistry and Microbiology	.,A-6
Physical Habitat	.............;	..„.	........	....	 A-7
Periphyton	„	A-7
Sediment Metabolism	 A-8
Benthic Macroinvertebrates	A-8
Aquatic Vertebrates and Fish Tissue Contaminants....,	A-9

-------
                      Field Data Forms and Sample Labels
Number
per site
Item



1 -r extras
1 1 + extras

0 4- extras
1 + extras
1
1
3
1
4
5
2
4
1
2 sets
2 copies
2 sets
Verification Form
Sample Collection Form
7ield Measurement Form
Channel/Riparian Transect Form
Thalweg Profile Form
PHAB Commentes Form
Vertebrate Collection Form
Vergebrate Length Recording Form
Assessment Form for visual river assessment
Field Sample Shipment'Tracking Form
Water chemistry labels (same ID number)
Microbial label
Periphyton labels (same ID number)
Sediment metabolism labels (different ID numbers)
Composite Benthic sample labels, with preprinted ID numbers (barcodes)
Composite Benthic sample labels without preprinted ID numbers
Sheet of preprinted aquatic vertebrate jar labels (4) and voucher bag tags
(36), all with same preprinted sample ID number (barcode)
Fish tissue sample labels (2 labels per set; each set with a different sampl
ID number [barcode])
Field operations and methods manual
Laminated sheets of procedure tables and/or quick reference guides






















-------
                          Office Supplies And Tools
Number
per site
Item
1
1
1
1
1 ea.
1
1
4
12
6
Ipr
1
1
Dossier of access and general information for scheduled river site
Topographic map with "X-site," reach boundaries, and launch points
marked
Site information sheet with map coordinates, bank to be sampled, elevation
of X-site, and other general information
Portable file folder used to organize field and administrative forms
Map wheel, calculator, metric ruler, shoulder bag, and field notebook
Sampling itinerary notebook
Safety log and/or personal safety information for each team member
Covered clipboards or forms holders
Soft (#2) lead pencils
Fine-tip indelible markers
Scissors for cutting labels
Pocket knife or multipurpose tool
Toolbox with basic tools needed to maintain/repair sampling gear (other
than electrofishins equipment)














-------
                        Personal Equipment and Supplies
Number
per site
Item
2
6
2
2
1
3
1 pr/person
1 per person
2 pair
1
1 per person
1
2
2
1
2
2

14 ft. inflatable rafts with custom frames
Oars
Extra oar locks
Raft pump - AIR
Raft pump -ELECTRIC '
Raft patch kits
Felt-soled wading boots + neoprene booties.
PFD's with pockets
Polarized sunglasses and leather gloves
First aid kit, eye wash unit, sunscreen, whistle, antibacterial hand wash
Rain gear
Water purifier
Throw bags and dry bags
Pruning saws
5 gal. water jug
Pulaski's and shovels
Booster cables
Tie-down straps, ropes, bungee cords





.













-------
                                  Chemicals
Number
per site
Item
Ipr
2pr
1
1
2 gal
1
2 gal
Igal
2 jars
Safety glasses
Chemical-resistant gloves
Laboratory apron, resistant to ethanol and formalin
Cooler or large tote for transporting ethanol and samples
95% ethanol
Cooler or large tote for transporting formaldehyde/formalin
10% (buffered) formalin solution
Gasoline for electrofishing generator in approved container
Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) for patching rafts









Number
per site
                          Packing and Shipping Supples
Item
2 bags
1 box
1 box
Iroll
2pkg
4 rolls
3
1
1
2
6
Ice
1-gal heavy-duty self-sealingn (e.g., with a zipper-type closure) plastic bags
30-gal plastic garbage bags
Clear tape for sealing tissue sample bags and shipping containers
Clear tape strips for covering labels
Plastic electrical tape
Insulated shipping containers for samples (heavy plastic coolers)
Plastic container with snap-on lide
Cooler with bags of ice to store frozen samples
Containers suitable to transport and/or ship samples preserved in formalin or
ethanol (coolers)
Shipping airbills and adhesive plastic sleeves












-------
                    Site Verification and Sampling Reach Layout
Number
per site
Item
1

1
1
1
1
1
1 ea
GPS receiver and operating manual
Extra batteries for GPS receiver
Laser rangefinder (400 yard range) and clear
waterproof bag (dry bag)
50 m fiberglass measuring tape with reel
Dossier of site and access information
Waterproof camera and film
Topographic map and gazetteer
Map wheel, calculator, metric ruler








Number
per site
                        Water Chemistry and Microbiology
Item
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
Dissolved oxygen/Temperature meter with probe, manual, & storage case
DO repair kit containing additional membranesand probe filling solution
Conductivity meter with probe, operating manual, and padded storage case
Extra batteries for dissolved oxygen and conductivity meters
500-mL plastic bottle of conductivity QCCS labeled "Rinse" (in plastic bag)
500-mL plastic bottle of conductivity QCCS labeled "Test" (in plastic bag)
500-mL plastic bottle of deionized water to store conductivity probe
Field thermometer
500 mL plastic beaker with handle (in clean plastic bag)
4-L cubitainer •
60-mL plastic syringes
200 mL square glass microbial bottle
Plastic container with snap-on lid to hold filled syringes
Syringe valves





-









-------
                                Physical Habitat
Number
per site
Item
1
1
1
1
Iroll
1
1
Surveyor's telescoping rod (round profile, metric scale, 7.5 m extended) for depth
measurements and substrate estimation
Clinometer (or Abney level) with percent and degree scales
Convex spherical canopy densiometer, modified with taped "V"
Bearing compass (Backpacking type)
Colored surveyor's plastic flagging
Meter stick for bank angle measurements
SONAR depth sounder - narrow beam (16 degrees)







Number
per site
                                   Periphyton
Item
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
4
1 box
1 pair
1
1
1
2
1
1
Large funnel (15-20 cm diameter)
12-cm2 area delimiter (3.8 cm diameter pipe, 3 cm tall)
Stiff-bristle Toothbrush with handle bent at 90° angle
1-L wash bottle for stream water
1-L wash bottle containing deionized water
500-mL plastic bottles for composite samples
60 mL plastic syringe with a 3/8" hole bored into the end
50-mL screw-top centrifuge tubes (or similar sample vials)
Glass-fiber filters for chlorophyll and biomass samples
Forceps for filter handling
25-mL or 50-mL graduated cylinder
Filtration unit, including filter funnel, cap, filter holder, and receiving chamber
Hand-operated vacuum pump with length of flexible plastic tubing
Aluminum foil squares (3" x 6")
Small syringe or bulb pipette for dispensing formalin
Collapsible bucket

















-------
                             Sediment Metabolism
Number
per site
Item
1
1
1
1 set
1
5
1
1
1
Small scoop sampler for sediments
Wide-mouthed plastic jar labeled "COMPOSITE SEDIMENT SAMPLE". If
sediment is only being collected for metabolism samples, a 250-mL jar is
sufficient.
YS1 Model 95 Dissolved Oxygen meter
Spare batteries for DO meter
Small plastic spoon or spatula to transfer sediment from the composite sample
container to respiration tubes
50-mL, screw-top, centrifuge tubes
50-mL screw-cap centrifuge tube labeled "BLANK"
Small cooler used as incubation chamber
l,OOQ-mL plastic beaker to holding centrifuge tubes during incubation









Number
per site
                           Benthic Macroinvertebrates
Item
1

2
1
2pr
1
1
1
10
2
1
Ipkg
Modified kick net (closed bag with 595 pm mesh) and 4-ft handle (Wildco #425-
J50-595)
Spare net(s) for the kick net sampler or extra sampler
Drift nets, 595 jam mesh, closed end
Sieve bucket, 595 (jm mesh openings
Watchmakers' forceps
Wash bottle, 1-L capacity.
Small spatula, spoon, or scoop to transfer sample
Funnel, with large bore spout
Sample jars, plastic with screw caps, 500 mL and 1 L capacity, suitable for use
wfth ethanol
Buckets, plastic, eight to ten quart capacity
Stopwatch
Kimwipes in small self-sealing plastic bag













-------
                      Aquatic Vertebrates and Fish Tissue Contaminants
Number
per site
Item
1 set
1
2
1
2
1
1
Ipr
2
2
2

1
1 set
1
1
15-20
1
2 ea
1
2 gal
4
1 roll
Electrofishing equipment - cathode and anode droppers, other frame mounted
electrical boxes and connections
Electrofishing control box with an connectors
Anodes and cathodes (SPARE)
Generator and filled gas can + rag
Dip nets, Long handled
Dip net, Short handled
Live weH cooler
Heavy-duty rubber gloves for electrofishing
Fish measuring board and rulers
Portable scafe, precision ±5g to weigh tissue samples
Buckets (5 gallon)
Tools for electrofishing assembly
Fire extinguisher
Taxonomic reference books and keys for fishes and amphibians of the region
List of vertebrate species codes and common names
List of external anomaly codes
Small nylon mesh bags for holding voucher specimens (bags can also be
constructed from sections of nylon stockings or panty hose)
Small fillet knife or scalpel for preparing larger voucher speciments for
preservation
1, 2 or 4 L screw-top plastic jars for voucher samples
Plastic bucket for anesthetization
10% (buffered) formalin solution
carbon dioxide tablets (Alka-Seftzer® or equivalent)
Aluminum foil
























-------

-------
                           Appendix B
                Quick  Reference Guides
    The following pages are tabular summaries of different field activities and procedures
described in this manual. These were developed by the principal investigators for each eco-
logical indicator to provide a field team with a quick way to access information about each
procedure. They are intended to be laminated and taken to the river site after the crew has
been formally trained in the detailed procedures as presented in the manual. They are ar-
ranged here in the general sequence of their use in the field.
    Quick Reference Guide For Initial Site Activities	B-2
    Quick Reference Guide For Water Chemistry And Microbiology	B-4
    Quick Reference Guide For Physical Habitat Characterization	B-7
    Quick Reference Guide For Periphyton	B-13
    Quick Reference Guide For Sediment Metabolism	B-15
    Quick Reference Guide For Benthic Macroinvertebrates	B-16
    Quick Reference Guide For Aquatic Vertebrates	B-20
    Quick Reference Guide For Fish Tissue Contaminants	B-23

-------
1.
2.
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
                          Quick Reference Guide for Initial Site Activities
Find the river location in the field corresponding to the "X" on 7.5" topo map (X-site). Crews should use
all available means to insure that they are at the correct site, as marked on the map, including: 1:24,000
USGS map orienteering, topographic landmarks, county road maps, local contacts, boat launches, and
global positioning system (GPS) confirmation of site latitude and longitude.
Classify the site. AT THE X-SITE. as:
    NON-TARGET


    TARGET
    INACCESSIBLE
                        No Stream Channel
                        Impounded River
                        Marsh/Wetland
                        Regular Wadeable Stream
                        Regular - Partial Boatable and Wadeable Combination
                        Regular Boatable
                        Intermittent Stream
                        Dry Channel
                        Altered Channel (channel different form map representation)
                        Physical Barriers (Physically unable to reach the X-site)
                        No Permission
Record class on Site Verification form, do not sample Non-target or inaccessible sites. Take samples from
Target sites as discussed in field operations and methods manual.
At the launch site, unload the rafts and all equipment, supplies, and sample  containers. Shuttle the
vehicles.
Using a laser rangefinder, measure the river width in several places, specifically the X-site and the two
boat launches. Record the width on the site verification form. Lay out a sample reach with a length of 100
times the river width by rolling a map wheel on the topographic map and marking the reach boundaries.
Do a reconnaissance of the sample reach while shuttling vehicles, obtaining  widths, and evaluating
launch sites. Extensive shallows, large log jams, absence of launch sites or vehicle access,  and hazardous
Whitewater may all preclude rafting.
Determine the float distance, if any, from the put-in to the first transect (Transect "A"), and from the last
transect (Transect "K") to the take-out.
Using  a laser rangefinder at  the most  upriver transect (Transect "A"), measure 10 channel widths
downriver to the next transect (JTransect  "B"). This distance is a profile.
Sample odd numbered site ID'S along the left shore (facing downriver); sample even numbered sites
along the right shore.
NOTE: There are some conditions that may require adjusting the reach about the X-site (i.e., the X-site
    no longer is located at the midpoint of the reach) to accommodate river access or to avoid river
    hazards or obstacles. If the beginning or end of the reach cannot be sampled due to obstacles or hazards,
    make up for the loss of reach length by moving ("sliding") the other end of the reach an equivalent
    distance away from the X site. Similarly, access points may necessitate sliding the reach. Do not "slide"
    the reach so that the X-site falls outside of the reach boundaries. Also, do not "slide" a reach to avoid man-
    made obstacles such as bridges, rip rap, or channelization.


-------
             Quick Reference Guide for Water Chemistry and Microbiology
/. Equipment to Carry in Field for Water Chemistry and Microbiology

    Rinse/Test bottles of QCCS in self-sealing plastic bag
    D.O./Temperature/Conductivity Meter
    FieldForms
    One 500-mL plastic beaker with handle, in clean self-sealing plastic bag
    One cubitainer in clean self-sealing plastic bag (barcode label attached)
    Two 60-mL syringes in a plastic container (each one with a bar code label attached)
    One 200-mL sterile square glass microbial bottle (barcode label attached)
    Two syringe valves in the plastic container
    Plastic cooler and several bags of ice
    Opaque garbage bag
    Electricians-tape

II. Extra Equipment to Carry in Vehicle
    Back-up labels, forms, cubitainers, syringes, syringe valves, and microbial bottles

III. Daily Activities after Sampling
    1. Check that cubitainer lid is on tight, has a flush seal, and is taped. Also tape the microbial cap.
    2. Prepare the sample for shipping (label and seal cooler, replace ice as close as possible to shipping time)
      OR direct delivery to the laboratory.
    3. Call Overnight shipping company to arrange pick-up of cooler.
    4. Rm'se the sampling beaker with deionized water three times.
    5. Make sure field meters are clean and are stored with moist electrodes.
    6. Label the next days sample containers (cubitainer, syringes, and microbial bottle), pack cubitainer
      and sample beakers in clean self-sealing plastic bag, and pack two syringes, syringe valves, and a
      microbial bottle in a plastic container with a snap-on lid.

                                                                                      (continued)

-------
      Quick Reference Guide for Water Chemistry and Microbiology (continued)

                Summary of Site Procedure for Water Chemistry and Microbiology

/.   Collect Water Sample

    A.  Make sure cubitainers and syringes are labeled and have the same barcode ID.
    B.  Make sure the microbial bottle is labeled with a barcode ID.
    C.  Cubitainer, syringe, and microbial samples are taken only from the middle of the flowing river at
        the last sample transect (Transect" K ").
    D.  Rinse the 500-mL sample beaker three times with river water from the mid-channel.
    E.  Rinse Cubitainer three times with 25-50 mL of river water, using the sample beaker. Rinse cubitainer
        lid with river water.
    F.  Fill cubitainer with river water using the 500 mL sample beaker. Expel any trapped air and cap the
        cubitainer. Make sure that the lid is seated correctly and that the seal is tight.
        DO NOT EXPAND CUBITAINER BY BLOWING IN IT.
    G.  Rinse each of the two, 60-mL syringes three times with  10-20 mL of river water.
    H.  Fill each of the syringes with river water from mid-river by slowly pulling out the plunger. If any air
        gets into the syringe, discard the sample and draw another.
    L  Invert the syringe (tip up) and cap the syringe with a syringe valve. Open the valve, tap the syringe
        to move any air bubbles to the tip, and expel any air and a few mL of water. Make sure there is 50-60
        mL of river sample in the syringe. Close the valve and place the syringes in their transport container.
    J.  Keep the microbial bottle closed until filled. Do not contaminate inner surface of cap or bottle. Fill
        the bottle without rinsing.
    K.  Take sample from upriver side of boat by holding bottle near base and plunge neck downward below
        water's surface. Turn bottle until neck points slightly upward and mouth is directed toward the
        current.
    L.  After sample is collected, leave ample air in the microbial bottle (~ 2.5 cm) and tape the cap tight.
    M. Place the cubitainer, syringes, and microbial bottle on ice in a cooler to keep cool (keep dark as well)
        until  shipment.

 //. InSituMeasurements

    A.  Conductivity
         1.  Turn on and check the zero and red line (if applicable) of the conductivity meter.
        2.  Measure and record the conductivity of the QCC solution. Rinse the probe in the "Rinse" bottle
            of QCC solution before immersing in the "Test" bottle  of QCC solution.
        3.  Measure and record river conductivity in mid-river AT EACH TRANSECT.
    B.  Dissolved Oxygen/Temperature
         1.  Calibrate the DO meter following meter instructions.
        2.  Measure the DO in mid-river at the middle of the flowing river of the last sample transect
         (Transect "K"). If water velocity is slow, jiggle the DO probe as you take the reading. Measure
         temperature mid-river ATEACHTRANSECT.

-------
             Quick Reference Guide for Physical Habitat Characterization

                          Field Summary: P-hab Layout And Workflow

1.  Habitat Sampling Layout:

    A.  Thalweg Profile: At 10 equally spaced intervals between each of 11 channel cross-sections (100
                        along entire reach):
        *   Classify habitat type, record presence of backwater and off-channel habitats. (10 between cross-
            sections, 100 total)
        *   Determine dominant substrate visually or using sounding rod. (10 between cross-sections, 100
            total)
            At 20 equally spaced intervals between each of 11 channel cross-sections (200 along entire
            reach):
            * Tally mid-channel snags (20 between cross-sections, 200 total).
            * Measure thalweg (maximum) depth using Sonar or rod (20 between cross-sections, 200 total)
    B.  Littoral/Riparian Cross-Sections:   @ 11 stops ("transects") at equal intervals along reach length

2.  Work Flow: In a single mid-river float down a 100 channel-width reach

    v At the upriver start point (Transect "A") and along the designated shoreline: Move boat in a "loop"
      within a 10 x 20 m littoral plot, measuring 5 littoral depths and probing substrate. Also estimate
      dominant and subdominant littoral substrate within the "loop." After the "loop," estimate areal fish
      cover within and tally LWD within or partially within the  10 x 20 m plot. Record densiometer
      measurements at the bank (up, down, left, right), and choose bank angle class, and estimate bankfull
    •  height, width and channel incision (for BOTH banks). Estimate and record distance to riparian
      vegetation on the chosen bank. Estimate visually riparian vegetation cover for the 10 x 20 m plot on
      BOTH sides of channel (plot starts at bankfull, continues back 10m from bankfull). For the largest
      riparian tree, estimate Dbh, height, species, distance from river edge. Visually tally human
      disturbances in the same plot as riparian vegetation. No bearing or slope at first cross section.
    •  Proceed downriver between Transects "A" and "B", making 20 thalweg depth measurements and
      substrate  snag probes; also classify habitat types. Estimate thalweg distance intervals by tracking boat
      lengths or channel-widths. One person measures thalweg depths and the other records those
      measurements. At the 20th thalweg measurement location (close to Transect "B"), backsite a compass
      bearing in mid-channel, then distance and % slope back to your visual "mark" on the bank at the
      previous transect ("A").
    •  When you complete 20 thalweg intervals and reach one of 11 cross sections, stop at the chosen shore
      and take out a new Channel/Riparian Transect Form for Transect "B". Repeat all the Channel/Riparian
      measurements at this new location.
    •  Repeat the cycle of thalweg and cross section measurements until you reach  transect 11 ("K") at the
      downriver end.
                                                                                      (continued)

-------
              Quick Reference Guide for Physical Habitat Characterization

                           Field Summary: Components of P-Hab Protocol

Thalweg Depth Profile, Mid-Channel Snags, Hab. Type, Off-channel, Substrate:

    • At 20 approximately equal spaced intervals between each of 11 channel cross-sections (200 along
      entire reach) while floating mid-channel:
      - Measure max. depth ("Thalweg") at each increment
      - Tally mid-channel snags
    • At 10 approximately equal spaced intervals between each of 11 channel cross-sections (100 along
      entire reach) while floating mid-channel:
      - Classify habitat type and off-channel habitats
      - Determine dominant substrate

Channel and Riparian Cross-Sections:

    • Measurements: Wetted width, mid-channel bar width, gradient (clinometer or Abney level), sinuosity
      (compass backsite), riparian canopy cover (densiometer).
    • Visual Estimates:  Bankfull width, bankfull height, incision height, bank angle, shoreline substrate,
      large woody debris, areal cover class and type of riparian vegetation in Canopy, Mid-Layer and
      Ground Cover; areal cover class of fish cover features, aquatic macrophytes, and filamentous algae;
      presence and proximity of human disturbances.

                                                                                     (continued)

-------
   Quick Reference Guide for Physical Habitat Characterization (continued)

               Field Summary: Rip. Veg., Human Disturb., In-Channel Cover:

Observations upriver 10 meters and downriver 10 meters from each of the 11 cross-section transects.
For riparian vegetation and human disturbances, include the visible area from the river back a distance of
10m (30 ft) shoreward from both the left and right banks. If the wetted channel is split by a mid-channel
bar, the bank and riparian measurements shall be for each side of the channel, not the bar.
Three vegetation layers:                                                  "
    CANOPY LAYER (>5 mhigh)
    UNDERSTORY (0.5 to 5 m high)
    GROUND COVER layer (<0.5 m high)
Canopy  and UnderstOry Vegetation Types:
    (Deciduous, Coniferous, Broadleaf Evergreen, Mixed, or None) in each of the two taller layers
    (Canopy and Understory). "Mixed" if more than 10% of the areal coverage made up of the alternate
    type.
Areal Cover Classes for Vegetation and In-Channel Cover:
    0: (absent — zero cover)
    1: (sparse - cover <10%)
    2: (moderate - cover 10-40%)
    3: (heavy - cover 40-75%)
    4: (very heavy — cover >75%).
Tallying Human Disturbances:
    B:  PRESENT within the defined 20 m river segment and located in the river or on the wetted or
        bankfull river
    C:  CLOSE -  Present within the 10 x 20 m riparian plot area, but above bankfull level
    P:  PRESENT, but observed outside the riparian plot area
    0:  NOT PRESENT within or adjacent to the 20 m river segment or riparian plot

-------
       Quick Reference Guide for Physical Habitat Characterization (continued)

                    Field Summaries: Substrate And Woody Debris Size Classes

Observe bottom substrates within a 10m swath along the 20m of channel margin that is centered on each
transect location. Determine and record the dominant and subdominant substrate size class at 5 system-
atically spaced locations estimated by eye within this 10m x 20m plot and 1m back from the waterline.
Substrate Size Classes:

RS     Bedrock (Smooth)
RR     Bedrock (Rough)
HP     Hardpan
BL     Boulders
CB     Cobbles
GC     Gravel(Coarse)
GF     Gravel (Fine)
SA     Sand

FN     Fines
WD     Wood
OT     Other
>4000 mm
>4000 mm
>4000 mm
>250 to 4000 mm
64 to 250 mm
16 to 64 mm
2 to 16 mm
0.06 to 2 mm

<0.06 mm
Regardless of Size
Regardless of Size
smooth surface rock or hardpan (bigger than a car)
Rough surface rock (bigger than a car)
(consists of firm, consolidated fines)
(basketball to car size)
(tennis ball to basketball size)
(marble  to tennis ball size)
(ladybug to marble size)
(smaller than ladybug size, but visible as particles -
gritty between fingers).
Silt-Clay-Muck (not gritty between fingers)
Wood or other organic material
Metal, Tires, Car bodies, asphalt, concrete, etc.
(Describe in comments if you enter "OT").
Large Woody Debris Size Classes:
           LWD Definition:
    Diameter (small end) > 30 cm (>1 ft.)
    Length > 5 m (> 15 ft) — count only part with diam > 30 cm.
           Two Tallys:
               (1)   LWD at least partially in the baseflow channel (wetted).
               (2)   LWD presently dry but contained within the bankfull (active) channel, and LWD
                    spanning above the active channel.
           Size Categories for Tally (12 potential combinations):

                            Diameter (large end):
                                       Length:
                        0.3 to <0.6 m
                        0.6 to <0.8 m
                        0.8 to <1.Om
                        >1.0m
              (1 to 2 ft.)
              (2 to 2.6 ft)
              (2.6 to 3.3ft)
              (> 3.3ft)
          5-<15m
          15 - <30 m
          >30m
(16-49 ft)
(49 - 98 ft)
(>98ft)
                                                                                     (continued)

-------
        Quick Reference Guide for Physical Habitat Characterization (continued)

                     Field Summary: Habitat Classification At Channel Unit Scale
 Class (Code)

 Pools (PO):

 Plunge Pool
 Trench Pool
 Lateral Scour Pool
 Backwater Pool
 Dam Pool
 Glide (GL)
 Riffle (RI)

 Rapid (RA)

 Cascade (CA)

 Falls (FA)

 Dry Channel (DR)
 Off-Channel Areas
              Channel Unit Habitat Classes"

    Description

Still water, low velocity, smooth, glassy surface, usually deep compared to other parts
of the channel:
Pool at base of plunging cascade or falls.
Pool-like trench in the center of the stream
Pool scoured along a bank.
Pool separated from main flow off the side of the channel.
Pool formed by impoundment above dam or constriction.
Water moving slowly, with a smooth, unbroken surface. Low turbulence.
Water moving, with small ripples,  waves and eddies - waves not breaking, surface
tension not broken. Sound: "babbling", "gurgling".
Water movement rapid and turbulent, surface with intermittent Whitewater with
breaking waves. Sound: continuous rushing, but not as loud as cascade.
Water movement rapid and very turbulent over steep channel bottom. Most of the
water surface is broken in short, irregular plunges, mostly Whitewater. Sound: roaring.
Free falling water over a vertical or near vertical drop into plunge, water turbulent and
white over high falls. Sound: from splash to roar:
No water in the channel
Side-channels, sloughs, backwaters, and  alcoves that are separated from the main
channel.
"Note that in order for a channel habitat unit to be distinguished, it must be at least as wide or long as the
channel is wide.

                               Field Summary: P-hab Problem Areas

Mid-channel Bars: dry at baseflow, inundated at bankfull flow.

           Measure wetted width across and over mid-channel bars, but record bar width in the column
           provided on the Channel/Riparian Transect Form.

Islands: as high as the surrounding flood plain; dry even at bankfull flow.

           Measure only the width of the main channel between island and shore

Both bars and islands cause the river to split into side channels. When a bar or island is encountered along the
thalweg profile, choose to navigate and survey the channel that carries the most flow.

Side channels (off-channeD:

           When present, check the "Off-channel" column on the Thalweg Profile Form. Begin checking at
           the point of divergence continuing until convergence. In the case  of a slough or alcove, "off-
           channel" checkmarks should continue from the point of divergence downriver to where it is no
           longer evident.

Dry and Intermittent rivers:

           Record zeros for depth and wetted width in places where no water is in the channel. Record habitat
           type as dry channel (DR).

-------
                           Quick Reference Guide For Periphyton
Field Equipment
1.  Large funnel (15-20 cm diameter).
2.  Scrape area delimiter (3.8 cm diameter pipe, 3 cm tall).
3.  Stiff-bristle toothbrush with handle bent at 90° angle.
4.  Wash bottle.
5.  Collection bottle to catch removed periphyton.
6.  60 mL syringes with 3/8" hole bored into the end.
7.  50 mL centrifuge tubes or similar sample vials.
8.  Formalin.
9.  Glass-fiber filters (0.45m average pore size) for chlorophyll a and biomass (AFDM).
10. Forceps for filter handling.
11. Millipore®-type filtration apparatus with plastic or stainless steel filter base, and Nalgene® funnel and
    suction flask.
12. Nalgene® hand-operated vacuum pump (need one additional pump as a backup).
13. Aluminum foil.
14. Ice chest.

Field Protocols

1.  Periphyton samples are collected from the designated shoreline at each transect location.
2.  Collect a sample of substrate (rock or wood) that is small enough (< 15 cm diameter) and can be easily
    removed from the river. Place the substrate in a plastic funnel which drains into a 500-mL plastic bottle
    with volume graduations marked on it.
3.  Use the area delimiter to define a 12-cm2 area on the upper surface of the substrate. Dislodge attached
    periphyton from the substrate within the delimiter into the funnel by brushing with a stiff-bristled
    toothbrush for 30 seconds. Take care to ensure that the upper surface of the substrate is the surface that is
    being scrubbed, and that the entire surface within the delimiter is scrubbed.
4.  Fill a wash bottle with river water. Using a minimal volume of water from this bottle, wash the dislodged
    periphyton from the funnel into the 500-mL bottle.
5.  If no coarse sediment (cobbles or larger) are present, collect soft sediments by vacuuming the upper 1 cm
    of sediments confined within the 12-cm2 sampling ring into a 60-mL syringe.
6  Place the sample collected at each sampling site into the single 560-mL bottle to produce the composite
    index sample.
7.  After samples have been collected from all 11 transects, thoroughly mix the 500-mL bottle regardless of
    substrate type.
    Record total volume of composited sample before proceeding to the next step!
    Four subsamples will be taken from each composite sample. These are:
    a.  Identification/Enumeration
         1)   Withdraw 50 mL of mixed sample and place in a labeled sample vial (50-mL centrifuge tubes
             work well). Cover label with clear tape.
        2)   Preserve sample with 2 mL of 10% formalin. Gloves should be worn.
        3)  Tightly cap tube and tape with electrical tape.
    b.  Chlorophyll a
         1)  Withdraw 25 mL of mixed sample and filter onto a glass-fiber filter (0.45 um pore size) using a
             hand-operated vacuum pump.  (Note: for soft-sediment samples, allow grit to settle before
             withdrawing sample).
        2)  Fold filter so that the sample on the filter surface is folded together, wrap in aluminum foil, and
             affix the tracking label to the outside, and seal  with clear tape.
         3)  Freeze filter as soon as possible by placing it in a freezer.
         4)  Store frozen for laboratory analysis.

                                                                                       (continued)
8.
9.

-------
                Quick Reference Guide For Periphyton (continued)

c.   Ash Free Dry Mass (AFDM)
    1)  Withdraw 25 mL of mixed sample and filter onto a glass-fiber filter (0.45 um pore size) using a
        hand-operated vacuum pump. (Note: for soft-sediment samples, allow grit to settle before
        withdrawing sample).
    2)  Fold filter so that the sample on the filter surface is folded together, wrap in aluminum foil, and
        affix the tracking label to the outside, and seal with clear tape.
    3)  Freeze filter as soon as possible by placing it in a freezer.
    4)  Store frozen for laboratory for analysis.
d.   Alkaline/Acid Phosphatase
    1)  Withdraw 50 mL of mixed sample and place in a labeled sample vial (50-mL centrifuge tubes
        work well). Cover label with clear tape.                        -    - 	
    2)  Tightly cap tube and tape with electrical tape.
    3)  Freeze sample as soon as possible by placing it on dry ice.
    4)  Store frozen for laboratory analysis.

-------
                    Quick Reference Guide for Sediment Metabolism
Field Equipment
    1.   Ice chest for floating centrifuge tubes during incubation
    2.   1000 mL Nalgene© beaker for holding centrifuge tubes during incubation.
    3.   Small scoop sampler for sediments.
    4.   50-mL, screw-top, centrifuge tubes.
    5.   Digital dissolved oxygen meter (e.g. YSI95).
    6.   Spare batteries for D.O. meter.
    7.   Permanent markers for labeling tubes.
    8.   Sample labels and field data sheets.
    9.   Ice chest with ice for sample freezing.

Field Protocols

    Dissolved Oxygen Meter Calibration (for YSI model 95)
    1.  Calibrate meter using the water-saturated atmosphere chamber described in the meter's operations
        manual. Allow at least 15 minutes for the probe to equilibrate before attempting to calibrate.

    Sediment Collection and Experimental Set-up
     1.  Collect and combine fine-grained, surface sediments (top 2 cm) from all depositional areas at each
        transect (Transects A-K) along the designated shoreline of the river reach.
    2.  Fill ice chest 2/3 full with river water and record temperature and dissolved oxygen (D.O.).
    3.  Thoroughly mix composite sediment sample.
    4.  Place 10 mL  of sediment in each -of 5 labeled, 50 mL screw-top centrifuge -tubes.
    5.  Fill each tube to the top (no head space) with stream water from the ice chest and seal.
    6.  Fill one additional tube with  stream water only to serve as a. blank.
    7.  Incubate tubes in closed ice chest for 2 hours.
     8.  Measure D.O. in each tube, including the blank.
    9.  Decant overlying water and save sediment.
     10. Tightly seal tubes and freeze as  soon as possible.
     11. Store frozen for laboratory analysis.

-------
                Quick Reference Guide For Benthic Macroinvertebrates

Table I. Base Protocols for Collecting Macroinvertebrates

1.   Set drift net assembly(s) near the put-in or take-out location.
2.   Shore kick net samples are collected at each of the transect locations along the designated shoreline.
    Drift nets collect samples during the sampling day while the crew floats the river.
 3.  If riffle or run, use the kick net protocol in Table II. If pool, use the kick net protocol in Table HI or hand
    pick for 60 seconds if kick net cannot be used.
4.   Go to next downriver transect and repeat. Combine all riffle and pool samples into one bucket. Check net
    after each sample for clinging organisms and transfer to bucket.
5.   After a sample is collected from each of the transects and all kick net samples are combined into one
    bucket^ obtain a composite sample as described in Table V.
6.   Drift net(s) procedures are described in Table IV. Processing is described in Table V.
7.   Preserve and label each sample as described in Table VI.
               /
Table II. Procedures for Riffles and Glides using Kick Net Sampler

1.   Attach four foot pole to the sampler.
2.   Position sampler quickly and securely on river bottom with net opening upriver.
3.   Hold the sampler in position on the substrate while checking for snails and clams in an area of about 0.5
    m2 in front of the net; kick the substrate vigorously for about 20 seconds in front of the net.
4.   Inspect and rub off with the hands any organisms clinging to the rocks, especially those covered with
    algae or other debris.                             /
5.   Remove the net from the water with a quick upriver motion to wash the organisms to the bottom of net.
6.   Rinse' net contents into a bucket containing one or two gallons of water by inverting the net  in the water.
7.  Inspect the net for clinging organisms. With forceps remove any organisms found and place them into the
    bucket.
8.  Large objects (rocks, sticks, leaves, etc.) in the bucket should be carefully inspected for organisms before
    discarding.
9.  After all transects are sampled and all samples are combined in ONE bucket (riffle/glide + pool), obtain
    a composite sample as described in Table V.

Table III. Procedures for Pools using the Modified Kick Net Sampler

 1.  Attach four-foot pole to the sampler.
2.  Inspect about ° square meter of bottom for any heavy organisms, such as mussels and snails, which have
    to be hand picked and placed in the net.
3.  While disturbing about 0.5 m2 of substrate by  kicking, collect a 20-second sample by dragging the net
    repeatedly through the area being disturbed. Keep moving the net all the time so that the organisms
    trapped in  the net will not escape.
 4.  After 20 seconds remove the net from the water with a quick upriver motion to wash the organisms to the
    bottom of the net.
 5.  Rinse net contents into a small bucket of water (about one or two gallons) by inverting the net in the
    water.
 6.  Inspect the net for clinging organisms. With forceps remove any organisms found and place them in the
    bucket.
 7.  Large objects in the bucket should be carefully inspected for organisms which are washed into the bucket
    before discarding.
 8.  After all transects are sampled and all samples  are combined in ONE bucket (pool + riffle/glide), obtain
    a composite sample as described in Table V.
 Table IV. Collection Procedures for Drift Nets
 1.
Do not use drift nets for large rivers with currents less than 0.05 m/s.
                                                                                      (continued)

-------
          Quick Reference Guide For Benthic Macroinvertebrates (continued)

2.  Install the net at the downriver end of the reach (Transect K). The take-out location is 1st choice,
    otherwise the put-in location - whichever is closer to the reach.
3.  Set the nets in the main flow of the river (avoid backwaters, eddies, river margins) at depths of about 25
    cm from the bottom substrate and 10 cm below the water's surface.
4.  Anchor the net assembly using anchors and cables. Record START TIME.
5.  Measure the current velocity at the entrance of the net, using a neutrally buoyant object as follows:
        a.  Measure out a straight segment of the river reach just upstream of the drift net location in which
            an object can float relatively freely and passes through within about 10  to 30 seconds.
        b.  Select an object that is neutrally buoyant, like a small rubber ball or an orange; it must float, but
            very low in the water. The object should be small enough that it does not "run aground" or drag
            bottom.
        c.  Time the passage of the object through the defined river segment 3 times. Record the length of
            the segment and each transit time in the Comments section of the Sample Collection Form.
6.  After floating the river, retrieve the net assembly from the water, taking care not to disturb the bottom
    upriver of the net. Record the END TIME.
7.  Determine the current velocity again as described above, calculate the average from the 6 measurements,
    and record on the form.
8.  Concentrate the material in each net in one corner by swishing up and down in the river. Wash the
    material into a bucket half filled with water (NOT the shore sample bucket). Remove as much as possible
    from the nets.
9.  The contents from both nets are combined into a single bucket. After this, pour the sample over a sieving
    bucket (same bucket used in the kick net samples).
10. Large objects in the bucket should be carefully inspected for organisms which are washed into the bucket
    before discarding.
11. After both nets are combined into one bucket, obtain a composite sample as described in Table V.

Table V. Procedures for Obtaining the Composite Sample

1.  Pour the contents of the composite bucket through a U.S. Standard 30 sieve. Examine the bucket while
    rinsing it well to be sure all organisms are washed from the bucket onto the sieve.
2.  Wash contents of the sieve to one side by gently agitating in water and wash into jar using as little water
    from the squirt bottle as possible. Carefully examine the sieve for any remaining organisms  and place
    them in the appropriate jar labeled as either "shore" or "drift" sample.

Table VI. Sample Preserving and Labeling

1.  Fill in special pre-numbered barcoded label and place on jar. All additional jars used for a sample must
    be labeled with same number. Enter this number which will be  used for  tracking  purposes in the
    computer.
2.  Preserve samples in ethanol as follows:
        a.  If jar is more than 1/4 full of water, pour off enough to bring it to less than 1/4 full using proper
            sieve to retain organisms.
        b.  Fill jar nearly full with 95% ethanol so that the concentration of ethanol is 70%. If there is a
            small amount of water in the sample, it may not be necessary to fill the jar entirely full to reach
            a 70% concentration.
        c.  Transfer any organisms on the sieve back into the jar with forceps.
3.  Check to be sure that the pre-numbered stick-on barcoded label is the on jar. Cover the entire label with
    clear, waterproof tape.
4.  Seal the caps with electrical tape.
5.  Place samples in cooler or other secure  container for transport.
6.  Secure all equipment in the vehicle.


-------
                      Quick Reference Guide for Aquatic Vertebrates

Field Protocols For Fish Collection

1.  Site Selection
        a. Determine river bank to be sampled. Stay along this shore the entire day, unless river aspect is
           unchanging and the selected side is not representative of both.
        b. Float downriver along the designated shoreline, stopping at each transect (A to K).
        c. In case of emergency, determine location of means of easy egress from river.

2.  Electrofishing
        a. Check all electrical connections and potential conductors. Place cathodes and anodes in the
           water. Fill livewell with river water.
        b. Start generator, switch to pulsed DC, a frequency of SOpps, low range and 40%. These are the
           initial settings. Set timer arid depress pedal switch to begin fishing.
        c. With switch depressed and floating downriver near shore, maneuver the raft or anode to cover a
           swath 3-4 meters wide, at an oar's length from shore, near cover, and at depths less than 3 meters
           wherever possible.
        d. Deposit fish in the livewell as soon as possible; do not hold them in the electrical field.
        e. Continue fishing until the next transect.
        f. Process fish when stopped at each transect. Record total time spent collecting and shocking time
           on data sheets.
        g. Identify and release any threatened and endangered species.
        h. Identify and measure (TL) sport fish and very large specimens, record external anomalies, and
           release unharmed.
        i. Identify other specimens. Determine number of individuals in species, measure  largest and
           smallest individuals, and voucher as described in Voucher Protocol.
        j. Large, questionable species should be placed on ice and then frozen.
        k. Retain a subsample of target species for Fish Tissue Contaminants analysis.

                                                                                       (continued)

-------
               Quick Reference Guide for Aquatic Vertebrates (continued)
Categories

Absent
Blisters
Blackening*
Extensive Black spot disease
Cysts
Copepod
Deformities

Eroded fins

Eroded gills
Fungus

Fin anomalies
Grubs
Hemorrhaging

Ich
Lesions

Lice
Mucus

None
Other
Scale anomalies
Shortened operculum
Tumors
Leeches

Exophthalmia
   Anomaly Categories and Codes

Code            Definition
 AB
 BL
 BK
 BS
 CY
 CO
 DE

 EF

 EG
 FU

 FA
 WG
 HM

 1C
 LE

 LI
 MU

 NO
 or
 SA
 SO
 TU
 WL

 EX
Absent eye, fin, tail.
In mouth, just under skin.
Tail or whole body with darkened pigmentation.
Small black cysts (dots) all over the fins and body.
Fluid-filled swellings; maybe small dots or large.
A parasitic infection characterized by a worm like
copepod embedded in the flesh of the fish; body
extends out and leaves a sore/discoloration at base,
may be in mouth gills, fins, or anywhere on body.
Skeletal anomalies of the head, spine, and body shape;
amphibians may have extra tails, limbs, toes.
Appear as reductions or substantial fraying of fin
surface area.
Gill filaments eroded from tip.
May appear as filamentous or "fuzzy" growth on the
fins, eyes, or body.
Abnormal thickenings or irregularities of rays
White or yellow worms embedded in muscle or fins.
Red spots on mouth, body, fins, fin bases, eyes, and
gills.
White spots on the fins, skin or gills.
Open sores or exposed tissue; raised, granular or warty
outgrowths.
Scale-like, mobile arthropod.
Thick and excessive on skin  or gill, as long cast from
vent.
No anomalies present.
Anomalies or parasites not specified (Please comment).
Missing patches, abnormal thickings, granular skin
Leaves a portion of the gill chamber uncovered
Areas of irregular cell growth which are firm and
cannot be easily broken open when pinched. (Masses
caused by parasites can usually be opened easily.)
Annelid worms which have anterior and posterior
suckers. They may attach anywhere on the body.
Bulging of the eye.
                                                                                    (continued)

-------
               Quick Reference Guide for Aquatic Vertebrates (continued)
                 Guidelines and Procedures for Preparing Fish Voucher Specimens

Category 1. Large easily identified  species OR adults may be difficult to identify OR the  species is
           uncommon in that region. Preserve 1-2 small (<150 mm total length) adult individuals per site
           plus 2-5 juveniles. If only large adults are collected, reserve smallest individual until voucher
           procedure is complete and preserve ONLY if space is available. Photograph if considered too
           large for the jar.

Category 2. Small to moderate-sized fish OR difficult to identify  species. Preserve up to 20 adults  and
           juveniles. If less than 20 individuals are collected, voucher all of them.

Category 3. Species of "special concern." These are state or federally listed species. Photograph and release.
           If specimens have died, include in voucher collection, note on data sheet and notify appropriate
           state official as soon as possible.
                a.   After all individuals of a species have been processed, place the voucher sub sample in
                    a bucket with carbon dioxide tablets and a small amount of water. Individuals > 160
                    mm should be slit on the lower abdomen of the RIGHT side.
                    When specimens are dead, transfer to a small nylon bag containing a waterproof label
                    with tag#.Place in "Voucher" jar in 10% formalin. BE SURE THAT JAR IS LABELED
                    INSIDE AND OUT WITH A VOUCHER LABEL (site ID, barcode, and date).
                    DO NOT over pack the sample jars with specimens OR use less formalin than is needed.
                    If a fish will not fit in a jar, freeze the specimen.
                    Continue until all species are processed. Seal voucher jar with electrical or clear tape.
                    Check that the jar is correctly labeled. Enter BARCODE'ID in appropriate place on
                    field data sheet.
                    Transport to storage depot at end of week. Store in a cool, dark, ventilated space.
b.
c.
d.
e.

-------
                  Quick Reference Guide For Fish Tissue Contaminants

                         Selecting And Processing Fish Tissue Specimens

NOTE: If neither a primary nor secondary species sample is available, use your best judgement in sending
some type of composite fish tissue sample.

Primary Sample (P)

After all voucher specimens have been prepared, choose a cottid, cyprinid, or salmonid that has enough
similarly sized individuals to weigh to 400 g.

Secondary Sample ("SI

After all voucher specimens have been prepared, select a large piscivore or omnivore species that has at least
5 individuals 120 mm. Include similar sized individuals if available.

1.    Place the fish into abucket with two carbon dioxide tablets (e.g., "Alka Seltzer®") and a small volume
      of water. After they have been anaesthetized, use clean hands to transfer them to aluminum foil.
2.    Prepare a clean work surface to prepare the primary composite sample. Keep hands, work surfaces, and
      wrapping materials clean and free of potential contaminants (mud, fuel, formalin, sun screen, insect
      repellant, etc.)
3-P.  For primary samples, record the common name (from a standardized list) of the species, its species code
      (if required), and the number of individuals in the sample in the appropriate fields on line "PI" of the
      Sample Collection Form (Figure 11-1).
3-S.  Measure the total length (TL) of each secondary individual. Record the common name  (from  a
      standardized list) of the secondary target species, its species ctide (if required), and the total length for
      each individual on lines SI through S5 in the secondary  sample section of the Sample Collection
      Form.
4.    If the individuals included in composite samples were collected from throughout the sampling reach,
      pjace an "X" in the "Yes" box in the sample section of the Sample Collection Form. If the individuals
      were only collected from a limited segment of the sampling reach, place an "X" in the "No" box and
      explain in the "Explain" field on the form.
5-P.  Wrap all primary fish  together in a single piece of aluminum foil, making sure the dull side of the
      aluminum foil is in contact with the fish. Place the sample  in a self-sealing plastic bag.
5-S.  Wrap each fish of the secondary sample separately in aluminum foil, with the dull side of the foil in
      contact with the fish. Place all the wrapped individuals into a single self-sealing plastic bag.
6     Expel excess air and seal the bag. Wrap clear tape around the bag to seal and make a surface for each
      sample label.                        .     .
7-P.  Prepare two Fish Tissue sample labels (each having  the same sample  ID number [Figure 11-2]) by
      filling in the stream ID and the date of collection. Circle' PRIMARY'' on each label. Record the sample
      ID number (barcode) in the primary sample section of the Sample Collection Form.
7-S.  Prepare two Fish Tissue sample labels (each having the same sample  ID number [Figure 11-2]) by
      filling in the stream ID and the date of collection. Circle "SECONDARY" on each label. Record the
      sample ID number (barcode) in the secondary sample section of the Sample Collection Form.
8.    Attach the appropriate label to the tape surface of the bag. Cover the label with a strip of clear tape.-
      Place the labeled bag into a second self-sealing plastic bag. Seal the bag and attach the second label to
      the outside of the appropriate bag. Cover the, label with a strip of clear tape.,
J.     Place the double-bagged sample into a cooler containing bags of ice until shipment. Keep the sample
      frozen until shipment.



-------
                         Appendix C
   Species Codes for Aquatic Vertebrates
    The following table contains the unique
8-character species code, the scientific name,
and the common name assigned to each
aquatic vertebrate species expected to be col-
lected by EMAP sampling protocols in the
Mid-Atlantic and Western regions. Gener-
ally, the species code is composed of the first
four letters of the genus plus the first four let-
ters of the species name. Modifications to this
coding scheme were made in cases where two
species could be assigned the same code.
Species entries are arranged first by family
(alphabetically), then by the assigned species
code.

-------






e
0
t
Mid-AtianticE
t-t
<2
o
OJ
n,
tebrateS
3
a
o1



VERTCODE
o>
i
&
jj
£



1





J
1
CA



t/3
1

Common Name
ICHTBDEL



1
I


$
Petromyzontid





bdellium

e
8
Ichthyomy

I
ICHTCAST


>v
I
1


U
Petromyzontid





castaneus

c
8
Ichthyomy

1
u
oo
t— H



S.
1


CO
Petromyzontid





8
CO

c
8
Ichthyomy
§
NORTHERNBROOKLAMP
I



1
I


ca
Petromyzontid





"u
e
00

e
8
Ichthyomy
ol
MOUNTAINBROOKLAMP
U
H- 1



§,
J


03
Petromyzontid





unicuspis

c
0
N
Ichthyomy

SILVER LAMPREY
LAMPAEPY



OJ
a
J


S
Petromyzontid





aepyptera



S
&

LEASTBROOKLAMPREY
LAMPAPPE



I
J


4J
Petromyzontid





•3
1
03



S
8,
y
AMERICAN BROOK LAMP
PETRMARI



§,
J


JU
Petromyzontid





marinus


e
Petromyzoi

SEALAMPREY
i



'&
1


eg
Petromyzontid









Lampetra

UNKNOWNLAMPREY
ACPBREV


e
o
op
3
00



Acipenseridae



£
3
brevirostr



Acipenser

SHORTNOSE STURGEON
ACPFULV


e
0
U
00
l_
3
00



Acipenseridae




CO
fulvescen



Acipenser

LAKE STURGEON
ACPOXYR


c
o

-------
                                        sis
                       y   i-   §    I   s   §    a
                       gg88o.8oww««
                       SSaassssagg
                                                                                      3   3
                                                                                      oo   oo    oo    oo    oo   oo
!
      1
 d>    Qi
»•   a
 60




I
 a»
i
                       O

                       0
                             §
                       JS
                                                         ffi
                                                                           §
                                                    CS

                                                   00
                                              I
                                             "3
                                             oo




                                                                     I
                                                                    "3
                                                                    oo

      CB
      •o
|   I


o    S
 8
T3
            3

           O
      3

      U
 O    D
 C$    Cj
•o    -a
 3

U
                  3

                 U
odontid
odontidae
            3   5
                                               8    8    8
                                              •a    -a   -a
                                                          o
                                                          o
                                                    O
                                                    o
                                              o
                                              o
                                                                           di4>^^4>DOD
                                                                           CC     KJ    ^    C3    ^     Cd    ^    ^
mon
monid
mon
mon
on
on
                                                                                       S    S
monid
monid
                             caoocAcdcdcdcdcdcdcdcd
                             WpqWoo-oooooooooooooo

-8
                             (U
de;

americ
                                                    o
                                   S    §


                                   x   I
                                   3.   §•
                                   .S    03
                                   o    c«
                                                          S3
                                                         • 
-------
   co
                                                           8'8
i
g

•a
co
      I
      c
      •a
o


'g
•a

I
3
CO
            3
            CO
   o
   3
   CO
CD  (U  CD
^  J4  *t
CJ  O  O
333
CO  CO  CO
JS  JS
g  g
CO  CO
I
CO
I
CO
I
CO
                              o

                              CO
o

CO
cj
3
CO
CD  CD  u
111
CO  CO  CO
CO
   CD
   (3
   •o
   a
   co
         8
         12
CD
03
•o
C[
en
O
a
U
CD
ca
T3
o
en
i
U
1
I
8
«
o
Jg
•a
1
2
as
O
g
•a
1
I
ca
U
8
•a
1
en
O
ca •
u
(U
a
•o
o
en
i
O
8
•o
S
o
en
S-
U
c^
•a
1
CA
i
U
£
•a
1
I
03
0
£
T3
1
S
ts
U
%
•a
1
en
p
OS
U
8
T3
0
en
2
C3
U
CD
03
X)
2
en
1
U
8
T3
O
v>
%
U
S
T3
O
8
S
0
S
•a
1
15
U
%
T3
1
ts
U
ex  c
en  S3
         (U
         C3
         £

         I?

   en


-  1
S  I
CD  CS
>  O
                     CD



                     I
                     O
            1
            CO
            §
                           I
                           o
                        o

                        60
                                       g
                                       2
                                      ea
                                      X)
      
-------
 «
b
 §

I
 o
co
 £
T3

1
            1
 o
CO
                  8
                  o
                 co
      o
      CO
      3-
      CO
                                        1
                                        co
            6
            o
T3

'S
 O
T3


 I
r°
 I
            o
            CS
           U
      o
      cS
      U
                        o
                        CS
                       U
            o
            cS
           U
                       '§•
                 3    2    -a
                                        3
 8-
 §•
 &
                                              o
                                              s
                                        §
                                        1
                                                   co
                                              o
                                              CS
                       s
                       ts
                       u




3
g
I"
CS
S
2
CO
0
X
1
CS
S-
0
CO
O
X
1
CS
s
2
CO
O
X
o
s
cS
a
2
CO
O
X-
1
CS
S
Q
CO
O
X
o
S
CS
s
0
CO
O
X
1
CS

o
CO
0
X
o
s
CS
s
2
CO
O
X
1
CO
3
S
Q
CO
O
cS
U

                       1
                       o
 a,
o"
                                              "cS

                                              O
                                                               co
      8    c^
      ."2   12
      •c   -c
                                                               3
                                                               CS
                                                               bO

                                                               §
omu
                                                                    0
                                                               Q

                                                               B
                                                               S
                                                    3
                                                   •a
                                                    c
                                              2
                                              &n
                                              |
                                              u
                                                         a
                                                         S2"
                                                         I
 %
•o
 
                                                                                                       a,
                                                                                                       00


                                                                           3
                                                                           O
                                                                          O
                                                                          c?
                                                                                                  S,
                                                                                                  >~v
                                                                                                 o
                                                                                        ,
                                                                                      >%
                                                                                      U
                                                                                      CU
                                                                                      u"

-------
1
      B
      ^^grStSj^SjSjSj^SjJj^

      ooooooooooooo
      BBBBBBBBBBBBB
      BBBBBBBBBBSBB
                                                                     O


                                                                     B
                                                                                                O
                                                                                                     o
                                                                                                     1
                                                                                                                1
1°   1°    12
!S   |E    ]B



CJ   (_)    (j
                     TJ

                     '5


                     '§,
     IS
     'a
                          12
                          'a
S
'B
12
'S
12
'S
T3

'5
3   3
|a   |S


 O<    OH
IS
'S
12
'a

U
12
'a
12
'a
S

i
IS
'a
12
'a


 OH
                                                                                     B    a
                                                                                     •c •  -c
                                                                                     OH    OH
u¥u*o>uvo>u>1o>u
                                                                U
                                                                     uuuuuuuu
s
CO
§   s

!   ^  i    1
§   -g   •§    .a
>    ?    O    t3
                      —•    CO   -i-2
                      a    •«   cj
punc
                                           es


                                           ISO
                                           CQ

                                           6
                                           '5b
                                           a
albeolu
nus
chrysocephal
coccogen
cornu
                                                           §
                                                          1
nu
atu
                                                      ^
                                                                                                --H    CO
va
mbra
aes
oreri
                                                                     5



                                                                     |
O
mm
B

-------
r.  Q/J

E  U



O  O   S   S
u  u   u   u   .
o  o   o   o   o
2  Z   £   g   £
1
c
     I
     c
 I
    £££££:£££«£££&&&£
    ooooooooooooooo
    eCaeeeC'Caeceeee
    aeeeseeciaeceeee
 >%
o
     S   S
    •o   -a
         O
                      ca
                      •O
                  (U(U>

s
',5
"3.
              1
I
a  -i
I   I
         3
         C
                 60

                 O
         3





         I
                  
-------
1
H
i
03
fc
ra
5
«



^•>
h
fa



1





1


Common Name
i
i


&
§
c
s

NEW RIVER SfflNEF
1
CO



£
o
B
c
s


•a
c
PH
U*



semperasper




CO
I
&

&
rrl
ROUGHHEADSfflNI
CO



st
o
c
c
s


T3
e
OH
0*


CO
spectrunculu




CO
D-
§


MIRROR SHINER
1
i


?
o
c
s

03
T3
C
S,
u"



stramineus




CO
1


CO
CO
W
W
1


&
o
c
s


•o
c
OH
u*



telescopus




CO
I-
1

^y
TELESCOPE SHINEI
1
55


^
o
c
B


•a
c
£
u"



volucellus




CO
1


MIMIC SfflNER
g
1


&
0
B
S


•a
c:
OH
u"



n>
CO
3
•o
O
a>
o
CO
S1


PUGNOSEMINNOW
1
PH


&
0
G
^


•o
C
|H
o"



crassilabrum

CO
3
"S
Q
1

-------
 1

I
 >>
I
|
nnow
nnow
nnow
nnow
ow
nnow
nnow
                 I
                                                                                •s
•s    -a
s    s
                                                                                u   u
                                                                                TO    OS

                                                                               O    U
                                                                                                           -s
                                                                                                      o
 S
 es
T3

l§

 0<

y"
                 T3
                             T3   T3 '   73

                             !§   !§    3
                                                               •a
                       u    y   y
                                        B.
                                        >>
                                       U
                                        OH

                                        >,

                                       O
                                                         U
     §
                                  12
                                  'S

                                   o.

                                  y'
                       12
                       'S

                       o.

                       y"
                                                                         rs
                                                                         *c
                                                                          3
      2    3    ,3
      <2    «    "3
      o    o     o
                                              5   r3    ^5


                                              o   t5     o
 Q.
      o
      (U
                 I
                 §
 53          M
•—    x    3


 I    t    I

 &,   >    i
 S2
 
-------

-------
                                               999*
I
   ^>

   oo
   g
   _>

   oo
   _o

   oo
_CJ

55
            t
            42
                   CJ
                oo  oo
s

o
oo
a
o<
CJ
00
a
o<
CJ
oo
a
Oi
00
a
a
CJ
00
a
CH
CJ
oo
a
a<
3
CJ
OO
a
CH
CJ
00
la
&
a
£


                   §  O
                   O.  O
                      33333
                      o   o
                      U  U
                   o
                  -U
             a  a
          CO  CO

          i  §
          o  o
          U  U
                                   a
                                   o
                             S
                             o
             g
             o
                                                      CO


                                                      I
                                                      •S
       o  o  o  S
       S  S  S  <
          O.  Q.
          O  O

          1  1
          <  <;
                                                            CO


                                                            43
             I

-------
                                     I
        •s
•s     -s
'a     «§     "§
 333
CO     CO     00
               oo    co
                              1
                              CO
•s
1
co
                                             CO
                                                    1
                                                    CO
 3
co
                                                                   CO
                                                                                          a
                                                                                         00
                                                                                  co
                                                                                         co
                                                                                                        1
                                                                                                        co
                                                            3
                                                           CO
                                                                                  3
                                                                                  CO
                                                                                                                              •S
                                                                                                 3
                                                                                                CO
                                                           1
                                                           OH
<§
        8
                       43
                      I
               12
               H
                      3
                              1>      (U
                              c3      ctJ
                             12     ."2-
                              o      o
 a
 
-------
£
 >>

1
•§
 53
PH
      •§    •§
      53    53
      OH    PH.
                        53
                        PH
•S    -8    -8
 fe     <3     (3
           1
           PH
I
PH

                                                                  &
I
PH
                                                &
•S    -S
(S    &
1    I
1
OH
            I
      1    1
      PH    OH
            3
            -a

                                                                        %
                                                                        •o
                                               I
                                     8
                                    •o
                                                            OH    PH    PH    PH  .  PH
                                                                                                      •O   T3
                                                                                                      •Q
                                                                                                                  £    a    a
                                                                                                                  OT    CQ    CT
                                                                                                                        -t3    T3

                                                                                                                  'S    'S    'S

                                                                                                                  £    S    &
I
 I
I
       1
                              •s
                              •S
I
       8
 «   "i
•I    1
A   1
kennecotti
ongimanum
maculatum
                                                3

                                                fcb
tedi
                                                                                                 h     C
                                                                                                5     8

                                     (L>



                                     I    I
                                     S     tu
                                     S    aa
                                    T3    JJH
                                     O     a
 I    I    I    I    I    I    I
 *3    -£5    -tf    *3    *3    iS    *3
      I    I.
                               O
                               O)
                                           O
                                           0)
                                                       s     s     s
                                                       o     o.o
                                                 S    S
                                                                         S     S     S
                                                                         o     o     o
                                                            C3     03     Ctf

                                                            I     I     I
                                                             c3     K!     cQ
                                                             S     S     S
                                                             o     o     o
                                                                         4>(L>4>(i>qj

-------
LTCODE
1
a>
z
1*
3


a*
g
fa


8
en



§
a
0>


Common Name
O
1


1



•o
y



stigmaeum

i
0
o

W


SPECKLEDDARTER
£
1


•g

Cu

•a
y



swannanoa

1
o
o

•S
W

^.J
SWANNANOADARTEF
PH
1


•g

fW

•a
y
CW


tippecanoe

i
0
CO
O
U
W


TIPPECANOEDARTER
>
i


.g
o3
PH

I
03
s
2
CO
O

w


BANDEDDARTER
!
SP
PH


•S



1
0
£•


aurantiaca



§
0
PL!


TANGERINEDARTER
I
1


•8



•0
o
£


1
js



03
C
b.
P^
«
CJ
BLOTCHSIDELOGPERi
i
1


o



-------
Ed
VERTCOD
o>
1
1
fa
C8
fa

en




i
¥


CD
Common Nai
h-y
PERCROA^


•§

Percidae

roanoka



CB
C
'g

-------
                  |J    w

                  3    §
                  co    e
73
CO
                        I
                        o
                        .
                        -a
                   
-------
 Code
        Aquatic Vertebrates of the Western United States.
Latin name	            Common name (vouchering category)
 LAMPAY       Lampetra ayresi
 LAMPLE       Lampetra lethophaga
 LAMPRI        Lampetra richardsoni
 LAMPTR       Lampetra tridentata
 LAMPSI        Lampetra similis
 LAMPZZ
 COITAL       Cottus aleuticus
 COTTAS        Cottus asper
 COTTBA       Cottus bairdi
 COTTBE        Cottus beldingi
 COTTCF        Cottus confusus
 COTTGU       Cottus gulosus
 COITKL        Cottus klamathensis
 COTTMA       Cottus marginatus
 COTTPE        Cottus perplexus
 COTTPI         Cottus pitensis
 COTTPR        Cottus princeps
 COTTRH        Cottus rhotheus
 COTTTE        Cottus tenuis
 LEPTAR       Leptocottus armatus
 COTTZZ
 ACIPME       Acipenser medirostris
 ACBPTR        Acipenser transmontanus
 ALOSSA       Alosa sapidissima
 CLUPPA       Clupea pallasi
ONCOGO       Oncorhynchus gorbuscha
ONCOKE       Oncorhynchus keta
ONCOKI       Oncorhynchus kisutch
ONCONE       Oncorhynchus nerka
                             river lamprey 2
                             pit-klamath brook lamprey 2
                             western brook lamprey 2
                             pacific lamprey 2; goose lake lamprey 3
                             klamath river lamprey 2
                             unknown lamprey
                             coastrange sculpin 2
                             prickly sculpin 2
                             mottled sculpin 2; malheur motted sculpin 3
                             paiute sculpin 2
                             shorthead sculpin 2
                             riffle sculpin 2
                             marbled sculpin 2
                             margined sculpin 3
                             reticulate,sculpin 2
                             pit sculpin 3
                             klamath lake sculpin 2
                             torrent sculpin 2
                             slender sculpin 3
                             pacific staghorn sculpin 2
                             unknown  Cottid
                             green sturgeon 1
                             white sturgeon 1
                             American shad 1
                             pacific herring 2
                             pink salmon 3
                             chum salmon 3
                             coho salmon 3
                             sockeye salmon 3

-------
Code
Latin name
Common name (vouchering category)
ONCOTS       Oncorhynchus tshawytscha
ONCOAG       Oncorhynchus aguabonita
ONCOCL       Oncorhynchus clarki
ONCOMY      Oncorhynchus mykiss
PROSWI       Prosopium williamsoni
SALMSA       Salmo salar
SALMTR       Salmo trutta
SALVCO       Salvelinus confluentus
SALVFO       Salvelinus fontinalis
SALVNA       Salvelinus namaycush
SALM2Z
HYPOPR       Hypomesus pretiosus
SPIRTH       Spirinchus thaleichthys
THALPA       Thaleichthys pacificus
ACROAL      Acrocheilus alutaceus
CARAAU      Carassius auratus
CTENID       Ctenopharyngodon idella
CYPRCA      Cyprinus carpio
GILAAL       Gila alvordensis ,
GILABI       Gila bicolor

 GDLABO        Gila boraxobius
 GELACO        Gila coerulea
 LAVISY        Lavinia symmetricus
 MYLOCA      Mylocheilus caurinus
 NOTECR       Notemigonus crysoleucas
 PIMEPR        Pimephales promelas
 PTYCOR       Ptychocheilus oregonensis
 PTYCUM      Ptychocheilus umpquae
 RHINCA       Rhinichthys cataractae
 RHINEV       Rhinichthys evermanni
                              chinook salmon 3
                              golden trout 1
                              cutthroat trout; Umpqua 3, Lahontan 3
                              rainbow trout 1
                              mountain whitefish 1
                              atlantic salmon 1
                              brown trout 1
                             • bull trout 3
                              brook trout 1
                              lake trout 1
                              unknown salmonid
                              surf smelt 2
                              longfin smelt 2
                              eulachon 2
                              chiselmouth 1
                              goldfish 1
                              grass carp 1
                              common carp 1
                              alvord chub 3
                              tui chub 1; Callow, Hutton, Goose Lake, Oregon
                              Lakes, Sheldon, Summer Basin and Warner 3
                              borax lake chub 3
                              blue chub 2
                              California roach 3
                              peamouth 1
                               golden shiner 2
                               fathead minnow 2
                               northern squawfish 1
                               umpqua squawfish 1
                               longnose dace 2
                               umpqua dace 2
   IMF :|ig!|iagil»i!i!iii!liilHl|ii! JiiiluiiiiiilliiiiJiipllljijIlliilllljiEiii':


-------
                                                                                                         1
 Code
Latin name
                                             Common name (vouchering category)
 RHINFA        Rhinichthys falcatus
 RHINOS        Rhinichthys osculus

 RICHBA        Richardsonius balteatus
 RICHEG        Richardsonius egregius
 TINCTI         Tinea tinea
 OREGCR       Oregonichthys crameri
 OREGKA       Oregonichthys kalawatseti
 CYPRZZ
 CATOCB       Catostomus columbianus
 CATOMA       Catostomus macrocheilus
 CATOOC       Catostomus occidentalis
 CATOPL        catostomus platyrhynchus
 CATORI        Catostomus rimiculus
 CATOSY        Catostomus snyderi
 CATOTA        Catostomus tahoensis
 CATOWA       Catostomus warnerensis
 CHASER        Chasmistes brevirostris
 DELTLU        Deltistes luxatus
 CATOZZ
 MISGAN        Misgurnus anguillicaudatus
 AMEICA        Ameiurus catus
 AMEIME        Ameiurasmelas
 AMEINA       Ameiurus natalis
 AMEINE       Ameiuras nebulosus
ICTAPU        Ictalurus punctatus
NOTUGY       Noturus gyrinus
PYLOOL       Pylodictis olivaris
PERCTR       Percopsis transmountana
LOTALO       Lota lota
MICRPR       Microgadus proximus
                              leopard dace 2
                              speckled dace 2; foskett speckled dace 3; millicoma
                              dace 3
                              redside shiner 2
                              lahontan redside 3
                              tench 1
                              Oregon chub 3
                              umpqua chub 3
                              unknown cyprinid
                              bridgelip sucker  1
                              largescale sucker 1
                              sacramento sucker 1; Goose Lake sucker 3
                             mountain sucker 2
                             klamath smallscale sucker 1; Jenny Creek sucker 3
                             klamath largescale sucker 3
                             tahoe sucker 3
                             warner sucker 3
                             shortnose sucker  3
                             lost river sucker 3
                             unknown catostomid
                             oriental weatherfish 2
                             white catfish 1
                             black bullhead 1
                             yellow bullhead 1
                             brown bullhead 1
                             channel catfish 1
                             tadpole madtom 2
                             flathead catfish 1
                             sand roller 2
                             burbot 1
                             pacific tomcod 2

-------
Code
Latin name
                                            Common name (vouchering category)
FUNDDI
LUCAPA
GAMBAF
ATHEAF
GASTAC
MOROSA
ARCHIN
LEPOCY
LEPOGI
LEOPGU
LEPOMA
LEPOMI
MCRDO
MICRSA
POMOAN
POMONI
 CENTRZZ
 PERCFL
 STEZVI
 CYMAAG
 PHOLOR
 PLATST
 PSEURE
 ASCATR
 RANAAU
 RANABO
 RANACA
 RANACT
 RANAPI
 RANAPR
Fundulus diaphanus
Lucania parva
Gambusia affinis
Atherinops affinis
Gasterosteus aculeatus
Morone saxatilis
Archoplites interruptus
Lepomis cyanellus
Lepomis gibbosus
Lepomis gulosus
Lepomis macrochirus
Lepomis microlophus
Micropterus dolomieui
Micropteras salmoides
Pomoxis annularis
Pomoxis nigromaculatus

 Percaflavescens
 Stizostedion vitrqum
 Cymatogaster aggregata
 Pholis omata
 Platichthys stellatus
 Pseudacris regilla
 Ascaphus traei
 Rana aurora
 Rana boylii
 Rana cascadae
 Rana catesbiana
 Rana pipiens
 Rana pretiosa
banded killifish 2
rainwater killifish 2
western mosquitofish 2
topsmelt 2
threespine stickleback 2
striped bass 1
sacramento perch
green sunfish 1
pumpkinseed 1
warmouth 1
bluegill 1
redear sunfish 1
 smallmouth bass 1
 largemouth bass 1
 white crappie 1
 black crappie 1
 unknown centrarchid
 yellow perch 1
 walleye 1
 shiner perch 1
 saddleback gunnel  2
 starry flounder 1
 pacific tree frog
 tailed frog
 red-legged frog
 foothill yellow-legged frog
 cascade frog
 bullfrog
 leopard frog
  spotted frog

                                                                                      '-4TJ,

-------

-------
                Code
Latin name
Common name (vouchering category)
                BUFOBO       Bufo boreas
                BUFOWO      Bufo woodhousii
                AMBYGR      Ambystoma gracile
                AMBYMA     Ambystoma macrodactylum
                AMBYIT       Ambystoma tigrinum
                DICACO       Dicamptodon copei
                DICATE       Dicamptodon tenebrosus
                RHYACA      Rhyacotrition cascadae
                RHYAKE       Rhyacotriton kezeri
                RHYAVA      Rhyacotriton variegatus
                TARIGR       Taricha granulosa
                AMPHZZ       Rana sp. -
                             western toad
                             woodhouse's toad
                             northwestern salamander
                             longtoed salamander
                             tiger salamander
                             cope's giant salamander
                             pacific giant salamander
                             cascade torrent salamander
                             Columbia torrent salamander
                             southern torrent salamander
                             rough-skinned newt
                             unknown amphibian
^

-------

-------
United States
Environmental Protection Agency/ORD
National Exposure Research Laboratory
Research Triangle Park, NC 27711
Please make all necessary changes on the below label,
detach or copy, and return to the address in the upper
left-hand corner.

If you do not wish to receive these reports CHECK HEREd
detach, or copy this cover, and return to the address in the
upper left-hand corner.
Official Business
Penalty for Private Use
$300
EPA/620/R-00/007

-------